QCC Benefits Management Manual

Transcription

Quintessential School Systems
QCC
Benefits Management
Manual
© Quintessential School Systems (QSS), 2010
All Rights Reserved
867 American Street, Second Floor --- San Carlos, CA 94070 --- Voice 650/598-9500 --- Fax 650/372-3386 --- www.qss.com
Published: October 2010
Copyright Notice
Copyright © Quintessential School Systems, 2010
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise without the prior written approval
of Quintessential School Systems (QSS).
The information contained in this document is subject to change without
notice.
QUINTESSENTIAL SCHOOL SYSTEMS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Quintessential School Systems shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or resulting from the use of this material.
QSS/OASIS, STUDENT/3000, and SCHOOL/3000 are registered trademarks
of Quintessential School Systems.
The samples of reports, windows, and dialog boxes in this document are provided to illustrate the operation of the software at a typical site. All names and
addresses are fictitious. The actual windows, dialog boxes, and reports at your
site may vary from the samples in this documentation.
Contents
List of Figures
List of Tables
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2: System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3: Master Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4: Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5: Reports, Processing, and Invoicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audience and Knowledge Assumed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knowledge Assumed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help Files for QCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Resources for System Administrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows and Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-7
1-7
1-7
Chapter 2: System Overview
What is Benefits Management? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tracking Plans and Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tracking Dependents and Their Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Automatic Record Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Information That Can Be Tracked Using Benefits Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Setting Up Benefits Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Assigning Benefit Packages to Employees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Reports and Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Benefits Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Benefits Management Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Benefits Management Invoicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Chapter 3: Master Files
Background Master File Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of Benefits Management Master Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits Management and Voluntary Deductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the Master Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order for Completing Benefits Management Master Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
--- continued on next page ---
10/2010
Copyright © QSS, 2009
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-6
Contents-1
Chapter 3: Master Files - continued
Dependent Code (BMDC) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
When to Use the Dependent Code (BMDC) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Instructions for Defining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Benefit Status (BMBS) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
When to Use the Benefit Status Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Instructions for Defining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Coverage Level (BMLC) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
When to Use the Coverage Level Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Instructions for Defining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Plan Codes (BMPC) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
When to Use the Plan Code Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Choosing a Billing Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Cap Amounts (BMCA) Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
When to Use the Cap Amounts Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Package Codes (BMPK) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
When to Use the Package Code Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Types of Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Package Assignment (BMPA) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
When to Use the Package Assignment (BMPA) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
When to Use the FTE Allocation Table Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Employee Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Plan/Level Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Thirteen Ways to Set Up Premium Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Table Summarizing Premium Amount Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Choosing a Billing Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
Deduction Class List (BMCL) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
When to Use the Deduction Class List (BMCL) Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Connection to the Benefits Management (BM) Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Example of Using a Deduction Class for an Irregular Deduction Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
Instructions for Defining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Contents-2
10/2010
Contents
Chapter 4: Benefits Management Form
Description of the Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Menu Bar and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Name Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Employee Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Benefit Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Tab Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Opening the Employee Maintenance Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Logging On to QCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Opening the Employee Maintenance Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Searching for an Employee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Assigning Employees to Benefit Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Assigning Individual Employees on the Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Linking to a Salary Schedule on the Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Changing an Employee’s Benefit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Causes for Changes to Premium Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Causes for Changes to the Allocation of Premium Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Methods of Effecting Changes in Premium Amounts or Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Creating an Audit Trail of Changes to Premium Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Using an Exit Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Quick Change Tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Making Changes Directly on the Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Updating the Benefits Management form for Changed FTE in Position Control . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Viewing and Maintaining Inactive Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Chapter 5: Reports, Processes, and Invoicing
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Overview of Reports, Processing, and Invoicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Categories on the Tree View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Benefits Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Benefits Management Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Benefits Management Invoicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
The Launch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Options Menu and Toolbar Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Message Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Tab Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Opening a Launch Window from QCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Logging On to QCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Selecting the Job Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Opening a Launch Window from the Job Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
10/2010
Contents-3
Chapter 5: Reports, Processes, and Invoicing - continued
Benefits Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Request Benefits Management Cash Out Report (BM0230) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Request Benefits Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Request Billing Report (BM0210) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Request Dependents Report (BM0220) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Benefits Management Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) Window . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Benefits Management Invoicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Code Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
Description of Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
Selecting Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
Appendix A: Common Elements in QCC Windows
Appendix Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Resizing Windows or Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Resizing Borders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Resizing Buttons in Upper Right Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
The Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Navigating through the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Sorting the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Resizing Column Widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Filling In Boxes in Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Moving from Tab to Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Moving from One Box to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Selecting Options from Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Typing in a Text Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Checking Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Selecting Option Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Typing or Selecting Dates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
About Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
User Security Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Contents-4
10/2010
Contents
Appendix B: Presets
Appendix Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Presets Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presets for QCC and Traditional Financial Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Categories and Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Report Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Replacing Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boxes for Saving Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieving or Deleting Report Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting, Retrieving, and Deleting Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information About Saved Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-2
B-2
B-3
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-7
B-7
B-7
B-8
Appendix C: Vendor Lookup Window and Reports
Appendix Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Vendor Lookup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Overview of Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Searching for Vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Tabs on the Vendor Lookup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Vendor Information Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Menu Bar and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Vendor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Link to Vendor Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Vendor Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Transaction Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Vendor Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
Report Viewing Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
Appendix D: Grid Output Window
Appendix Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
In This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Menu Bar and Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Options Menu and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Saving, Printing, and Opening Data from a Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Printing to the Default Windows Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Creating a Delimited Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Creating a PDF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Opening in Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Opening in Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Opening in Excel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
Revision History
Index
10/2010
Contents-5
Contents-6
10/2010
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Figure 3-1: Dependent Code (BMDC) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Figure 3-2: Benefit Status (BMBS) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Figure 3-3: Coverage Level (BMLC) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Figure 3-4: Plan Codes (BMPC) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Figure 3-5: Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Figure 3-6: Pre-defined package in the Package Codes (BMPK) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Figure 3-7: Pre-defined package on the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Figure 3-8: Completely user-defined Package on the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Figure 3-9: Core plan plus user-defined plans in the Package Codes (BMPK) master file. . . . . .3-28
Figure 3-10: Core plan plus user-defined plans on the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Figure 3-11: Package Codes (BMPK) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Figure 3-12: Package Assignment (BMPA) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Figure 3-13: FTE Allocation Table Used as Employee-Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Figure 3-14: BMFT—Premium Using Employee-Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Figure 3-15: BMPL—Medical Record Used with Employee-Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Figure 3-16: BMPL—Dental Record Used with Employee-Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Figure 3-17: Result of Benefits Management form on premiums using the employee-type
FTE table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Figure 3-18: Package Assignment (BMPA) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
Figure 3-19: Add New/Edit area for adding or changing rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Figure 3-20: PL—Premium amounts not connected to employee FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Figure 3-21: Result on Benefits Management form of premium not connected to employee
FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Figure 3-22: BMPL—Sliding-scale correlation between premium percentage and employee
FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Figure 3-23: Result on Benefits Management form of using ’F’ flag for sliding-scale
correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Figure 3-24: BMPL—Stepped correlation between premium percentage and employee FTE . . .3-58
Figure 3-25: Result on Benefits Management form of using stepped correlation between premium
and FTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
Figure 3-26: BMPL—Premium using employee-type FTE table with dollar amounts . . . . . . . . .3-61
Figure 3-27: BMPL—Premium using employee-type table with percentage amounts . . . . . . . . .3-61
Figure 3-28: BMFT—Premium using employee-type FTE table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62
Figure 3-29: Result on Benefits Management form of premium using employee-type FTE table3-63
10/2010
Figures-1
QCC Benefits Mangement Manual
Figure 3-30: BMPL—Premium as percent of employee income using FTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
Figure 3-31: Result on Benefits Management form of premium as percent of income using
FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
Figure 3-32: BMPL—Premium as percent of employee income not using FTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Figure 3-33: Result on Benefits Management form of premium as percent of income not using
FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-69
Figure 3-34: Plan/Level screen for basic life insurance paid by employer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71
Figure 3-35: Units, Increment, and Rate columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71
Figure 3-36: Basic Life Insurance on the BM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-72
Figure 3-37; Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file for optional term life insurance for
employee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-74
Figure 3-38: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file for optional term life insurance for
spouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
Figure 3-39: BM screen with optional term life insurance for employee and spouse . . . . . . . . . .3-76
Figure 3-40: BM Screen with Units for term life available for entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
Figure 3-41: Generic Coverage Level (BMLC) master file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Figure 3-42: Generic Plan Codes (BMPC) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Figure 3-43: Sample Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
Figure 3-44: BMPL - Cap Amount on Total Employer Cost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
Figure 3-45: BM screen showing effect of Cap applied against total employer costs. . . . . . . . . .3-81
Figure 3-46: Coverage Level code for Cap to be applied to largest employer cost. . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
Figure 3-47: BMPL - Health plan to be capped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
Figure 3-48: Cap Amount set for certificated bargaining unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Figure 3-49: BM screen for cap on largest employer benefit cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Figure 3-50: BMPL - Set cost for employer-provided benefit by FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
Figure 3-51: Benefits Management form reflecting employer paid benefit for 1.0 FTE
employee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
Figure 3-53: Benefits Management form reflecting employer-paid benefit for 0.5 FTE
employee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-87
Figure 3-54: BMPL - maximum employee cost to be reduced by FTE pro-ration . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
Figure 3-55: Benefits Management form reflecting positive employee amount and negative employer
amount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
Figure 3-56: Benefits Management form reflecting employee amount and zero employer
amount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
Figure 3-57: Benefits Management form reflecting Employee FTE pro-rated cost at 1.0 FTE . .3-91
Figure 3-58: Employee and employer set-up for aggregation by FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
Figure 3-59: Benefits Management form reflecting an aggregate by FTE benefit cost. . . . . . . . .3-94
Figure 3-60: Benefits Management form with less than 1.0 FTE and aggregate by FTE benefit
cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
Figure 3-61: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file with FTE allocation table . . . . . . . . . . . .3-99
Figure 3-62: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file without FTE allocation table . . . . . . . .3-100
Figure 3-63: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes for all Plan/Level codes . . . . . . .3-100
Figures-2
10/2010
List of Figures
Figure 3-64: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes for life insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-104
Figure 3-65: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes for automatic creation of Voluntary
Deductions in Payroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-104
Figure 3-66: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes for billing through Invoicing/Billing
Management (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-106
Figure 3-67: Add New/Edit area for adding or changing rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
Figure 3-68: Default Frequency Codes on the Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management
form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-111
Figure 3-69: Vol-ded Frequency Codes for 11-month employee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112
Figure 3-70: Deduction Class List for Class 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-113
Figure 3-71: Payroll Information tab showing frequency codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
Figure 3-72: Deductions (PD) form showing employee enrolled in deductions . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
Figure 3-73: Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-116
Figure 4-1: Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Figure 4-2: Title bar for the Benefits Management form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Figure 4-3: Menu bar and toolbar for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-4: File menu for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-5: Options menu for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-6: Window menu for the Benefits Management form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-7: Toolbar for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-8: Name bar for the Benefits Management form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Figure 4-9: Status bar for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Figure 4-10: Employee Information area of the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Figure 4-11: Demographic information from the Demographic (MA) form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Figure 4-12: Position information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Figure 4-13: Benefit Information area of the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Figure 4-14: Tab bar for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Figure 4-15: Plan Information tab for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Figure 4-16: Dependents tab for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Figure 4-17: Columns in the grid for the Dependents tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Figure 4-18: Totals for an employee’s dependents on the Benefits tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Figure 4-19: Customer Information tab for the Benefits Management form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Figure 4-20: Quick Change tab for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Figure 4-21: Comments tab for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Figure 4-22: Benefit comment dialog box for adding, changing, or deleting comments . . . . . . .4-27
Figure 4-23: Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Figure 4-24: Boxes in the Payroll Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Figure 4-25: Status bar for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Figure 4-26: QCC icon on the Windows desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
10/2010
Figures-3
Chapter 4: Benefits Management Form - continued
Figure 4-27: Login dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Figure 4-28: Employee Maintenance window to illustrate searching for an employee . . . . . . . . .4-33
Figure 4-29: Benefits Information area for adding an employee to a Package Code . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Figure 4-30: Plan Information tab for assigning an employee to a Package Code . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Figure 4-31: Add Plan and Remove Plan commands dimmed for pre-defined plans . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Figure 4-32: Closing a package by using the Exit date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Figure 4-33: Benefits Management form ready to accept a new Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Figure 4-34: Benefits Management form with a new Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Figure 4-35: Benefits Management form before package correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Figure 4-36: Benefits Management form during package correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Figure 4-37: Benefits Management form after package correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Figure 4-38: Quick Change tab for the Demographic (MA) form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Figure 4-39: Benefits Management form with Quick Change tab filled in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Figure 4-40: Benefits Management form with Quick Change tab updated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Figure 5-1: Report window for Benefits Management reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Figure 5-2: Title bar for the report window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Figure 5-3: File menu for the report window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Figure 5-4: Display a job script for last job launched (STTEMP) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Figure 5-5: Options menu for the report window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Figure 5-6: Toolbar icons for the report window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Figure 5-7: Relationship of job number, report title, and report name to Print Manager window5-15
Figure 5-8: Message bar for the report window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Figure 5-9: Tab bar for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Figure 5-10: Status bar for the report window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Figure 5-11: QCC icon on the Windows desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Figure 5-12: Login dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Figure 5-13: Opening the Job Menu window for Benefits Management from the Go menu . . . .5-18
Figure 5-14: Tree View with HR Reporting and Downloading subfolder expanded . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Figure 5-15: Toolbar view for opening the Job Menu window for Benefits Management . . . . . .5-19
Figure 5-16: Job Menu window with all folders closed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Figure 5-17: Job Menu window with all folders closed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Figure 5-18: Job Menu window with folders opened to expose reports and processes . . . . . . . . .5-22
Figure 5-19: Grid view for Job Menu window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Figure 5-20: Grid view with results of searching for the "rec" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Figure 5-21: Message when you try to open a second Job Menu window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Figure 5-22: Application switching after pressing ALT+TAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Figures-4
10/2010
List of Figures
Figure 5-23: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Figure 5-24: Select Employees for the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Figure 5-25: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window
5-38
Figure 5-26: Select Employees for the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window 5-42
Figure 5-27: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Cashout Report (BM0230)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Figure 5-28: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
Figure 5-29: Main Selection tab for the Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) window
5-58
Figure 5-30: Report Selections tab for the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window . . . . . . . .5-62
Figure 5-31: Select Employees for the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Figure 5-32: Report Request Screen for Billing Report Sorted by Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
Figure 5-33: Billing Report—Request for one insurer only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68
Figure 5-34: Report Selections tab for the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window . . . .5-72
Figure 5-35: Select Employees for the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window . . . . . . .5-76
Figure 5-36: Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window for dependents reaching age 18 . .5-78
Figure 5-37: Report Selections tab for the Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window 5-81
Figure 5-38: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window. . .5-87
Figure 5-39: Report Selections tab for Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-95
Figure 5-40: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-99
Figure 5-41: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change
(BM0810) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-105
Figure 5-42: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111
Figure 5-43: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117
Figure 5-44: Main Selection tab for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-126
Figure 5-45: Employee Selection tab for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129
Figure 5-46: Deduction Selection tab for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
Figure 5-47: Benefit Deductions Imported to the Deduction form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-135
Figure 5-48: Report Selections tab for the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-138
Figure 5-49: Select Employees tab for the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-141
10/2010
Figures-5
Figure 5-50: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing
(BMI100) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-145
Figure 5-51: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010)
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-151
Figure 5-52: Select Employees tab for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection
(BMI010) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-155
Figure 5-53: Code selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-160
Figure A-1: Resizing corners or borders with pointer ready to resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Figure A-2: Minimize, Restore, and Exit buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Figure A-3: Minimize, Maximize, and Exit buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Figure A-4: Taskbar showing all open windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Figure A-5: Grid for QCC applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Figure A-6: Unavailable, available, and active boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A-7: Drop-down list box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A-8: Drop-down list box with options expanded after clicking the drop-down arrow . . A-10
Figure A-9: Check boxes with the first one selected and the second one cleared . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-10: Option buttons for selecting Interim Period 1, 2, or 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-11: Date box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Figure A-12: : About dialog box for the About command on the Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Figure A-13: Tab bar for the About dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Figure A-14: Program Info tab for the About dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Figure A-15: Package information for QCC on the Package Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Figure A-16: USERSEC tab for the About dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Figure A-17: User Security window for the Security command on the Help menu . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Figure A-18: Columns in the grid for the User Security window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Appendix B: Presets
Figure B-1: Preset Maintenance - Save dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-2: Fields for saving report presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-3: Preset Maintenance - Retrieve dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure B-4: Information about saved presets in the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
B-5
B-7
B-8
Figure C-1: Parts of the Vendor Lookup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Figure C-2: Search criteria for all vendor search tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Figure C-3:: Contact Information subtab for searching vendor records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Figure C-4: Additional Information subtab for looking up vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Figure C-5: Commodity Lookup tab for looking up vendors by commodity code . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Figure C-6: Employee Lookup tab for looking up SSNs and ExtRef numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Figures-6
10/2010
List of Figures
Appendix C: Vendor Lookup Window and Reports - continued
Figure C-7: VCR buttons for vendor lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-8: Right-click menu for a vendor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-9: Results tab listing of vendors that match search criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-10: Show additional addresses dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-11: Show commodities dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-12: Parts of the Vendor Information report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-13: Vendor information from the Contact Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-14: Vendor information from the Optional Information tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-15: Vendor information from the Addt’l Addresses tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-16: Vendor information from the Comments tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-17: Transaction selections for the Vendor Activity report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-18: Parts of the Vendor Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-19: Summary of vendor information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-20: Summary of financial information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-21: List of transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-22: Commands for viewing and managing report windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C-23: VCR buttons for selecting view and pages within each view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-14
C-14
C-14
C-16
C-16
C-17
C-18
C-18
C-19
C-19
C-20
C-22
C-23
C-23
C-24
C-26
C-26
Figure D-1: Grid Output window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Figure D-2: Options menu and toolbar for the Grid Output window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Figure D-3: Example of using a module in QCC as the source for the Grid Output window . . . . D-6
Figure D-4: Settings for printing to the default Windows printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Figure D-5: Settings for creating a text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Figure D-6: Save As dialog box for making a text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Figure D-7: Settings for creating a PDF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Figure D-8: Create PDF dialog box for making a PDF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
Figure D-9: Settings for opening a list in Word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Figure D-10: Save As dialog box dialog box for Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Figure D-11: Settings for opening a list in Excel or Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Figure D-12: Save As dialog box dialog box for Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
Figure D-13: Settings for opening a list in Excel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
Figure D-14: Text Import Wizard step for choosing original data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-21
Figure D-15: Wizard for dividing up the report line into spreadsheet columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-22
Figure D-16: Wizard for defining the data format for each column of the spreadsheet . . . . . . . D-23
Figure D-17: Microsoft Excel window with data imported into columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-24
Figure D-18: Save As dialog box dialog box for Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-25
10/2010
Figures-7
Figures-8
10/2010
List of Tables
Table 1-1: Typography for describing windows, dialog boxes, and boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Table 3-1: Quick start guide for the Benefits Managements processes and reports . . . . . . 3-3
Table 4-1: Quick start guide for the Benefits Management processes and reports . . . . . . . 4-2
Table 4-2: Summary of commands for the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Table 4-3: Summary of commands for the BM comment dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Table 4-4: Causes for changes to the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Table 4-5: Methods of change to the Benefits Management form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Table 5-1: Quick start guide for the Benefits Management processes and reports . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-2: Reports and processes listed by launch window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-3: Reports and processes listed by report name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Table 5-4: Overview of the report window 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 5-5: Summary of commands on the File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Table 5-6: Summary of commands on the Options menu and toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Table 5-7: Summary of commands for the Job Menu window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Table 5-8: Tabs for the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) window 5-29
Table 5-9: Tabs for the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window . . . . . . 5-37
Table 5-10: Tabs for the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Table 5-11: Tabs for the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Table 5-12: Tabs for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
Table 5-13: Tabs for the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window . . . . 5-137
Table 5-14: Tabs for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window . . 5-150
Table 5-15: Summary of commands for the code selection dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
Table A-1: Mouse pointer shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Table A-1: Keyboard shortcuts for moving through the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Table C-1: Commands for the Vendor Lookup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Table C-2: Menu bar and toolbar commands for viewing reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
Table D-1: Parts of the Grid Output window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Table D-2: Menu and toolbar commands for the Grid Output window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Table D-3: Keys for moving through the data grid after clicking a cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Table D-4: Commands for the Create PDF dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
10/2010
Tables-1
QCC Benefits Managment Manual
Tables-2
10/2010
Chapter 1:
Introduction
Chapter Contents
Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Audience and Knowledge Assumed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Manual Overview
The QCC Benefits Management Manual tells how set up benefit plans and packages,
assign them to employees, and use a variety of reports to track and manage benefit
costs. You can also integrate Benefits Management with the Payroll System and
Invoicing/Billing Management.
This chapter summarizes the contents of this manual, explains assumed knowledge
and experience, identifies documentation conventions, and points to other resources
about the QCC software.
This chapter identifies the parts of the Benefits Management System, explains how
they work together, and tells how to implement and use the system.
This chapter describes how to set up the master files for Benefits Management. The
ultimate goal of this process is creating benefit plans that are assembled into benefit
packages. Each employee is assigned to one benefit package.
The Benefits Management (BM) form for the Employee Maintenance window allow
you to assign each employee to a benefit package. The form displays all of the benefit
plans in the package, such as life insurance and medical benefits. You can customize
the benefit plan for each employee.
10/2010
1-1
Chapter 5: Reports, Processing, and Invoicing
This chapter tells how to use the reports and processes that you can launch from the
Job Menu window for Benefits Management. Reports allow you to analyze benefit
information in a variety of ways. Processes allow you to do mass updates of employee
benefits. Invoicing allows you to integrate Benefits Management with Invoicing/Billing Management for invoicing employees for benefits.
Appendices
This appendix is for people who are unfamiliar with Windows or QCC. It tells how to
use the mouse, manipulate windows on the Windows desktop, fill in boxes in QCC
windows and dialog boxes, and use the Help menu for QCC.
Appendix B: Presets
This appendix tells how to save and retrieve presets for the reports and processes
described in Chapter 5. Presets allow you to save the way you have filled in launch
window, then retrieve the preset again the next time you want to use the same settings
for a report or job.
This appendix tells how to look up vendors and get reports of activity for vendors
when you are associating Accounts Payable vendors with Benefit Plans.
Appendix D: Grid OUtput Window
This appendix tells how to use the Grid Output window to save the contents of a grid
as a Word, PDF, Excel, or text file.
Audience and Knowledge Assumed
Audience
The QCC Benefits Management Manual is written for the district office staff who are
responsible for defining and administering employee benefits. Benefits Management
provides a way to combine benefit plans (such as life and health insurance) into packages that you can assign to employees. For districts that are integrating Benefits Management with Payroll and Invoicing/Billing Management, this manual assumes that
you have set up and are familiar with those parts of QSS/OASIS.
1-2
10/2010
Audience and Knowledge Assumed
Knowledge Assumed
This manual assumes that you are familiar with benefits administration, such as the
benefit packages negotiated by each bargaining unit, the rules for Section 125 plans,
COBRA coverage, and how your district handles benefits for retirees. You should
have a thorough understanding of all these areas before starting to use Benefits
Management.
Knowledge Assumed
This document assumes that you can do basic tasks on a PC, such as the following:
♦ Turning on the computer and starting Windows.
♦ Logging in to the network at your site. This procedure can vary from site to site.
See your system administrator for any questions about logging in or your
password.
♦ Logging in to QCC and using the QSS ControlCenter window to select the
QSS/OASIS module that you want to run.
♦ Opening and closing windows on the Windows desktop.
♦ Typing text in boxes, selecting items from lists, selecting and clearing check
boxes, filling in date boxes, and other such tasks for filling in tabs for QSS/OASIS
modules.
♦ Switching among windows on the Windows desktop with the mouse and keyboard
shortcuts.
♦ Navigating through windows and dialog boxes with the TAB key, mouse clicks,
and other standard Windows keys.
If you are not familiar with these tasks, there are additional materials that you can
read.
♦ See Appendix A for detailed instructions on using the mouse, resizing windows,
using the grid, filling in boxes, selecting dates, and selecting check boxes and
option buttons.
♦ See the QSS ControlCenter Guide for instructions on logging on to QCC and
launching QCC applications from the Go menu. This document is available from
the Help menu in the QSS ControlCenter window.
10/2010
1-3
Related Documentation
This discussion points out the following additional sources for information about QSS
ControlCenter (QCC):
♦ Help Files for QCC
♦ Additional Resources for System Administrators
Help Files for QCC
This discussion focuses on the following areas:
♦ Viewing Help Files from QCC
♦ QSS ControlCenter Guide
♦ Printing Reports with Print Manager
Viewing Help Files from QCC
The Help menu on the QSS ControlCenter window allows you to have access to this
document, as well as other manuals for QCC. The documents are in.pdf format, and
your PC must have Adobe Reader 5.0 or later installed to open these files.
To view documentation for QCC:
1 From the menu bar on the QSS ControlCenter window, point to Help then select
QSS Latest Migration Information.
2 Click the link to Migration Documentation and Training Guides.
3 Click the manual that you want to view.
Two of the manuals on this list provide the basic instructions for using QCC: QSS
ControlCenter Guide and Printing Reports with Print Manager.
QSS ControlCenter Guide
The QSS ControlCenter Guide is the basic guide for how to use QCC. This guide tells
how to do the following:
♦ Log on to QCC.
♦ Open QCC application windows from the menus on the QSS ControlCenter
window.
♦ Switch from one application window to another.
♦ Launch reports and jobs from the Job Menu window.
♦ Log off from QCC.
1-4
10/2010
Related Documentation
Additional Resources for System Administrators
Printing Reports with Print Manager
Printing Reports with Print Manager tells how to use the Print Manager window to
manage and print reports created from QSS/OASIS. This window allows you to do
the following:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
List reports by date, job number, program title, and report title.
View the $STDLISTs for creating reports.
Open up to 9 report windows with resizable fonts and full-text search.
Print reports to a Windows printer.
Route reports to a system printer on the HP e3000.
Export reports to Word, Excel, a PDF file, or a plain text file.
Additional Resources for System Administrators
This heading describes additional resources that system administrators can use for
setting up application security for QCC. It looks at the following areas:
♦ Gaining Access to Help Files
♦ System Security and Session Administration for QCC
♦ Module, Task, and User Security for QCC
Gaining Access to Help Files
The Secure Support area of the QSS Web site allows access to additional materials
that are designed for system administrators. To view these materials, you need the
user name and password for your site. The Secure Support area provides access to
release notes and system administration guides, including System Security and Session Administration for QCC and Module, Task, and User Security for QCC.
To gain access to the Secure Support area:
1 Point your Web browser to www.qss.com.
2 In the Secure Support Login Form, type your Username and Password, then click
the [Login] button.
3 Under Main Menu, click the Secure Support link.
4 Click the Documentation link.
5 For access to release notes:
 Click the QSS Release Notes Archive link to open the index page for release
notes.
 Click the QCC Software Releases link to open up the index page for QCC
releases.
10/2010
1-5
 Click a year to see all QCC releases for that year.
6 For access to manuals:
 Click the QSS/OASIS Manual link.
 From the QSS/OASIS Manuals page, click the link to the manual that you want
to view.
Some of these manuals are quite large and may take a few minutes to download.
You can save the file to your PC to avoid the download time the next time you
wish to refer to a manual.
The reference materials are.pdf format. You need Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat
5.0 or newer to view these files on your PC.
System Security and Session Administration for QCC
System Security and Session Administration is the reference guide for setting up and
managing QCC at your site.
♦ The System Security window allows you to set up QCC users and define two kinds
of application security. Module and task security allows you to define the modules
(windows) that members of each QCC user class can open from the QSS ControlCenter window and Job Menu window. User security allows you to customize how
QCC windows work for individual QCC users.
♦ The Session Administration window allows you to see what GUI users are logged
in, what applications are running, and view a log of logon and logoff events.
Module, Task, and User Security for QCC
Modules, Tasks, and User Security for QCC contains the technical notes for QCC
applications. It describes the set-up options that allow you to define the modules
(QCC windows) to which each QCC user has access.
♦ Module and task security allows you to define the QCC modules that members of
each user class can open from the QSS ControlCenter window and Job Menu
windows. Each QCC user is assigned to one or more user classes and inherits its
module and task security from them.
♦ User security allows you to customize QCC modules for individual users. For
example, the user security for the Journal Entry (FI02JE) tab on the GL Application window determines whether a a QCC user can add, change, delete, or inspect
journals. User security is linked to the server user that is associated with each QCC
user.
1-6
10/2010
Documentation Conventions
Windows and Dialog Boxes
Documentation Conventions
Windows and Dialog Boxes
After you open a module from the QSS ControlCenter window, a QCC window opens
on the Windows desktop. This window allows you to display and maintain records.
Some windows open a dialog box with commands and other tasks to do. You must fill
in a dialog box and close it before you can continue to use the window again. For
example the GL Application window has a Search command that opens up a search
dialog box. You must fill in the search dialog box and close it before you can continue
to use the GL Application window to maintain journals, cash deposits, or cash transfers.
Typography
Table 1-1 lists the typographic conventions used throughout this document.
Table 1-1: Typography for describing windows, dialog boxes, and boxes
Element
Typography
Example
Boxes for typing and
selecting data
Bold
In the Account Number box, type an account or
pseudocode.
From the District lists, select a district.
Check boxes
Bold
Select the Use Memo Account to Balance check box to
require balanced transfers.
Column names in
grids
Bold
The Object From and Object To columns display a range of
4-digit object codes.
Command buttons
Square
brackets
After you have finished filling in the Settings dialog box,
click the [OK] command to save your changes and exit.
Command icons
Picture
followed by
name and
keyboard
shortcut
If the window is in Inspect mode, click the
(Change
[Ctrl+F9]) icon to put the window in Change mode.
Dialog boxes
Italic
From the QSS ControlCenter window, you can open the
Settings dialog box.
Menu names and
commands
Bold
The File menu includes the Show Status command.
Click the
(Inspect [Ctrl+F5]) icon.
NOTE: An underlined letter indicates a shortcut key, such as
ALT+F for opening the File menu.
Option buttons
10/2010
Bold
Under Interim Period, select the option button for a
reporting period.
1-7
Table 1-1: Typography for describing windows, dialog boxes, and boxes - continued
Element
Typography
Example
Subtabs
Normal
The Acct Summ Overrides subtab displays the overrides for
the Fiscal Year and District on the top of the subtab.
ALT+O for the Acct Summ Overrides subtab.
Tabs
Normal
In the General Ledger Maintenance window, click the
Control Objects (GLMT04) tab to define control objects for
the Invoicing/Billing Management window.
ALT+O for the Control Objects (GLMT04) tab.
Windows
1-8
Italic
The Accounts Payable window allows you to set u p
payments to vendors.
10/2010
Chapter 2:
System Overview
What is Benefits Management? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Tracking Plans and Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tracking Dependents and Their Coverage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Automatic Record Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Information That Can Be Tracked Using Benefits Management. . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Setting Up Benefits Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Assigning Benefit Packages to Employees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Reports and Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Benefits Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Benefits Management Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Benefits Management Invoicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
10/2010
2-1
What is Benefits Management?
Benefits Management tracks voluntary deductions for benefits paid for by both
employer and employee, such as medical, dental, vision care, and life insurance. It is
not designed to track statutory deductions or deductions borne solely by the employee
for such things as retirement accounts, union dues, and taxes.
Benefits Management allows benefit information tracking at a level of detail not otherwise available. Which employees have which plans? How much does it cost the district to maintain each plan? Having these facts at hand is helpful in negotiations.
Furthermore, more accurate projections can be made for the next year’s budget
requirements.
The Benefits Management also automates creating voluntary deduction records in the
Deductions form for the Employee Maintenance window. You can use a batch update
to create the voluntary deductions in the Deductions form, complete with the appropriate deduction amounts. You can also do batch updates to the Deductions form at
the start of each plan year or to reflect changes made in Benefits management for
changes in the number of dependents or tiers for age-based premiums.
Tracking Plans and Costs
Benefits Management allows a school district to track which available health and welfare plans cover each employee, and the costs (to both employer and employee) associated with these plans.
Costs of these health and welfare plans may be tracked for reporting purposes only, or
they may be integrated with the QSS/OASIS Payroll System. If Benefits Management
is integrated with the Payroll System, the system can create voluntary deductions
based on Benefits Management. The system calculates the proper deduction amounts
based on the employee’s FTE, age, number of dependents, and other such factors.
Tracking Dependents and Their Coverage
Because health and welfare plans include the employee’s spouse and dependents, the
Benefits Management allows a district to track who those dependents are—by name,
by age, by social security number, and by any categories of dependency that a district
may care to define.
Dependents who are approaching an age when they will no longer be eligible for
employee health coverage may be tracked and identified. You can specify the age of
separation, and you can specify a date range when they will reach this age.
As a result, you can know in advance when to stop paying premiums covering these
ineligible dependents.
2-2
10/2010
What is Benefits Management?
Automatic Record Updating
Automatic Record Updating
At the end of each plan year (fiscal or calendar), Benefits Management will enable
you, first, to roll the records for each employee over to the next year without re-entering all the information; and, second, to update premium amounts. You can command
the program to recalculate the new deduction amounts automatically.
You can then print reports that show all manner of information about the benefits
plans and packages and the employees who are enrolled in them.
Information That Can Be Tracked Using Benefits Management
Various reports and utility programs provide information such as:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
10/2010
All plans offered by a certain vendor.
All Section 125 plans or packages.
All employees who are enrolled in a certain plan or package.
All dependents covered under a certain plan.
All dependents still receiving benefits under employees with a certain election date
or earlier.
All dependents who have been dropped from coverage.
Specific categories of employees (by bargaining unit, benefit status, several yes/no
flags, etc.) who are enrolled in a certain plan or package.
The cost of each plan or package.
The total cost to employer of premiums for each pay period.
The most-used packages through the years.
The most-used packages for the current year.
2-3
Setting Up Benefits Management
Chapter 3 describes how to set up the master files for Benefits Management. The ultimate goal is to build Benefit Packages that contain up to 10 Benefit Plans, such as
medical insurance, dental insurance, and life insurance. Each employee is assigned to
a Benefit Package that contains up to 10 Benefit Plans that fall into the following categories:
♦ Pre-defined Benefit Plans that are assigned to everyone who has a Benefits
Package.
♦ User-defined plans that you can select at the time an employee is assigned to a
Benefits Package.
A Benefits Package can Benefit Plans that are all pre-defined, all user-defined, or a
combination of both (core plans for everyone, plus the chance to add additional plans
for each employee).
Chapter 3 tells how to set up the following master files.
♦ The Dependent Code (BMDC) master file defines the values used to indicate the
relationship of each dependent to the employee on the Benefits Management form
of the Employee Maintenance window. This master file can be used for creating
reports showing only certain categories of dependents for each employee, or for
certain employees.The Benefit Status (BMBS) master file defines codes to be
used in the Benefit Status box on the Benefits Management form. Use of these
optional codes is validated against the master file. If Benefit Status codes are not
developed by the district, Employee Type codes can be used instead, but their
usage is not validated.
♦ The Coverage Level (BMLC) master file defines the values used to specify the
levels of coverage an employee may elect: coverage for one, two, or three or more
people. A single employee will need coverage only for himself/herself, but an
employee with a family will need more. Insurance rates are adjusted for the number of people needing coverage. This master file facilitates those distinctions.
♦ The Plan Codes (BMPC) master file defines the values used to specify the health
and welfare plans that are available for each employee. It enables the user to type
just a 4-character plan code into the Package Code Master File, and all the health
plan information will be integrated into it and then displayed on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window for any employee enrolled in
that plan.
2-4
10/2010
Setting Up Benefits Management
♦ The Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file defines a cap, or maximum limit, that is
applied to the employer benefit cost. Benefit costs exceeding the cap would be
paid by the employee. Caps are defined by bargaining unit, time frame, and
amount. They can be applied against a total of all benefit cost, or only against the
cost of the largest benefit, which is frequently health care.
♦ The Package Codes (BMPK) master file defines the values used for the different
packages of plans that are available for employees. This master file puts the various benefits plans into groups so that you can enter just the package code on the
Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window to display the
entire group of plans in the package. This means less keying is necessary, with less
risk of error in data entry.
♦ The Package Assignment (BMPA) master file links a salary schedule to a package. This is an optional feature which assigns a package to an employee based
upon the employee’s Salary Schedule. The assignment can be automatic or can
occur based on a trigger character entered as the package code.
♦ The Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file defines for each plan and level of
coverage the premium amount(s) the employee and/or employer pays for a given
date range. It uses a separate record for the time period of each premium amount.
♦ The FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file defines the premium amounts paid
by the employee and employer based on the employee’s FTE (full-time equivalency). It shows the health coverage rates paid by employee and employer, either
in dollars or in percentages, for all employees working different amounts of time.
For the QCC version of Benefits Management, this master file is integrated into
the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file.
♦ The Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file defines deductions that may use
frequency codes or deduction schedules that are different from the primary one set
up for each employee. This master file comes into play only if the Benefits Management Module is integrated with the QSS/OASIS Payroll System.
10/2010
2-5
Assigning Benefit Packages to Employees
Chapter 4 describes how to assign Benefit Packages to employees after you have
completed the master file set-up described in Chapter 3. The Benefit Information
area allows you to assign an employee to a Benefit Plan, and the Plan Information tab
displays the Benefit Plans in that package.
Figure 2-1: Benefits Management form
Here are some key parts of the Benefit Information area:
♦ The Package box allows you assign an employee to a Benefits Package that contains up to 10 Benefits Packages for health insurance, dental insurance, and other
such coverage.
♦ The Level box allows you to select the default Coverage Level for the employee,
such as employee only, employee plus spouse, or employee plus spouse and
children.
♦ The Elect date is the effective date of coverage.
♦ The FTE rule and FTE define how to calculate the employee’s FTE. The system
uses this information to calculate the employee- and employer-paid amounts for
benefits where the employee contribution varies with FTE.
2-6
10/2010
Assigning Benefit Packages to Employees
♦ The Sal rule and Sal are important for benefits with costs calculated as a percentage of the employee’s pay, such as life insurance.
The Plan Information tab displays the Benefit Plans that are included in the
employee’s Benefit Package.
♦ The grid displays the Benefit Plans that are part of the Benefit Package. Each row
shows the Employee and Employer costs for the benefit as calculated based on
the rules in the Benefits Information area.
♦ For each Plan, you can override the default Coverage Level and amounts calculated by the system. However, QSS recommends that you use the L - Locked
option so that the system calculates the benefit costs.
10/2010
2-7
Reports and Processes
Overview
Chapter 5 describes how to launch a variety of reports and batch update processes
from the Benefits Management Job Menu window. The reports fall into the following
categories.
♦ Benefits Management Reports provide a variety of ways to look at benefit information, such as listing covered dependents, costs of benefits for each employee,
and employees who have used less than the cap amount for benefits.
♦ Benefits Management Processes allow your site to automate processes, such as
loading deductions from Benefits Management into the QSS/OASIS Payroll
System.
♦ Benefits Management Invoicing allows a site to use Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) to invoice employees for health care costs, such as COBRA benefits
or retiree benefits. IBM is an optional module for managing receivables with
invoices, aging, and a variety of reports. For more information, contact your QSS
account manager.
Benefits Management Reports
Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) Window
The Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) on page 5-28 allows you to print
the comments that have been recorded on the Benefits Management form for all
employees or for a selected group of employees. It can be sorted by bargaining unit,
alphabetically by employee name, by package, by benefit status code, or by birth date.
Selection of employees to be included on the report can be limited by sort option,
and/or by report code, plan code and level, benefit vendor, active or inactive status,
the section 125/primary/Cobra/M or D flags, and individually by SSN.
Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) Window
Think of the Benefit Information Listing (BM0200) on page 5-36 as the Benefit
HISTORY Report. This report lists the benefit information, for current and past years,
for each employee selected in the report, including the package and member plans,
and the premium breakdown for each plan, for both employee and employer. Total
costs for each employee are also listed.
Request Benefits Management Cash Out Report (BM0230) Window
The Benefit Management Cash Out Report (BM0230) on page 5-44 lists those
employees who did not use the full amount of their available Cap and are therefore
entitled to receive a Cash-out for the difference. This report is for information only. It
can be used as a guide by the Payroll staff to create the necessary Cash-out pay lines.
2-8
10/2010
Benefits Management Processes
Request Benefits Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) Window
The Benefit Employee Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) on page 5-50 lists
employees selected on the basis of bargaining unit, report code, benefit status, plan
code/level of coverage, a range of plan codes, and vendor or posting status that are
assigned to the various benefit plans offered by the district. The benefit plans are presented with the employees listed either alphabetically or by election date.
Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) Window
The Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report (BM0250) in page 5-56 allows you to compare your benefit records against the billing statements received from benefit providers. It is organized first by benefit provider and then alphabetically by employee.
Optional selections can be made by bargaining unit and report code. There is the
capability to include employee comments on the report.
Request Billing Report (BM0210) Window
The Billing Report (BM0210) on page 5-60 lists the billing information for each
employee selected in the report, including plans and the premium breakdown for each
plan, for both employee and employer. Total costs for each employee are also listed.
When sorted by plan, it shows the totals owed to each plan from the employee and
from the employer. This facilitates writing out one check for all employees to each
plan or each vendor.
Request Dependents Report (BM0220) Window
The Dependents Report (BM0220) on page 5-70 lists all the dependents covered for
each employee selected in the report. Moreover, it will allow you to specify a date
range within which to report all dependents who will become ineligible for coverage
under the parent’s plan. This will allow your district to stop making premium payments at the correct time, rather than getting a refund some months after the insurance
company has informed you that the dependent is no longer covered.
Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) Window
The Life Insurance Benefit Listing (BM0270) on page 5-79 prints information concerning
those life insurance plans with a premium cost based upon a percent of the life benefit, or
face value, of the policy. The report can be sorted alphabetically by participating employee
or by plan/level. Selection of employees to be included on the report can be made on the
basis of bargaining unit, report code, benefit status code, plan and level code, vendor, active
or inactive status, and/or whether the employee or the employer pay the premium.
Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) Window
The Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window on page 5-84 allows you to
launch a process that globally recalculates the employee and employer amounts displayed on the Benefits Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance
10/2010
2-9
window for the current active record, based on the employee’s FTE in effect on the
start date. When changes are made, this program will automatically recalculate the
benefits for every employee who has the specified benefit(s). You do not have to manually change the data for each employee. However, the recalculation process by itself
will not preserve an audit trail of records before the recalculation.
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) Window
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) window on page 5-97 is
a part of a series of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window. This window allows you to do
a mass add of plans to benefit packages on the Benefits Management form.
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) Window
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) window on page
5-103 is a part of a series of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits
Management form of the Employee Maintenance window. This window allows you
to do a mass update to Plan Codes already assigned to employees on the Benefits
Management form.
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) Window
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) window on page
Management form of the Employee Maintenance window. This window allows you
to do a mass deletion of Plan Codes from the Demographic (MA) form.
Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) Window
The Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window on page 5-114
allows you to globally transfers the employee benefit information on the Benefits
Management form of the Employee Maintenance window from one plan year (calendar, fiscal, or other) to the next. The advantages to using this program are that it saves
you from having to re-type all the employees’ benefit information every year, and it
preserves the previous year’s information for your records.
Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) Window
The Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window on
page 5-123 allows you to launch a process that will automatically load each benefit
deduction from the Benefits Management Module into the QSS/OASIS Payroll System. The deductions display on the Deductions (PD) form of the Employee Maintenance window.
2-10
10/2010
Benefits Management Invoicing
Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) Window
The Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window on page 5-136 allows
you to create customer IDs in Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) and to link them
to benefits employees designated by the selection criteria. This allows you to create
and link a group of employee records to individual IBM customer ID records for the
purpose of using IBM to invoice the employees for health care costs
Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100) Window
The Benefits Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing (BMI100) on page 5-143 can be
used to report either those benefits employees who have been linked to a ClientServer Accounts Receivable (CSAR) customer ID, those employees who should be
linked but are not, or both.
Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) Window
The Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window on page 5-148 allows
you to initiate benefits invoicing on the Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) window. IBM is an optional module in QCC that allows you to create invoices, record
receipts, age invoices, and create a variety of reports.
REMINDER: To invoice for benefits, a site must be using the optional Invoicing/Billing
Management (IBM) window. For more information, see the QSS/OASIS Invoicing/Billing
Management (IBM) Manual.
10/2010
2-11
2-12
10/2010
Chapter 3:
Master Files
Background Master File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Purpose of Benefits Management Master Files (BM0010) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Prerequisites for Benefits Management Master Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Overview of the Master Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Order for Completing Benefits Management Master Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Dependent Code (BMDC) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
When to Use the Dependent Code Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Instructions for Defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Benefit Status (BMBS) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
When to Use the Benefit Status Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Instructions for Defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Coverage Level (BMLC) Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
When to Use the Coverage Level Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Instructions for Defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Plan Codes (PC) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
When to Use the Plan Code Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Choosing a Billing Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Cap Amounts (BMCA) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
When to Use the Cap Amounts Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Package Codes (BMPK) Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
When to Use the Package Code Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Types of Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Package Assignment (BMPA) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
When to Use the Package Assignment (BMPA) Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
10/2010
3-1
FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
When to Use the FTE Allocation Table Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Employee Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Plan/Level Type FTE Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Instructions for Defining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Description of Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Thirteen Ways to Set Up Premium Amounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Table Summarizing Premium Amount Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96
Choosing a Billing Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-97
Deduction Class List (BMCL) Master File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
When to Use the Deduction Class List (BMCL) Master File . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
Connection to the Benefits Management (BM) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
Example of Using a Deduction Class for an Irregular Deduction
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112
Instructions for Defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
Description of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-115
3-2
10/2010
Table 3-1: Quick start guide for the Benefits Managements processes and reports
TOPIC
TELLS HOW TO
PAGE
Background Master File Information
Understand how Benefits Management uses master files.
3-4
Order for Completing Benefits
Management Master Files
Define master files in the proper order.
3-6
Dependent Code (BMDC) Master File
Define the codes for recording the relationship of dependents to an
employee on the Benefits Management form.
3-7
Benefit Status (BMBS) Master File
Define optional codes for the Benefits Status box on the Benefits
Management form.
3-8
Coverage Level (BMLC) Master File
Define coverage levels that influence rates, such as age ranges or
number of dependents covered.
3-10
Plan Codes (BMPC) Master File
Define 4-character codes for various insurance, TSA, and other
benefit plans offered. These plans are building blocks for benefit
packages.
3-13
Cap Amounts (BMCA) Master File
Define limits on the maximum benefit cost that the employer pays.
3-20
Package Codes (BMPK) Master File
Define packages that contain benefit plans, such as a package for all 3-23
of the benefit plans for a particular bargaining unit or salary
schedule.
Package Assignment (BMPA) Master
File
Define links to automate the assignment of Package Codes to
employees based on their salary schedule.
FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) Master
File
For the traditional software, define benefit levels that vary with FTEs. 3-38
For QCC, this process is integrated into the Plan/Level Amounts
(BMPL) master file.
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) Master
File
Define the employee- and employer- paid amounts for each benefit 3-49
plan and level, such as age-based rates and rates that differ for the
number of dependents. The costs can be the same for all employees
or pro-rated by FTE.
Deduction Class List (BMCL) Master
File
Define the default frequency codes for importing Voluntary
Deductions into Payroll. You can also define exceptions for
deductions with unusual frequencies.
10/2010
3-36
3-110
3-3
Purpose of Benefits Management Master Files
The Benefits Management master files provide predefined categories of values available for use on each employee’s Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window. Before you can complete the Benefits Management form, you need to
have the Benefits Management master files populated with data that can be used to
complete the Benefits Management form. For a complete discussion of the Benefits
Management form, see Chapter 4.Once you get the master files set up, you usually
won’t have to make changes to them, unless you get a new plan, a new option, or new
premium rates. You can add more records to all Benefits Management master files at
any time.
CAUTION: Be very careful about making changes to the master files after you have begun
using them on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window! One
change may cause other unwanted changes, in a domino effect.
Benefits Management and Voluntary Deductions
If your site is integrating Benefits Management with the Payroll System, the Voluntary Deductions (VD) master file is the key to linking the two systems. The Request
Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window is a batch update
that takes information from Benefits Management and uses it to create Voluntary
Deductions on the Deductions form of the Employee Maintenance window. For this
link to work, each Benefit Plan must be assigned to a valid Voluntary Deduction code
for the Payroll System.
Once the Voluntary Deductions are created on the Deductions form, they are processed through the Payroll System just like any other deductions on that form. The
QSS/OASIS Enhanced Payroll Manual describes the options for clearing liabilities for
employee-deducted amounts and paying expenses for employer-paid amounts.
Overview of the Master Files
♦ The Dependent Code (BMDC) master file defines the values used to indicate the
relationship of each dependent to the employee on the Benefits Management form
of the Employee Maintenance window. This master file can be used for creating
reports showing only certain categories of dependents for each employee, or for
certain employees.
♦ The Benefit Status (BMBS) master file defines codes to be used in the Benefit Status box on the Benefits Management form. Use of these optional codes is validated against the master file. If Benefit Status codes are not developed by the
district, Employee Type codes can be used instead, but their usage is not validated.
3-4
10/2010
Overview of the Master Files
♦ The Coverage Level (BMLC) master file defines the values used to specify the
levels of coverage an employee may elect: coverage for one, two, or three or more
people. A single employee will need coverage only for himself/herself, but an
employee with a family will need more. Insurance rates are adjusted for the number of people needing coverage. This master file facilitates those distinctions.
♦ The Plan Codes (BMPC) master file defines the values used to specify the health
and welfare plans that are available for each employee. It enables the user to type
just a 4-character plan code into the Package Code Master File, and all the health
plan information will be integrated into it and then displayed on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window for any employee enrolled in
that plan.
♦ The Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file defines a cap, or maximum limit, that is
applied to the employer benefit cost. Benefit costs exceeding the cap would be
paid by the employee. Caps are defined by bargaining unit, time frame, and
amount. They can be applied against a total of all benefit cost, or only against the
cost of the largest benefit, which is frequently health care.
♦ The Package Codes (BMPK) master file defines the values used for the different
packages of plans that are available for employees. This master file puts the various benefits plans into groups so that you can enter just the package code on the
Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window to display the
entire group of plans in the package. This means less keying is necessary, with less
risk of error in data entry.
♦ The Package Assignment (BMPA) master file links a salary schedule to a package. This is an optional feature which assigns a package to an employee based
upon the employee’s Salary Schedule. The assignment can be automatic or can
occur based on a trigger character entered as the package code.
♦ The Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file defines for each plan and level of
coverage the premium amount(s) the employee and/or employer pays for a given
date range. It uses a separate record for the time period of each premium amount.
♦ The FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file defines the premium amounts paid
by the employee and employer based on the employee’s FTE (full-time equivalency). It shows the health coverage rates paid by employee and employer, either
in dollars or in percentages, for all employees working different amounts of time.
For the QCC version of Benefits Management, this master file is integrated into
♦ The Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file defines deductions that may use
frequency codes or deduction schedules that are different from the primary one set
up for each employee. This master file comes into play only if the Benefits Management Module is integrated with the QSS/OASIS Payroll System.
10/2010
3-5
Order for Completing Benefits Management
Master Files
It is recommended that you complete the master files in the following order, since
subsequent master files require data from previously-defined master files:
MASTER FILE
Plan Code (BMPC) Master File
Cap Amount (BMCA) Master File
Package Code (BMPK) Master File
Package Assignment (BMPA) Master File
FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) Master File
Plan/Level (BMPL) Master File
Deduction Class List (BMCL) Master File
STATUS
optional
optional
required
required
optional
required
optional
required
required
optional
SEE PAGE
3-7
3-8
3-10
3-13
3-20
3-23
3-36
3-38
3-49
3-110
NOTE: For the QCC software, the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file is integrated into
The Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file, Benefit Status (BMBS) master file,
Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file, Package Assignment (BMPA) master file, and the
Dependent Code (BMDC) master file are optional for the basic functioning of the
Benefits Management Module.
However, the Dependent Code (BMDC) master file is helpful in pulling reports for
specific groups of employees or identifying children about to become ineligible for
benefits.
The Benefit Status (BMBS) master file can replace the Employee Type master file in
the Benefit Status box on the Benefits Management screen.
The Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file is required if your district has established spending limits, or caps, on its benefit costs.
The Package Assignment (BMPA) master file is required if the district wishes to
establish automatic links between Salary Schedules and various Package Codes.
The Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file is required if your district uses the
Update Deductions from the Benefits Management Program (BM0900) to integrate
records from Benefits Management into the Payroll System.
3-6
10/2010
When to Use the Dependent Code (BMDC) Master File
The Dependent Code (BMDC) master file the codes used to indicate the relationship
of each dependent to the employee on the Benefits Management form Employee
Maintenance window. This master file can be used for creating reports showing
dependent details for certain employees. The types of dependents may be detailed or
simple. You may want to get elaborate and set up many variations, or keep it simple
and use only one or two designations, such as DE (dependent) or SP (spouse) and CH
(child).
When to Use the Dependent Code (BMDC) Master File
The Dependent Code (BMDC) master file is not directly related to the other Benefits
Management master files; it is related to the Benefits Management form of the
Employee Maintenance window. No other Benefits Management master file takes
data from this master file.
Instructions for Defining
The instructions for defining master files for Benefits Management are in the following places:
♦ The Human Resources Master Files Manual provides the following:
 Iinstructions for using the HR Code Maintenance window to add, change,
delete, and inspect master file records.
 A sample master file report.
For details, see "Benefits Management Master Files" in Chapter 4 of the Human
Resources Master Files Manual.
♦ This chapter provides a detailed description of how to define each box in the master file.
Description of Boxes
Selected Codes
For changing, deleting, or inspecting, you can use this list to
select a code.
The list is not available when you are adding a record.
10/2010
3-7
Figure 3-1: Dependent Code (BMDC) master file
Code
Do either of the following:
♦ For adding, type a 2-character code that has not been
used.
♦ For changing, deleting, or inspecting, type a code that
has already been defined.
Name
Type an appropriate name, of up to 30 characters, like SPOUSE
or CHILD.
Abbreviation
Type an abbreviation of up to 8 characters in length.
Choose an easily recognizable abbreviation, since some
screens and reports will display this abbreviation rather than
the name.
3-8
10/2010
When to Use the Benefit Status Master File
The optional Benefit Status (BMBS) master file is used to define codes for the Benefit
Status box on the Benefits Management form on the Employee Maintenance window.
Benefit Status codes entered on the Benefits Management screen are validated against
the Benefit Status (BMBS) master file. If this master file is not used, the Benefit Status box on the Benefits Management form will be filled with an Employee Type code.
This Employee Type code, when used on the Benefits Management screen, is not validated against any master file.
When to Use the Benefit Status Master File
The Benefit Status (BMBS) master file is not directly related to the other Benefits
Management master files: it is related to the Benefits Management form of the
Employee Maintenance window. No other Benefits Management master file takes
data from this master file.
Selected Codes
select a code.
10/2010
3-9
Figure 3-2: Benefit Status (BMBS) master file
Code
used.
♦ For changing, deleting, or inspecting, type a code that
3-10
Name
Type an appropriate name, of up to 30 characters, like
CERTIFICATED TEACHING STAFF or ADMINSTRATOR.
Abbr
Type an abbreviation of up to 8 characters in length. Choose an
easily recognizable abbreviation, since some screens and
reports will display this abbreviation rather than the name.
10/2010
When to Use the Coverage Level Master File
Insurance companies charge according to various coverage levels, or family situations. The Coverage Level (BMLC) master file defines the codes which specify the
levels of coverage an employee may elect, such as coverage for one, two, or three or
more people. A single employee will need coverage only for himself/herself, but an
employee with a family will need more. Insurance rates are adjusted for the number
of people needing coverage. This master file facilitates those distinctions.
When to Use the Coverage Level Master File
This file must be defined before defining the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master
file, as this master file will take information from both the Coverage Level (BMLC)
master file and the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file.
Codes
select a code.
Level Code
used.
♦ For changing, deleting, or inspecting, type a 4-character
code that has already been defined.
10/2010
3-11
Figure 3-3: Coverage Level (BMLC) master file
If it is feasible for your district to create the same types of
coverage level codes for all plans, doing so will allow you
to use the Quick Change tab to change coverage levels or
packages for employees on the Benefits Management form
of the Employee Maintenance window. For details, see page
4-49.
Name
Type an appropriate label, of up to 30 characters, like
EMPLOYEE + ONE or AGE 25-29.
Common levels are employee only, employee plus one, or
employee plus two or more. For life insurance benefits, the
level code may be an age range.
Abbr
Level Type
♦ Leave blank if there is no age range associated with the
Coverage Level code.
♦ Select Age if a Coverage Level code has an age range.
Age Range
♦ The Age Range is optional if the Level Type is blank.
♦ For a Level Type of Age, type the age range for the coverage level.
3-12
10/2010
When to Use the Plan Code Master File
The Plan Codes (BMPC) master files defines the codes used to specify the health and
welfare plans that are available for each employee. It enables you to type just a 4character plan code into the Package Codes (BMPK) master file, and all the health
plan information will be integrated into it and then displayed on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window for any employee enrolled in that
plan.
When to Use the Plan Code Master File
Create only one plan code for each plan being offered. Do not create a different code
for each year that the premium amount changes.
Do not use the voluntary deduction numbers as the plan codes if you want several
plan codes for each voluntary deduction number (for example, certificated, classified,
and board member classifications for each vendor).
Choosing a Billing Basis
The billing basis is the number of payroll cycles in one year to which employee and
employer amounts are billed. If your district uses the same pay frequency for all
employees (for example, 12 times a year), you may find it advantageous to use that
billing basis for all plans (for example, 12). In that case, calculate the premium
amount as the annual premium divided by the billing basis (for example, one-twelfth
of the annual premium). Then the premium amounts that appear on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window will reflect the amounts taken
out of each monthly pay warrant.
However, if your district uses a variety of different pay frequencies, it may streamline
input to use a billing basis of 1 for all plans. That would represent the entire annual
premium for a plan. This amount would need to be divided by the number of payrolls
in the year to see the per-pay warrant amount.
If you use a billing basis of 1, you can see the annual amounts broken down for each
employee’s pay periods by running the Update Pay Deductions Program (BM0905) in
Report Only mode. See “Update Deductions from Benefits Management Program
(BM0900)” on page 5-3 for more information. Since the premium amounts shown on
the Benefits Management form are taken directly from the amounts typed into the
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file, using different billing bases for different
plans would result in an inconsistent (and therefore meaningless) total on the Benefits
Management form. Consequently, it is recommended that you use the same billing
basis for all plans.
10/2010
3-13
 Instructions for using the HR Code Maintenance window to add, change,
Codes
select a code.
Plan Code
used.
♦ For changing, deleting, or inspecting, type a 4-character
code that has already been defined.
Plan name
KAISER-CERTIFICATED or CIGNA DENTAL.
Abbr
Type an abbreviation of up to 8 characters in length.
Choose an easily recognizable abbreviation, since some
screens and reports will display this abbreviation rather than
the name.
Plan Type
♦ Make a selection from the list for life insurance plans.
♦ Leave blank for all other types of Plan Codes.
3-14
10/2010
Figure 3-4: Plan Codes (BMPC) master file
For life insurance, make one of the following selections
from the list:
♦ Basic Life Insurance for basic coverage is limited to the
employee’s base salary within the minimum benefit/maximum benefit range. The benefit amount and cost
are prorated by the employee’s FTE.
♦ Term Life Insurance for coverage tied to employee’s
age per employment records and must be within the minimum/maximum range.
♦ Term Life Insurance for Spouse for a benefit amount
must be within the minimum/maximum range and cannot
exceed the employee’s benefit amount.
♦ Term Life Insurance for Child. There are no special
rules attached to this Plan Type other than the benefit
must be within the minimum/maximum range.
10/2010
3-15
The Min Benefit, Max Benefit, Increment, and Max X
Salary boxes are also required it a Plan Type has been
entered.
Default Coverage
Level
Select a code that from the Coverage Level (BMLC) master
file.
You can choose to specify a default coverage level for each
plan here, or to define a default coverage level for each
package in the Package Codes (BMPK) master file on page
3-23, or to define several coverage levels for each plan in
the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file on page 3-49.
If default coverage levels are defined in both the Plan Codes
(BMPC) master file and the Package Codes (BMPK) master
file, the default level for an individual plan from the Plan
Codes (BMPC) master file prevails on the Benefits Management form or the Employee Maintenance window.
If a plan has only one coverage level, enter it here. This will
speed data entry on the Benefits Management form. Any
value entered here will also be used by the Quick Change
tab described on page 4-26.
Vendor Number
Leave blank, or type a vendor number.
♦ Leave blank if your site is not using Invoicing / Billing
Management (IBM) to invoice for this benefit.
♦ If your site is invoicing benefit costs through IBM, type a
6-digit vendor code for IBM.
Vol Ded Number
Type the voluntary deduction number for the plan from the
Voluntary Deductions (VD) master file. This voluntary deduction number comes from the Payroll System.
If you want to integrate Benefits Management into the Payroll System, type the voluntary deduction number here.
If you specify different levels of coverage in the Plan Codes
(BMPC) master file, you would enter the same voluntary
deduction number for all levels of coverage (employee only,
employee plus one, etc.), unless you have that same level of
detail already encoded into the Voluntary Deductions (VD)
master file.
3-16
10/2010
The name and address boxes come from the Update Voluntary Voluntary Deductions (VD) master file or from the
Vendor master file, if these have been used. The values in
the Voluntary Deduction master file take precedence over
those in the Vendor master file.
Here in the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file, the Vol ded
number box is optional, and is used for prefilling when you
are setting up the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file. If you
enter a voluntary deduction number in the Plan Codes
(BMPC) master file, it will show up in the Plan/Level
Amounts (BMPL) master file. You can change it there, if
necessary. If you don’t enter the voluntary deduction number here, then you have to enter it for each plan at each level
you set up in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file.
10/2010
Name
Address Line 1
Address Line 2
City
State
Zip
If you have typed a vendor number or voluntary deduction
number, the system fills in these boxes. If you did not type a
number, fill in the boxes if desired.
Start Date
Type or select the beginning date that the plan is offered—the
date the plan first became eligible. This box is informational
only and does not affect any other screens.
End Date
Type or select the last date the plan was offered. Leave the end
date blank for active plans. This box is informational only and
does not affect any other screens.
Section 125
Select the check box for a Section 125 plan or clear the check
box for a non-qualifying plan.
Billing Basis
This is the number of premium payments made in a year. In
this dialog box, the billing basis is not related to any individual
3-17
employee, but, rather, indicates the number of times in a year
that a district pays an insurer.
The billing basis comes from the Payroll System and is synonymous with the voluntary deduction frequency code or
deduction schedule. It keys on the voluntary deduction
number.
Here in the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file, the Billing
basis box is optional, and is used for prefilling when you are
setting up the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file. If
you enter a billing basis in the Plan Codes (BMPC) master
file, it will show up in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL)
master file. You can adjust it there, if necessary. If you don’t
enter the billing basis here, then you have to enter it for each
plan at each level you set up in the Plan/Level Amounts
master file.
NOTE: QSS recommends using the same billing basis for all plans. On the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window, the amounts will be displayed just as
they are in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file—they won’t be multiplied by the billing basis to show the annual premium amounts. So if you have different billing bases for
each plan, the premium amounts on the Benefits Management form won’t be consistent.
One amount might be the premium for a six-month period, another might be a monthly premium, and a third might be the annual premium. If different billing bases are used, the totals
on the Benefits Management form would be meaningless.
The following four boxes are required for life insurance plans only. They should be
left blank for all other plan codes.
Min Benefit
Type the dollar amount of the minimum life insurance benefit
amount allowed under this plan.
Max Benefit
Type the dollar amount of the maximum life insurance benefit
amount allowed under this plan.
Increment
Type the incremental amount by which the benefit amount can
be increased from the minimum to the maximum.
Max X Salary
If the maximum benefit amount for term life insurance is a
multiple of the employee’s salary, type that multiplier in this
box.
For example, if the maximum benefit amount can be no
more than five (5) times the employee’s regular NML
salary, type 5 in this box.
3-18
10/2010
The following table illustrates sample relationships between the various term life insurance-related boxes.
TERM LIFE FOR
MIN
BENEFIT
MAX
BENEFIT
INCREMENT
MAX X
SALARY
Employee
20,000
250,000
10,000
5
Spouse*
5,000
100,000
5,000
Child
2,000
10,000
1,000
*The benefit amount for the Spouse cannot exceed the benefit amount for the
employee.
10/2010
3-19
This optional master file can be used to apply a cap, or maximum limit, to the
employer benefit cost. Benefit costs exceeding the cap would be paid by the
employee.
When to Use the Cap Amounts Master File
There are two approaches that can be used with the Cap Amounts (BMCA) master
file. An organization should choose to use one or the other, but not both.
♦ General Cap - If the district chooses to use the General Cap approach, a default or
general Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file will be defined for each bargaining unit
within the district. These general caps will be applied to any coverage level, will
automatically adjust for FTE, will compute a total amount by which the
employee’s benefit costs exceed the stated cap, and will establish that amount as an
employee voluntary deduction.
♦ Largest Cap - If the district chooses to use the Largest Cap approach, a cap
amount will again be defined for each bargaining unit within the district. This cap
will be applied to the largest benefit cost for the employee, which will usually be
the health care cost. Operation of the Largest Cap approach is similar to the operation of the General Cap approach, with the exception that the cap amount is
applied only against the largest benefit cost instead of against the total benefit cost.
District
3-20
The log-on district displays. You can type another district
number if desired and your security settings allow it.
10/2010
Figure 3-5: Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file
Bargain Unit
Select a bargaining unit from the list.
Start Date
Type or select the start, or effective, date of the cap. This date
is often tied to the effective date of the most recent bargaining
unit contract.
End Date
If the ending date is known for this cap, type or select it here.
If the amount of the benefit cap changes with each new bargaining agreement, the end date of the current contract
period would be entered here.
If the benefit cap amount does not necessarily change with
each re-negotiated contract, leave this box blank until a specific end date is known.
Cap Amount
Type the dollar amount of the cap which would be the total
amount that the employer will pay. This can be either a
monthly amount or an annual amount.
Pro-rate by FTE
Select or clear the check box.
♦ Select the check box to pro-rate the cap by an employee’s
FTE.
♦ Clear the check box to apply the cap to all Fees.
10/2010
3-21
Cash out
♦ Select the check box to allow employees who do not use
the full amount to cash out the balance.
♦ Clear the check box to not allow cash-outs.
This box flags employee records for possible inclusion on
the Cash Out Report (BM0230). It does NOT automatically
create a cash out pay line in payroll.
Basis
Type the frequency of the cap amount.
♦ If the amount entered in the Cap amount box is a
monthly amount, type 12 in the Basis box.
♦ If the amount entered in the Cap amount box is an
annual amount, type 01 in the Basis box.
3-22
10/2010
When to Use the Package Code Master File
The Package Codes (BMPK) master file defines the different sets of plans, or packages, that are available for employees. A package is a set of benefits that defines all
the kinds of benefits that an eligible employee might choose for complete coverage,
usually based on the employee’s bargaining unit. In a simple environment, the package code could be the same as the bargaining unit code. In a more complex situation,
several packages may apply to the same bargaining unit, or some packages could
apply to employees in any bargaining unit.
This master file puts the various benefit options into groups so that you can enter just
the package code on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance
window, and the member plans will all be consistently entered for you. This means
less keying is necessary, with less risk of error in data entry.
When to Use the Package Code Master File
Type the necessary data in the Coverage Level (BMLC) master file and Plan Codes
(BMPC) master file before starting the Package Codes (BMPK) master file, because
this one will pull the plans you specify from the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file.
Also, if you choose to specify a default coverage level, it will pull the pertinent information from the Coverage Level (BMLC) master file.
WARNING: Make sure your plan packages are all complete and correct before you begin
entering them on the Benefits Management form. Once a package code for a pre-defined
package has been entered on the Benefits Management form and saved, it is quite complicated to change or delete an individual plan on that screen.
Types of Packages
There are three basic package organization schemas from which to choose:
♦ Pre-defined packages
♦ Packages with all user-defined plans
♦ Packages with some user-defined plans
Pre-Defined Packages
Figure 3-6 illustrates a pre-defined package containing a variety of plans. This sample
package would enroll an employee in the certificated Blue Cross, Delta Dental, and
American Fidelity Disability plans with a cap applied to the total benefit cost. An
employee who selects this package must enroll in every plan in the package.
Notice that on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window
in Figure 3-7, this employee is enrolled in the pre-defined package shown in Figure
3-6. In Figure 3-7, you cannot add additional plans to the Plan Information tab. The
[Add Plan] button is dimmed.
10/2010
3-23
If your district would prefer to have more flexibility in putting together a package for
an employee, then an all-user-defined package or packages with some user-defined
plans may be more appropriate.
Figure 3-6: Pre-defined package in the Package Codes (BMPK) master file
3-24
10/2010
Types of Packages
Figure 3-7: Pre-defined package on the Benefits Management form
User-Defined Packages
There are two variations of user-defined packages: empty packages into which an
employee may insert any variety of plans, and partially user-defined packages which
have one or two core plans but are open to the choosing of more plans by an
employee.
Completely User-Defined Packages
If your district prefers not to use pre-defined packages, or if it offers multiple medical
plans, multiple dental plans, and others, so that it would be too complex to make up a
myriad of pre-defined packages, you can create one user-defined package into which
you insert any variety of plans a user may choose.
The advantage of having one user-defined package is that you can enter all plans that
the employee chooses directly onto the Benefits Management form of the Employee
Maintenance window.
The disadvantage of having one user-defined package is that each plan chosen must
be manually entered into the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window for every employee.
10/2010
3-25
Figure 3-8: Completely user-defined Package on the Benefits Management form
3-26
10/2010
Figure 3-8 shows a completely user-defined package in the Package Codes (BMPK)
master file and on the Benefits Management form. In the Plan Information tab, you
can click the drop-down arrow in the Plan column to select the Plan Code for each
row in the grid.
Building a Completely User-Defined Package
In the Package Codes (BMPK) master file, give your one single package a code such
as UD for user-defined. In the first Plan box, type $USR.
This will allow you to enter any plans desired into the entry boxes on the Benefits
Management form.
Packages with Core Plans Plus User-Defined Plans
If your district has only a few core plans, but a variety of auxiliary plans, you may
choose to make a few core packages with the option of additional user-defined plans.
This approach saves some keying of plans on the Benefits Management form of the
Employee Maintenance window, while allowing flexibility and a minimum of predefined packages at the same time.
For example, if your district offers only one or two medical plans, but a number of
auxiliary plans like disability, life, vision, etc., then you may want to use this method.
Figure 3-9 shows a partially user-defined package with one core plan in the Package
Codes (BMPK) master file. In the first Plan box(s), type the core plan(s). After you
have entered all the core plans, type $USR in the next Plan box before updating. This
will allow you to enter standardized core plans on the Benefits Management form,
plus the ability to add other plans to that package.
Figure 3-10 shows the same partially user-defined package on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window with one auxiliary plan (AFDS)
added to the core plan (KAIS).
In the Plan Information tab, you cannot use the [Remove Plan] button to delete the
row for KAIS, as this Plan Code is a core plan from the Package Codes (BMPK) master file. However, you can add additional plans, such as AFDS.
10/2010
3-27
Figure 3-9: Core plan plus user-defined plans in the Package Codes (BMPK) master file
Figure 3-10: Core plan plus user-defined plans on the Benefits Management form
3-28
10/2010
Header
information that
applies to all of
the plans in a
Package Code.
Boxes for adding
or removing
plans.
Up to 20 plans
assigned to a
package. Each
package must
have at least 1
plan.
Figure 3-11: Package Codes (BMPK) master file
The description of boxes focuses on the following areas:
♦ 7Header Information
♦ Adding and Removing Plans
7Header Information
The header information allows you to define characteristics that apply to all of the
plans that are part of a Package Code.
10/2010
3-29
Package codes
select a code.
Package code
♦ For adding, type a 2-character package code that has not
yet been defined.
♦ For changing, inspecting, and deleting, type a code that
Package name
CLASSIFIED, or, if your district offers several basic choices,
KAISER-CERTIFICATED.
Abbr
Default coverage
level
Select a coverage level code defined in the Coverage Level
(BMLC) master file. See page 3-10 for more information.
Coverage levels may vary from plan to plan within a package. Using the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file (page 3-13),
you may choose to create a different plan code for each coverage level of the same plan.
If default coverage levels are defined in both the Plan Codes
(BMPC) master file and the Package Codes (BMPK) master
file, the default level for an individual plan from the Plan
Codes (BMPC) master file will override the default level for
the Package Codes (BMPK) master file on the Benefits
Management form of the Employee Maintenance window.
The more detailed you make these master files, the less keying you will have to do for each employee on the Benefits
Management form. But if there are many employees, the
coverage level may vary too much to specify a default.
Default rules: FTE Select an option from the list:
♦ Prime Position. Use the FTE from the employee’s prime
position only for benefit FTE.
3-30
10/2010
♦ All Positions. Use the total FTE from all of the
employee’s positions.
♦ Hours of Prime. Calculate the benefit FTE from the
employee’s prime position hours only. This will divide
the prime position hours by the hours per day in the work
calendar of the prime position.
♦ Hours of All. Calculate the benefit FTE from the hours
of all the employee’s positions. This will divide the sum
of hours for all positions by the hours per day in the work
♦ Benefit. Benefit FTE override, to be defined by user.
NOTE: If the majority of employees are salaried, many sites use All Positions. This selection would take an employee’s predefined FTE from the Assignments/ENH (EA) or Assignments/STD (PO) form. Then you would manually change the individual employee’s record
for an hourly employee. select Hours of All only if there is no FTE already set up for hourly
employees whose hours vary from week to week.
FTE Lock Rule
Select an item from the list.
♦ Blank for manual entry.
♦ Locked until recalculation program is run
(recommended).
♦ Frozen for unchanging.
None of these choices have any effect for an FTE rule of
Benefit.
Amounts
Select an item from the list.
♦ [Blank]. Do not use any of the following rules.
♦ Frozen. The amounts are initially calculated by the program, then frozen. They are not updated with you use the
Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window to do a
mass recalculation, nor when you select the [Recalculate] button ton the Plan Information tab of the Benefits
Management form.
10/2010
3-31
♦ Locked. If the FTE rule is not BN, the amounts are
recalculated when you use the Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window or the [Recalculate] button.
♦ Dynamic. The most current plan amounts will be used.
Any changes affecting these amounts made anywhere
(whether made to employee FTE, the FTE rule, or in
Position Control) will change these amounts. Whenever
changes are made on the Deductions (PD) form, they
will be reflected here too. Every time this record is
accessed by the software, it will recalculate the amounts
based on what is in the master file for the current date.
Don’t use Dynamic if you integrate deductions from
Benefits Management into the Payroll System or want an
audit trail of records.
Salary
Leave blank for no salary calculation or make a selection from
the list.
♦ Prime Position. Use the FTE from the employee’s prime
position only for benefit FTE.
♦ All Positions. Use the total FTE from all of the
♦ Benefit. Benefit FTE override, to be defined by user.
Salary lock
Leave blank for no salary lock rule or make a selection from
the list.
♦ Dynamic for recalculating every time based on what is
on the position assignment in Position Control. If you
want to maintain an audit trail of the changes to the
records, don’t use Dynamic.
♦ Frozen for perpetually unchanging.
♦ Locked for not changing until the recalculation program
is run.
If you select a Salary rule of Benefit, none of these choices
have any effect.
Default Flags
3-32
Define the default flags for Section 125, Primary coverage,
and Cobra Flag.
10/2010
Sect 125
Make a selection from the following list:
 blank for no default on the Benefits Management
form.
 Yes for a qualified Section 125 plan.
 No for a non-qualified plan.
This box is for information and reports only. It will have
no effect on any calculations.
Primary
Coverage
 Select the check box if this is the employee’s primary
coverage.
 Clear the check box if the employee is relying on
other coverage.
Use whichever value will apply for the majority of
employees on the Benefits Management form of the
Employee Maintenance window. The purpose of typing a
default here is to minimize keying of data on the Benefits
Management form.
Cobra
 Select the check box for a COBRA-eligible plan.
 Clear the check box for a plan that is not eligible.
Use whichever value will apply for the majority of
employees on the Benefits Management form of the
Employee Maintenance window. The purpose of typing a
default here is to minimize keying of data on the Benefits
Management form. See chapter 4 for more information.
10/2010
3-33
This is a tracking flag for selecting records. It has no
influence on other calculations. It can be used any way
your district chooses. You may choose to track the
COBRA plans a new employee brings in. Alternatively,
you can track employees who have left the organization
and are continuing to receive their benefits under a
COBRA-eligible plan. Or you can flag packages which
contain COBRA-eligible plans.
M
This is a two-character user-defined box. The definition and
use of this box is controlled by the BMFLDM user security
matrix.
The one-character label of this box, currently displayed as
M, and an eight-character abbreviated label can be defined
in the BMFLDM user security matrix.
This box may be used as either two separate one-character
boxes, or as a single two-character box. It can be defined as
being either Required or Optional. Up to 20 two-character
definitions or 40 one-character definitions can be established for use in this box.
For instructions on setting up BMFFLDM, see Chapter 4 in
Modules, Tasks, and User Security for QCC.
D
This is a one-character user-defined box. The definition and
use of this box is controlled by the BMFLDD user security
matrix.
D, and an eight-character abbreviated label can be defined
in the BMFLDD user security matrix.
This box can be defined as being either Required or
Optional. Up to 20 one-character definitions can be established for use in this box.
For instructions on setting up BMFFLDD, see Chapter 4 in
Adding and Removing Plans
These instructions focus on the part of the dialog box that allows you to add and
remove plans from a Package Code. Each Package code must have at lease one and
can have up to 20 plans.
3-34
10/2010
To add a plan:
1 In the Plan list, select a Plan Code from the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file
described on page 3-13.
2 Click the [Add Plan] button to add the plan to the list on the bottom of the dialog
box.
To remove a plan:
1 In the list of plans at the bottom of the dialog box, click the Plan or Description
that you want to remove.
2 Click the [Remove Plan] button to remove it from the list.
Do the following to create user-defined plans.
♦ If you are creating a completely user-defined package, select $USR for the first
plan in the list. $USR must be the only plan in the list. See page 3-25 for details.
♦ If you are creating a partially user-defined package, select one or more core plans
and add them to the list of plans. Add $USR as the last plan. $USR must be the last
plan in the list. See page 3-27 for details.
10/2010
3-35
The Package Assignment (BMPA) master file links a salary schedule to a package.
As such, it must be set up after the Package Codes (BMPK) master file and Salary
Schedules have been created.
A user security setting is required to implement and control use of the Package
Assignment (BMPA) master file. This user security can be set to assign Package
Codes either instantly or via a trigger.
♦ Automatic assignment of the employee to a package occurs when the employee is
assigned to a salary schedule in either of the following forms for the Employee
Maintenance window: Assignments/ENH, Assignments/PO, or Assignment Info.
♦ Triggered assignment occurs when the designated trigger character is entered into
the employee’s record.
As of August 2010, the ability to type a trigger character is not available in the
QCC version.
For details, see the PP02BM user security record in Chapter 4 of Modules, Tasks, and
User Security for QCC.
When to Use the Package Assignment (BMPA) Master File
The Package Assignment (BMPA) master file is directly related to the Package Codes
(BMPK) master file; it is not related to any other Benefits Management master files.
It is also directly related to the Position Control Salary Schedules. No master files
other than these two take data from this master file.
3-36
10/2010
Figure 3-12: Package Assignment (BMPA) master file
Deduction Code
select a Salary Schedule code that is already linked to a Package Code.
10/2010
Salary Schedule
Select a Salary Schedule from the list.
Package Code
Select a Package Code from the Package Codes (BMPK) master file described on page 3-23.
3-37
The FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file allows you to pro-rate employee- and
employer-paid benefits by FTE.
♦ For the traditional software, the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file and
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file are separate. You need to define both to
allocate benefits based on FTE in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file.
♦ For QCC, the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file is integrated into the
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file. You create the FTE allocation table for a
Plan Level code at the same time as you create a BMPL record. Accordingly, the
instructions for FTE allocation tables are integrated into the instructions for the
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file starting on page 3-49.
When to Use the FTE Allocation Table Master File
Think of the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file as two different types of
tables that can be created using the same form. They are the employee type FTE table
and the plan/level type FTE table. Each district uses one or the other. It is not recommended that a district use both.
♦ The plan/level type is more commonly used, because a different table can be created for each plan and coverage level. In the QCC software, the plan/level type
table is integrated with the Coverage Level (BMLC) master file described on 3-49.
♦ The employee type FTE table is used in very limited circumstances, when the percentage breakdown of premium and FTE ranges are the same for all of a district’s
plans and levels that an employee may choose as part of a package.
REMINDER: For the QCC software, you need to use the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT)
master file only for employee type FTE tables. You can build plan/level type FTE tables from
within the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file.
Employee Type FTE Table
The employee-type FTE table might be used if your district has a very simple system
with few plans. To use this type, the premium percentages divided between employer
and employee must be identical across all plans and levels that any one employee
may choose in a package.
You could have a different employee-type FTE table for each package, or for each
category of employee. If you categorize employees by bargaining unit, for example,
the first input box of the Allocation box could be used to match the bargaining unit to
the employee. If you set up a different employee-type FTE table for each package,
you could use the second input box of the Allocation box to match the package code.
3-38
10/2010
Figure 3-13 illustrates the FTE allocation table used as an employee-type FTE table.
Figure 3-13: FTE Allocation Table Used as Employee-Type FTE Table
Use the employee-type of FTE allocation table when in the Plan/Level
Amounts master file you use:
♦ Premiums using employee-type FTE table. (See page 3-60.)
If:
♦ The FTE ranges remain the same across all plans and all levels that any employee
may select as part of a package, and
♦ The premium percentages that the employee and employer pay for each FTE range
remain the same across all plans and all levels within each package or each bargaining unit.
Do this:
1 Use only one FTE allocation table of the employee type for all plans and levels
within a package.
2 Use only the first two input box boxes of the Allocation box.
3 Select Employee in the Type box.
4 Leave blank the Plan/Level/Start Date boxes. This type of table applies to all
plans and levels within a certain package.
10/2010
3-39
5 Type P (Percents) in the Amounts are box. This is a percent of any premium.
6 In the Employee Amount and Employer Amount boxes for each FTE range, type
the percentage of the premium total paid by each.
7 Set up the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file to have premium amounts but
not allocation codes. The amounts can be set up in that master file as either dollar
amounts or salary percentages. Type the total premium amount—the same
amount—in both the Employee and Employer amount boxes in the Plan/Level
Amounts (BMPL) master file. See the example that follows and page 3-49 and
page 3-60 for more information.
With an employee-type FTE table, there is no direct connection by means of allocation codes between the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file and the Plan/Level
Amounts (BMPL) master file.
The link is made on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance
window. When you type the two-part allocation code of the desired employee-type
FTE table for that package, you’ll see the correct percentage breakdowns and premium breakdowns. The package code on the Benefits Management form links to the
employee and employer amounts from the member plans, and the allocation code
links to the FTE table and applies it to all the plans in the package for the employee
shown on the Benefits Management Screen.
Example of Employee-Type FTE Table
The following example shows the plans in a package that uses an employee-type FTE
table. The premium allocations for all plans in the package must conform to the same
FTE allocation table, the one shown in Figure 3-14. The results are shown on the Benefits Management (BM) Screen in Figure 3-17.
3-40
10/2010
Figure 3-14: BMFT—Premium Using Employee-Type FTE Table
Figure 3-14 shows an employee-type FTE table that may be applied to any package or
any employee on the Benefits Management form. The allocation code has only two
parts. Using this table, an employee with an FTE of between 0.25 and 0.50 will pay
75 percent of the premium for each plan in his package.
Figure 3-15: BMPL—Medical Record Used with Employee-Type FTE Table
10/2010
3-41
Figure 3-15 shows a medical plan designed to be used with any employee-type FTE
table. Notice that the total premium amount of $200.00 is typed into both the
Employee and Employer amount boxes. Notice also that there is no FTE allocation
code for this plan. The package that this plan is part of may be used with any FTE
allocation table, as long as it is an employee type.
Figure 3-16: BMPL—Dental Record Used with Employee-Type FTE Table
Figure 3-16 shows a dental plan designed to be used with any employee-type FTE
table. Notice that the total premium amount of $50.00 is typed into both the
Employee and Employer amount boxes. Notice also that there is no FTE allocation
code for this plan, so it is not tied to any particular employee-type FTE table.
3-42
10/2010
Figure 3-17: Result of Benefits Management form on premiums using the employee-type FTE table
Because the allocation code 10-EM was typed in the Alloc box on the Benefits Management (BM) Screen in Figure 3-17, the employee-type FTE table with allocation
10-EM shown in Figure 3-14 has been applied to this employee and this package.
Because her FTE is between 0.50 and 0.75, according to the FTE table in Figure 3-14,
this employee pays 50 percent of the premium totals of all plans in this package. So
the total medical premium of $200.00 is divided into $100.00 paid by the employee
and $100.00 paid by the employer. The dental premium has likewise been divided
into half of the total for the employee and half of the total for the employer.
The key facts to note from this example are:
♦ All plans in a package that is used with an employee-type FTE table must have
their premiums divided in the same way for the same FTE ranges.
♦ All plans that are set up in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file to be used
with employee-type FTE tables cannot be used with plan/level-type FTE tables as
well. This is because the total premium amount must be typed in both Employee
and Employer amount boxes. This is a completely different setup than those for
any plans used with plan/level-type FTE tables.
10/2010
3-43
Plan/Level Type FTE Table
For the QCC version, the plan/level type FTE table is integrated with the Plan/Level
Amounts (BMPL) master file. See the instructions for that master file starting on page
3-49. Any FTE allocation tables that you create from the Plan/Level Amounts
(BMPL) master file show up in the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file.
Options for Allocation Tables
Code
select code that is already defined.
Allocation
Do either of the following.
♦ For a plan/level type FTE allocation table, fill in all 3
boxes.
One possibility would be to use the first box as a year
identifier, the second box as a plan identifier, and the
third box as a coverage level indicator. Thus, a Kaiser
plan for the year 2001, covering multiple dependents,
might have an FTE allocation code of 01-KS-E2.
3-44
10/2010
Options for FTE
allocation tables
Boxes for defining
FTE allocation
tables
Figure 3-18: Package Assignment (BMPA) master file
For a plan/level-type FTE table, this allocation code
must match the FTE allocation code for a corresponding
record in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file
exactly.
♦ For an employee-type FTE table, leave the third input
box of this box blank; use only the first two input boxes
of this box.
Type
Make a selection from the list:
♦ Plan Level for a table that allows different FTE ranges to
be defined for each plan and level.
♦ Employee for a table with FTE ranges that are the same
for all plans and levels in a package.
Plan/level/start
date
♦ Leave blank for an Employee type table.
♦ Fill in for a Plan Level type table.
10/2010
3-45
If you use a plan/level-type FTE table, you must enter
the plan, level, and start date of the corresponding record
from the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file. See
page 3-49 for a discussion of the this master file.
The system does not verify existing plans and coverage
levels in the Plan Codes and Coverage Levels master
files. Rather, the plan/level-type FTE table looks for a
corresponding allocation code in the Plan/Level
Amounts master file. It must match the FTE allocation
code in the Plan/Level Amounts master file exactly. It is
the allocation code that hooks together the corresponding
records in these two master files.
Amounts are
♦ For an Employee type table, select Percent.
♦ For a Plan/Level type table, select Dollars or Percent to
determine whether the Employee Amount and
Employer Amount in the table are dollar amounts or
percentages.
Premium Amount
or Percent total
One of the following.
♦ For a table that is used in the Plan/Level Amounts
(BMPL) master file, the total dollar amount or percentage for a billing period.
♦ For a table with no link, the sum of the employee and
employer amounts in the first row of the FTE table.
Defining FTE Allocation Tables
The Add New/Edit area allows you to add, change, and delete rows from the grid of
FTE ranges. When adding a table, start from the bottom and work up. For example,
you are defining four levels: 0.0000 to 0.2499, 0.2500 to 0.4999, 0.5000 to 0.7499,
and 0.7500 to 1.0000 FTE. Make the 0.0000 range the first row, the 0.2500 range the
second row, and so on. The rows in the grid must cover the entire span from 0.0000
through 1.0000 FTE.
3-46
10/2010
Figure 3-19: Add New/Edit area for adding or changing rows
To insert a row:
1 In the FTE table, click the row under which you want to insert a row.
2 Select the Insert option button.
3 Type the FTE Low amount from 0 through 1.000 FTE. The number must be more
than the FTE Low for the previous row and less than the FTE Low for the next
row.
4 The system fills in the FTE High.
5 Fill in the Employee Amount and Employer Amount.
 The Amounts are box determines whether to type dollar amounts or percentages.
 For a Dollars table, Employee and Employer amounts must add up to the same
sum for every row in the table.
 Both amounts are required if you did not fill in a Plan/leave/start date.
 If you fill in a Plan/level/start date, you can type just the Employee or
Employer Amount, and the system will calculate the other number based on
6 Click the [Accept] button to insert a row. The system adjusts the FTE High for the
previous or next row to prevent the range from having any gaps between .0000 and
1.0000 FTE.
10/2010
3-47
To delete a row:
1 Click the row to delete.
2 Select the Delete option button.
3 Click the [Accept] button. The system adjusts the FTE High column to fill in gaps
between 0.0000 and 1.0000 FTE created by the deletion.
To replace a row:
1 In the FTE table, click the row to replace.
2 Select the Replace option button.
4 Change the FTE Low if needed.
 The Amounts are box determines whether to type dollar amounts or
percentages.
6 Click the [Accept] button to replace the row. The system adjusts the FTE High for
the previous or next row to prevent the range from having any gaps between .0000
and 1.0000 FTE.
3-48
10/2010
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) Master File
Thirteen Ways to Set Up Premium Amounts
The Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file defines, for each plan and level of coverage, the premium amount(s) the employee and/or employer pays for a given date
range. The plan and level together describe the premium relationship between
employee and employer. A new record is set up whenever the premium amounts
change.
The premium amounts can be set up in thirteen different ways:
METHOD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
10/2010
SET UP FTE
ALLOCATION
Premium amounts not connected to
No
employee FTE
Employee-paid premium with employerNo
paid surcharge
Sliding-scale correlation between premium
No
percentage and FTE
Stepped correlation between premium perYes
centage and employee FTE
Premium using employee-type FTE table Yes, indirectly
Premium as percentage of employee
Yes
income—using FTE
Premium as percentage of employee
No
income—not using FTE
Life insurance premium
No
General cap amount to be applied against
No
total employer benefit cost
Cap amount applied against largest
No
employer benefit cost
Pro-ration of employer amount does not
No
affect employee amount
Employee amount is FTE pro-rated value
No
of stated amount
Aggregated employee/employer amount
No
pro-rated by FTE
SEE
PAGE
3-50
3-53
3-53
3-57
3-60
3-64
3-67
3-70
3-78
3-82
3-85
3-88
3-92
3-49
1. Premium Amounts Not Connected to Employee FTE
If for a certain plan and coverage level:
♦ The amount that an employee pays is not dependent on the employee’s FTE.
Do this:
1 Type the premium totals in dollar amounts in both the Employee and Employer
Amount boxes. These amounts together should be the quotient of the annual premium divided by the number you enter in the Billing basis box. See page 3-97 and
page 3-103 for more information about the billing basis.
2 Select Dollars in the boxes to the right of the Employee and Employer amount
boxes.
3 Leave the FTE Allocation box blank.
4 For the traditional software, do not enter the information for this record in the FTE
Allocation Table (BMFT) master file.
NOTE: If the employee pays the entire premium amount, type the premium total in the
Employee Amount box, select Dollars in the box to its right, and leave the Employer
Amount box and the box to its right blank.
If the employer pays the entire premium amount, leave the Employee Amount box and
the box to its right blank, and type the premium total in the Employer Amount box, and
select Dollars in the box to its right.
5 Select the
3-50
(Save [F9]) icon.
10/2010
Figure 3-20: PL—Premium amounts not connected to employee FTE
Figure 3-21 shows the Benefits Management form of an employee enrolled in the
dental plan in Figure 3-20. He will pay $15.35 in each of 12 pay periods, regardless of
his FTE. The employer will pay $61.42.
10/2010
3-51
Figure 3-21: Result on Benefits Management form of premium not connected to employee FTE
3-52
10/2010
2. Employee-Paid Premium with Employer-Paid Surcharge
Some plans may have a surcharge, such as a COBRA fee, which is a small percentage
of the insurance premiums.
♦ The employee pays the entire premium and the employer pays a small percentage
of that amount as a surcharge.
Do this:
1 Type the total premium in the Employee Amount box. This amount should be the
quotient of the annual premium divided by the number you enter in the Billing
Basis box. See page 3-97 and page 3-103 for more information about the billing
basis.
2 Select Dollars in the box to the right of the Employee Amount box.
3 Type the surcharge as a percentage in the Employer Amount box.
4 Select Percent in the box to the right of the Employer Amount box.
6 Select Surcharges Paid by Employer in the Type box.
7 In the traditional software, do not enter the information for this record in the FTE
10/2010
3-53
3. Sliding-Scale Correlation Between Premium Percentage and FTE: ’Dollars by
FTE’
Use this method if your district sets the employer-paid portion of the premium as a
sliding-scale amount that is in direct proportion to the employee’s FTE. It will do a
straight percentage based on the FTE. If a person’s FTE is 1.0000, the employer pays
100%. If an employee’s FTE is 0.9900, the employer portion is 99%, and so on. Using
this ’dollars by FTE’ method, you don’t have to set up your own table in a spreadsheet
and calculate amounts to enter in the FTE table.
♦ The employer percentage of the premium total varies in direct proportion to the
employee’s FTE.
Do this:
1 Leave blank the Employee Amount box and its as box.
2 Type the total premium in the Employer Amount box. This amount should be the
basis box. See page 3-97 and page 3-103 for more information about the billing
basis. On the Benefits Management form, this amount will be divided into the
employee and employer amounts, based on the FTE.
3 In the as box for the Employer amount, select Dollars by FTE.
5 Select the
3-54
(Save [F9]) icon.
10/2010
Figure 3-22: BMPL—Sliding-scale correlation between premium percentage and employee FTE
Figure 3-23: Result on Benefits Management form of using ’F’ flag for sliding-scale correlation
10/2010
3-55
In the above Benefits Management form, this employee’s FTE is 0.7813. As a result
of the F flag having been entered for plan BCCL in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL)
master file, the employer portion ($310.29) is exactly 78.13 percent of the total premium ($397.14).
The employee portion is $86.85, which the system calculates by subtracting the
employer amount from the premium total.
3-56
10/2010
4. Stepped Correlation Between Premium Percentage and Employee FTE
If you need a maximum of 20 levels of FTE that have a corresponding employer-paid
percentage, you can use this method. You could have, for example, 20 levels at 5 percent steps. Or you could use fewer, larger steps, as shown in Figure 3-24.
♦ The employee percentage of the premium total varies in incremental amounts for
each FTE range.
Do this:
1 Leave blank the Employee Amount box and the box to its right.
2 Type the total premium in the Employer Amount box. This amount should be the
basis.
3 Select Dollars from the as box for the Employer Amount.
4 Type the FTE Allocation for this plan and level. The FTE allocation table displays inside the Plan/Level Amounts dialog box. For more details, see page 3-107.
5 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Figure 3-24 shows the same plan and coverage (Kaiser Classified for employee plus
one other person) in both the Plan/Level Amounts and FTE Allocation Table (BMFT)
master files. In this example, note that the FTE allocation code (the connecting link)
is the same in both tables; and the amounts are flagged as D (Dollars) in both tables.
The FTE Allocation table further reveals that if the employee FTE is between 0.5000
and 0.7499, the employee pays half of the premium.
Figure 3-25 illustrates the result of using a stepped correlation between the premium
percentage and employee FTE. Because this employee works between 0.7500 and
0.5624 FTE, according to the FTE allocation table in Figure 3-25, he pays $300 and
the employer pays $100 of the premium.
10/2010
3-57
Figure 3-24: BMPL—Stepped correlation between premium percentage and employee FTE
3-58
10/2010
Figure 3-25: Result on Benefits Management form of using stepped correlation
between premium and FTE
10/2010
3-59
5. Premium Using Employee Type FTE Table
This method might be used only if your district has a very simple system with few
plans. Any plan/level amounts set up in this way must be used only with an
employee-type FTE table! If they are used with a plan/level type FTE table, the
employee/employer amounts will not be reduced by the percentage indicated in the
FTE table, and the totals will be wrong.
If for a certain package:
♦ The premium percentages divided between employer and employee are identical
across all plans and levels that any employee may choose in his package.
Do this:
1 Type the total premium amount, either as a dollar figure or as a salary percentage,
in the Employee amount box. This amount should be the quotient of the annual
premium divided by the number you enter in the Billing basis box. See page 3-97
and page 3-103 for more information about the billing basis.
2 Type either D or P in the box to the right of the Employee amount box, depending
on whether the premium is a dollar amount or a salary percentage.
3 Type the same total premium amount, either as a dollar figure or as a salary percentage, in the Employer amount box. This amount should also be the quotient of
the annual premium divided by the number you enter in the Billing basis box. See
page 3-97 and page 3-103 for more information about the billing basis. Amounts
and flags (D or P) must be identical in both Employee and Employer amount
boxes.
4 Type either D or P in the box to the right of the Employer amount box, depending
on whether the premium is a dollar amount or a salary percentage. This flag must
be the same as the one for the Employee amount box.
5 If you typed P to the right of the Employee and Employer amount boxes, you
must do two extra things:
6 Type P in the Voluntary deduction type box.
7 Type a dollar amount in the Limit amount box. This is the maximum gross pay
per period that is subject to the employer deduction.
8 Leave the FTE allocation box blank. This plan at this level is not directly tied to
the FTE allocation table.
9 Select the
3-60
(Save [F9]) icon.
10/2010
Figure 3-26: BMPL—Premium using employee-type FTE table with dollar amounts
Figure 3-26 shows an example of a medical plan that will be included in a package
using an employee-type FTE table. The premium total is in a dollar amount, $200.00,
which is duplicated in both the Employee Amount and Employer Amount boxes.
Figure 3-27: BMPL—Premium using employee-type table with percentage amounts
10/2010
3-61
Figure 3-27 shows an example of a medical plan that will be included in a package
using an employee-type FTE table. The premium total is 10 percent of an employee’s
income. This amount is duplicated in both the Employee and Employer Amount
boxes. Notice that the Voluntary deduction type and Limit amount boxes are filled
in when using percentage-type premium amounts for this method.
Figure 3-28: BMFT—Premium using employee-type FTE table
Figure 3-28 shows an example of an employee-type FTE table that may be applied to
any package or any employee on the Benefits Management form. An employee with
an FTE of between 0.5000 and 0.7499 will pay 50 percent of the premium for each
plan in his package.
3-62
10/2010
Figure 3-29: Result on Benefits Management form of premium using employee-type FTE table
In Figure 3-29, the employee-type FTE table with allocation 10-EM has been applied
to this employee and this package. Because his FTE is between 0.5000 and 0.7499,
according to the FTE table in Figure 3-28, the employee pays 50 percent of the premium totals of all plans in this package.
10/2010
3-63
6. Premium as Percentage of Employee Income—Using FTE
In the case of life insurance, premiums are often based on a percentage of an
employee’s annual income. In that case, the percentage you would enter would be the
percent of employee income.
NOTE: Amounts done in this way will be shown only as percentages in the Benefits Management Module. If the Benefits Management Module is connected to the Payroll System,
the resultant dollar amounts will appear in the Payroll System on payroll reports.
♦ The employee percentage of the premium total varies for each FTE range, and
♦ The premium is based on a percentage of employee income.
Do this:
1 Leave blank the Employee Amount and its as box blank.
2 Type the premium amount for this plan and level in the Employer Amount box as
a percentage of employee income. This percentage amount should be the quotient
of the annual premium percentage divided by the number you enter in the Billing
basis.
3 Select Percentage in the as box for the Employer Amount.
4 Type the FTE Allocation for this plan and level. The FTE allocation table displays
inside the Plan/Level Amounts dialog box. For more details, see page 3-107.
5 For the voluntary deduction Type, select Percent. (See page 3-105 for details.)
6 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Figure 3-30 shows that the premium amount of this life insurance for an employee up
to age 59 is 7.5 percent of the employee’s income.
Figure 3-31 illustrates the resulting calculation on the Benefits Management form.
This employee has an FTE of 43.75 percent of full-time (for her primary position), so
she must pay 4.0 percent of her income in life insurance premiums.
Although on the Benefits Management form the other numbers in the Employee and
Employer boxes are dollar amounts, 4.00 and 3.50 refer to percentage of
employee income. You can discern this because the total of 7.50 is found in the
Total % display box, and no dollar amount is shown in the Total Ded display box.
3-64
10/2010
Figure 3-30: BMPL—Premium as percent of employee income using FTE
10/2010
3-65
Figure 3-31: Result on Benefits Management form of premium as percent of income using FTE
3-66
10/2010
7. Premium as Percentage of Employee Income—Not Using FTE
In the case of life insurance, premiums are often based on a percentage of an
employee’s annual income. In that case, the percentage you would enter would be the
percent of employee income.
NOTE: Amounts done in this way will be shown only as percentages in the Benefits Management Module. If the Benefits Management Module is connected to the Payroll System,
the resultant dollar amounts will appear in the Payroll System on payroll reports.
♦ The employee percentage of the premium total remains the same for all FTE
ranges, and
♦ The premium is based on a percentage of employee income.
Do this:
1 Type the premium amount for this plan and level in the Employee amount box as
a percentage of employee income. This percentage amount, together with that in
the Employer amount box, should be the quotient of the annual premium divided
by the number you enter in the Billing basis box. See page 3-97 and page 3-103
for more information about the billing basis.
2 Type P (Percent) in the box to the right of the Employee amount box.
3 Type the premium amount for this plan and level in the Employer amount box as
a percentage of employee income. This percentage amount, together with that in
the Employee amount box, should be the quotient of the annual premium divided
by the number you enter in the Billing basis box. See page 3-97 and page 3-103
for more information about the billing basis.
4 Type P (Percent) in the box to the right of the Employer amount box.
5 Leave the FTE allocation box blank.
6 Type P (Percent) in the Voluntary deduction type box. (See page 3-105 for
details.)
7 Type the maximum gross pay per period that is subject to the employer deduction
in the Limit amount box. (See page 3-105 for details.)
8 Do not enter the information for this record in the Benefit Status (BMBS) master
file.
9 Select the
10/2010
(Save [F9]) icon.
3-67
Figure 3-32 illustrates this method of setting up a Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file.
Figure 3-32: BMPL—Premium as percent of employee income not using FTE
Notice that for this plan, both the employer and employee pay a set percentage of the
employee’s income as premium. This percentage is not related to the employee’s
FTE. However, the highest salary limit per pay period to which the employer’s percentage applies is $1,500. So if an employee with this plan has a gross salary of
$2,000 per pay period, the employer’s 2 percent, applied to the first $1,500 only,
would be $30.
The employee, on the other hand, pays 6.0 percent of the entire $2,000, which is
$120.
3-68
10/2010
Figure 3-33: Result on Benefits Management form of premium as percent of income not using FTE
Figure 3-33 illustrates the resulting calculation on the Benefits Management form.
This employee must pay 6.0 percent of his income in life insurance premiums, regardless of his FTE.
Although on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window
the other numbers in the Employee and Employer boxes are dollar amounts, 6.00
and 2.00 refer to percentage of employee income. You can discern this because the
total of 8.00 is found in the Total % display box, and no dollar amount is shown in
the Total Ded display box.
10/2010
3-69
8. Life Insurance Calculation
The district may provide basic life insurance for all employees, within a minimum
and maximum range and prorated on the basis of FTE. The district may also offer
employees the option of purchasing term life insurance for him/herself, his/her
spouse, and/or their children. Premiums for this term coverage would be based on the
amount of insurance purchased and the age of the employee.
Basic Life Insurance
If for a certain plan and coverage level of basic life insurance:
♦ The employee and/or employer premium cost is a prorated amount based on the
employee’s FTE, and
♦ The basic life insurance coverage is based on the employee’s base salary within a
minimum and maximum range.
Do this:
1 If the premium is to be paid by the employer, leave the Employee amount box
blank and type an L in the box to the right of the employee amount. The amount
box related to the L flag for basic life insurance is always blank.
2 Type the annual dollar amount to be paid by the employer in the Employer
amount box with a flag of D.
3 If the premium is to be paid by the employee, reverse the Employee/Employer
amount boxes and flags above.
4 Leave the FTE allocation boxes blank.
5 Type the appropriate billing basis in the Billing basis box.
6 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Figure 3-34 illustrates setting up a basic life insurance plan to be paid for by the
employer. The Employer Amount is an annual total of the per-increment cost of the
policy. In this case, the monthly per-increment cost is $0.155 times the Billing Basis
of 12 which equals $1.86. The amount of the basic life insurance coverage is equal to
the employee’s base salary, rounded up to the next $1,000. If this amount is less than
the minimum allowed benefit, then the Min Ben amount, $12,000 in this case, will be
used; if it is more than the maximum benefit, then the Max Ben amount, $100,000 in
this case, will be used. The coverage increment in this case is $1,000.
The cost for an individual employee’s basic life insurance coverage will be computed
by dividing the employee’s salary base (or the minimum or maximum amount, if
appropriate) by the increment amount. The result of this computation will then be
multiplied by the monthly per-increment cost to yield the monthly premium.
3-70
10/2010
Figure 3-34: Plan/Level screen for basic life insurance paid by employer
Figure 3-36 illustrates a basic life insurance plan paid for by the employer. The
employee’s base salary, rounded to the next $1,000, is $39,000. This amount divided
by the increment amount of $1,000 yields 39 units or increments of coverage. The 39
increment units are then multiplied by the monthly per-increment cost of $0.155 to
yield a total employer cost of $6.045, which rounds to $6.05.
The details of this calculation are in the Plan Information grid. You may have to use
the horizontal scroll bar to see the Units, Increment, and Rate columns at the right
side of the grid.
Figure 3-35: Units, Increment, and Rate columns
10/2010
3-71
Figure 3-36: Basic Life Insurance on the BM screen
Optional Term Life Insurance
If for a certain plan and coverage level of term life insurance:
♦ Coverage can be purchased for the employee, his spouse, and/or his child within
stated minimum and maximum ranges,
♦ The premium cost is a set amount for each increment of term life insurance purchased,
♦ Increases in term life coverage can be purchased in set incremental amounts, and
♦ The age of the employee is a factor in determining the premium amount,
Do this:
1 If the employee pays the premium, type the annual dollar rate for each increment
of term life insurance purchased in the Employee Amount box and select Dollars
in the as box.
2 Type the number of increments of insurance purchased in the Employer Amount
box, and select Life Insurance Calculation in the as box. For example, if the
3-72
10/2010
insurance can be purchased in increments of $1,000 and the employee wishes to
purchase $5,000 of coverage, type 5.00 in the Employer Amount box and select
Life Insurance Calculation from the as list.
3 Leave the FTE Allocation boxes blank.
4 Type the appropriate billing basis in the Billing Basis box.
5 The system fills in the Age box from the Coverage Level (BMLC) master file.
Change these defaults if needed.
6 The system fills in the Min Ben, Max Ben, Incr, and Max X Sal boxes from the
Plan Codes (BMPC) master file. Change these defaults if needed.
7 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Figure 3-37 illustrates the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file for an employee
aged 30 to 34 years. A separate Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file record must be
created for each premium age range as the annual cost per increment will be different.
Since the employee will be paying the premium for this optional coverage, the annual
cost per increment is typed in the Employee Amount box with Dollars selected from the
as list. In this case, the monthly cost per increment is $0.55, multiplied by the Billing
Basis of 12 yields a total annual cost of $6.60 for the Employee Amount.
In this case, the minimum benefit (Min Ben) is $20,000 which can be increased in
increments (Incr) of $10,000 up to a maximum (Max Ben) of $250,000. The maximum coverage, however, cannot exceed five times the employee’s base salary (Max
X Sal). The minimum number of incremental units that an employee may purchase is
2 units ($20,000 Min Ben divided by $10,000 Incr). This figure is typed in the
Employer Amount box with Life Insurance Calculation selected from the as list.
If the employer is paying for the optional term life insurance, reverse the entries in the
Employee and Employer Amount boxes accordingly. The party paying for the coverage should have the annual cost and Dollars code, while the other party would have
the number of units and the Life Insurance Calculation code.
10/2010
3-73
Figure 3-37; Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file for optional term life insurance for employee
Figure 3-38 illustrates a sample Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file record for
optional life insurance for the spouse of an employee. The same concepts apply as
discussed above, but in this case the monthly rate per increment is only $0.35, which
calculates out to an annual rate of $4.20 ($0.35 times the Billing Basis of 12 equals
$4.20).
The age range for the spouse is the same as the employee’s age range, regardless of
the actual age of the spouse.
3-74
10/2010
Figure 3-38: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file for optional term life insurance for spouse
Figure 3-39 illustrates a Benefits Management form showing optional term life insurance being purchased for both the employee and her spouse.
10/2010
3-75
Figure 3-39: BM screen with optional term life insurance for employee and spouse
The amounts in the Employee column represent the monthly cost of the insurance
purchased by the employee. The amounts in the Units column represent the increments of insurance that have been purchased. The Units column is on the right side of
the grid, so you may have to use the horizontal scroll bar to display it.
For the employee, five (5) incremental units of term life insurance are being purchased. Since the incremental rate for the employee term life plan is $10,000 these
five units represent $50,000 term life insurance coverage. The monthly rate for this
coverage is the monthly incremental rate of $0.55 times the 5 units for a total of
$2.75.
For the employee’s spouse, four (4) incremental units of term life insurance are being
purchased. The incremental rate for the spouse’s plan is $5,000, so these four units
represent $20,000 of term life insurance coverage. The monthly rate for this coverage
is the spouse’s monthly incremental rate of $0.35 times the 4 units for a total of $1.40.
3-76
10/2010
Figure 3-40: BM Screen with Units for term life available for entry
10/2010
3-77
9. General Cap Amount to be applied against total employer benefit cost
Cap amounts, or maximum employer benefit costs, are established by Bargaining
Unit agreements. This method is used when the district Caps are applied against the
total employer benefit costs for an employee. The employee is responsible for the
amount that the employer costs for his selected benefits exceed the Cap. The
employer benefit Cap amount can be prorated based on actual employee FTE.
If for a certain Bargaining Unit:
♦ A maximum employer benefit cost, or Cap, has been established by contract which
is applied against the total of all benefits selected by the employee, and the amount
of the Cap varies directly with the employee’s actual FTE.
Do this:
1 Use a generic Coverage Level code, such as ANY or ALL.
2 Use a generic Plan Code, such as CAP. Define this Plan Code with a Default coverage level of your generic Level of Coverage code from above, a Start date, and
the appropriate Section 125 designation. Leave all other boxes on the Plan Code
box blank.
3 Add the generic Plan Code to the Packages.
4 Establish Cap amounts by bargaining unit in the Cap Amounts (BMCA) master
file.
5 On the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file, leave both Employee amount
boxes blank.
6 Leave the Employer amount box blank and type C in the box to the right of the
Employer amount box. The actual dollar amount of the Cap is set in the Cap
Amounts (BMCA) master file.
7 Type 12 in the Billing basis box.
8 Leave all other boxes on the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file blank.
9 In the traditional software, do not enter the information for this record in an FTE
The generic Coverage Level (BMLC) master file would appear as follows:
3-78
10/2010
Figure 3-41: Generic Coverage Level (BMLC) master file
The generic Plan Codes (BMPC) master file would appear as follows:
Figure 3-42: Generic Plan Codes (BMPC) master file
A Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file record would appear as follows:
10/2010
3-79
Figure 3-43: Sample Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file
Figure 3-44 illustrates the generic PL Plan/Level Amounts screen for a cap that
applies to the total of all employer benefit costs. It brings together the generic Coverage Level code from Figure 3-41 and the generic Plan Code from Figure 3-42. The
amount of the cap that will be applied to the total employer benefit costs comes from
the Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file, as illustrated in Figure 3-43.
Figure 3-44: BMPL - Cap Amount on Total Employer Cost
Since the dollar amount of the Cap is set bargaining unit by bargaining unit, there is
no need to indicate the amount of a Cap on the PL Plan Level screen. The system will
automatically apply the correct Cap based upon the employee’s bargaining unit membership, as recorded on the Demographic form of the Employee Maintenance
window.
3-80
10/2010
Figure 3-45: BM screen showing effect of Cap applied against total employer costs
Figure 3-45 illustrates the application of a $400 general cap against total employer
costs of $550. Note that the employee costs are increased by the same amount as the
employer costs are reduced.
10/2010
3-81
10. Cap Amount applied against largest employer benefit cost
Cap amounts, or maximum employer benefit costs, are established by Bargaining
Unit agreements. This method is used when the district Caps are applied against the
largest employer benefit cost, which is usually the cost of health insurance for an
employee. The employee is responsible for the amount that the employer cost for his
selected benefit exceeds the Cap. The employer benefit Cap amount can be prorated
based on actual employee FTE.
If for a certain Bargaining Unit:
♦ A maximum employer benefit cost, or Cap, has been established by contract which
is applied against the largest of the benefits selected by the employee, and the
amount of the Cap varies directly with the employee’s actual FTE.
Do this:
1 Create CL Coverage Level codes which reference being capped, such as EC for
Employee Only (Capped).
2 Create CA Cap Amount codes for each bargaining unit which is capping the largest
employer expense.
3 On the PL Plan/Level screen set up the plan to be capped with the capped coverage
levels.
4 Leave both Employee amount boxes blank .
5 Type the dollar amount of the premium for the plan to be capped in the Employer
amount box. Type C in the box to the right of the Employer amount box.
6 Type 12 in the Billing basis box if the amount in the Employer amount box is a
monthly cap; type 01 if the amount in the Employer amount box is an annual
cap.
7 Leave all other boxes blank.
8 For the traditional software, do not enter the information for this record in the FTE
Figure 3-46 illustrates an LC Coverage Level screen for a capped level.
3-82
10/2010
Figure 3-46: Coverage Level code for Cap to be applied to largest employer cost
Figure 3-47 illustrates the PL Plan/Level screen which sets up a health insurance plan
to be capped, using the Coverage Level illustrated in Figure 3-46.
Figure 3-47: BMPL - Health plan to be capped
The amount in the Employer amount box in Figure 3-47 represents the total premium cost of this one Plan/Level. Figure 3-48 illustrates the cap amount.
10/2010
3-83
Figure 3-48: Cap Amount set for certificated bargaining unit
Figure 3-49: BM screen for cap on largest employer benefit cost
Figure 3-49 illustrates a $400 cap on employer benefit costs with the amount over the
cap charged to the employee. The total cost of benefits is $510, and the employee is
charged with the $110 over-cap amount. Since the DDCL dental plan has a standard
$10 employee cost, the balance of the $110, or $100 in this case, has been charged
against the KS1 health plan.
3-84
10/2010
11. Pro-ration of Employer Amount Does Not Affect Employee Amount
With this rule, the employer amount is pro-rated by the FTE of the employee, but the
amount reduced from the full employer cost is not placed on the employee side.
An example of when this rule would be used is if the district is providing some kind
of in-lieu payment when the employee has waived medical coverage. As the
employee’s FTE is reduced, the amount of the in-lieu payment is also reduced.
♦ The employer cost is reduced proportionately based on the employee’s FTE, and
♦ The employee’s cost is not affected by the reduction in the employer cost
Do this:
1 Enter the dollar amount to be withheld from the employee in the Employee
Amount box and select Dollars from the as box. If there is no employee cost
associated with this benefit, leave these boxes blank.
2 Enter the full dollar amount that the employer will pay on behalf of a 1.0 FTE
employee in the Employer Amount box and select Maintain Employee Amount
from the as box. This amount should be equal to the total annual cost divided by
the Billing Basis.
5 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
This example illustrates setting up a $300 employer-provided benefit for a 1.0 FTE
employee. The amount of this benefit will decrease as the employee’s FTE decreases.
The amount of the decrease will not be offset by an employee cost. The employee
cost will remain unchanged as the FTE decreases.
Figure 3-51 illustrates the BM screen for a 1.0 FTE employee who is receiving the
benefit of the employer-provided payment.
Figure 3-53 illustrates the BM screen for a 0.5 FTE employee whose employer-provided payment has been reduced with no offsetting increase in employee cost.
10/2010
3-85
Figure 3-50: BMPL - Set cost for employer-provided benefit by FTE
Figure 3-51: Benefits Management form reflecting employer paid benefit for 1.0 FTE employee
3-86
10/2010
Figure 3-53: Benefits Management form reflecting employer-paid benefit for 0.5 FTE employee
10/2010
3-87
12. Employee amount is FTE pro-rated value of stated amount
This rule is like a cap rule, but it is applied to the employee. There is a stated maximum amount, and the higher the employee’s FTE, then the less the employee pays of
that stated amount. The employer cost can be either zero regardless of the employee
amount, or a negative amount equal to the amount being paid by the employee.
♦ The employee amount is a set value which is inversely affected by the employee’s
FTE, and
♦ The employer amount is always zero, or
♦ The employer amount is a negative offset amount equal to the employee amount
Do this:
1 Enter the maximum dollar amount to be withheld from an employee in the
Employee Amount box and select Amount as FTE Proration from the as list.
2 Leave the Employer Amount blank and select either of the following from the as
list:
 Employer Pays None if the employer-paid amount is always zero on the Benefits Management form.
 Employer Pays Negative if the employer-paid amount can be a negative
amount on the Benefits Management form.
Figure 3-54 illustrates an adjustment amount with a maximum value of $500 which
will be reduced based upon the employee’s FTE. The employer amount is blank with
Employer Pays Negative selected, which indicates it will be a negative of the calculated employee amount.
Figure 3-55 illustrates a 0.85 FTE employee with the inverse employee cap applied.
Note that the full $500 employee cost has been inversely reduced by the FTE to only
$75 ($500 * [1.00 - 0.85]), and that the employer cost shows an equal negative
amount (-$75).
Figure 3-56 illustrates how the BM screen would appear if Employer Pays None had
been selected for the Employer Amount box for the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL)
master file. This would cause the employer cost to remain at zero dollars instead of
being a negative of the employee cost.
3-88
10/2010
Figure 3-54: BMPL - maximum employee cost to be reduced by FTE pro-ration
Figure 3-55: Benefits Management form reflecting positive employee amount and negative employer amount
10/2010
3-89
Figure 3-56: Benefits Management form reflecting employee amount and zero employer amount
Figure 3-57 illustrates the Benefits Management form when the employee FTE is
1.0000. The inverse pro-ration of the $500 cost for a 1.0 FTE employee equals a zero
cost for both employee and employer.
3-90
10/2010
Figure 3-57: Benefits Management form reflecting Employee FTE pro-rated cost at 1.0 FTE
10/2010
3-91
13. Aggregated Employee/Employer Amount Pro-Rated by FTE
This calculation method prorates the combination of the full employee and employer
costs by the employee’s FTE to determine the employer cost. When the employee is
1.0 FTE, no aggregation proration occurs.
♦ Both the employee and the employer pay a set amount when the employee’s FTE
is 1.0, but
♦ When the employee works less than 1.0 FTE, the total premium cost is pro-rated
on the basis of the employee’s actual FTE, and
♦ The employer pays this calculated pro-rated amount, and
♦ The employee pays the balance of the total premium
Do this:
1 Enter the set dollar amount that a 1.0 FTE employee will pay in the Employee
amount box on the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file; type D (Dollars) in
the box to the right of the Employee amount box.
2 Enter the set dollar amount that the employer will pay for a 1.0 FTE employee in
the Employer amount box, and type G (Aggregated Proration) in the box to the
right of the Employer amount box.
3 Leave the FTE allocation boxes blank.
5 Select the
3-92
(Save [F9]) icon.
10/2010
Figure 3-58: Employee and employer set-up for aggregation by FTE
Figure 3-58 illustrates how to set up the premium costs for an Aggregate by FTE type
plan. Enter the full amount that a 1.0 FTE employee will pay, $25 in this case, in the
Employee amount box with a code of D (Dollars). Enter the full amount that the
employer will pay, $500 in this case, in the Employer amount box with a code of G
(Aggregate by FTE). The resulting BM screen is illustrated in Figure 3-59.
10/2010
3-93
Figure 3-59: Benefits Management form reflecting an aggregate by FTE benefit cost
Figure 3-59 illustrates the BM Benefits Management screen for a 1.0 FTE employee
using the aggregate by FTE Plan/Level codes. Figure 3-60 illustrates the BM screen for
an employee with less than 1.0 FTE using the aggregate by FTE Plan/Level formula.
3-94
10/2010
Figure 3-60: Benefits Management form with less than 1.0 FTE and aggregate by FTE benefit cost
The Employer cost is computed by multiplying the employee’s FTE against the total
cost of the benefit ( 0.4 * $525 = $210). The Employee cost is computed by subtracting the Employer cost from the total cost of the benefit ($520 - $210 = $315).
10/2010
3-95
Table Summarizing Premium Amount Setups
The following table summarizes the use of the key boxes involved in the thirteen
methods for setting up premium amounts in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master
file.
Table of Premium Amount Setups
METHOD
EMPLOYEE
AMOUNT
TYPE
EMPLOYER
AMOUNT
TYPE
FTE ALLOCATION
VOLUNTARY
DEDUCTION
TYPE
LIMIT
1. Premium not
connected to
FTE
Employee part
of annual $
divided by billing
basis
Dollars
Employer part of
annual $ divided by
billing basis
Dollars
Blank
Blank
Blank
2. Employeepaid premium
with employerpaid surcharge
Annual $ divided
by billing basis
Dollars
Surcharge percent
Percent
Blank
Surcharge
Blank
3. Sliding-scale
correlation
Blank
Blank
Annual $ divided by
billing basis
Dollars by
FTE
Blank
Blank
Blank
4. Stepped correlation
Blank
Blank
Annual $ divided by
billing basis
Dollars
Use code
Blank
Blank
Annual $ or %
divided by billing
basis
Dollars or
Percent
Blank
Blank if $
amount; Percent
if % amount
Blank if Daily
Calculation
type; $
amount if Percent type
5. Using
employee-type
FTE table
6. Percent of
income with FTE
7. Percent of
income without
FTE
Annual $ or % Dollars or
divided by billing Percent
basis
Blank
Blank
Annual % divided by
billing basis
Percent
Use code
Percent
Blank
Employee part
of annual %
divided by billing
basis
Percent
Employer part of
annual % divided by
billing basis
Percent
Blank
Percent
Dollar amount
Percent if
% rate,
else Life
Insurance Calculation
Blank
Blank
Blank
C
Blank
Blank
Blank
8. Life insurance
If employee
Percent if
If employer paid,
premium as
paid, enter %
% rate,
enter % rate; if
percentage of
rate; if employer else Life employee paid, enter
policy face value paid, enter polInsurpolicy face value in
icy face value in ance Cal1000’s of dollars
1000’s of dollars culation
9. General cap
against total
employee cost
3-96
Blank
Blank
Blank
10/2010
Table of Premium Amount Setups
METHOD
EMPLOYEE
AMOUNT
TYPE
EMPLOYER
AMOUNT
TYPE
FTE ALLOCATION
VOLUNTARY
DEDUCTION
TYPE
LIMIT
10. Cap against
largest employer
cost
Blank
Blank
Total dollar
premium for plan to
which cap will apply
C
Blank
Blank
Blank
D, or
Blank
Total dollar amount
divided by billing
basis to be paid by
employer for 1.0 FTE
employee
M
Blank
Blank
Blank
11. Pro-ration of Dollar amount to
employer
be withheld from
amount does not
1.0 FTE
affect employee employee; leave
blank if none.
12. Stated
employee
amount prorated by FTE
Maximum dollar
amount to be
withheld from an
employee
E
Blank
- or 0
Blank
Blank
Blank
13. Aggregated
employee and
employer
amount prorated by FTE
Set dollar
amount to be
paid by 1.0 FTE
employee
D
Set dollar amount to
be paid by employer
for 1.0 FTE
employee
G
Blank
Blank
Blank
The billing basis is the number of payroll cycles in one year to which employee and
employer amounts are billed. If your district uses the same pay frequency for all
employees (for example, 12 times a year), you may find it advantageous to use that
billing basis for all plans (for example, 12). In that case, calculate the premium
amount as the annual premium divided by the billing basis (for example, one-twelfth
of the annual premium). Then the premium amounts that appear on the Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window will reflect the amounts taken
out of each monthly pay warrant.
However, if your district uses a variety of different pay frequencies, it may streamline
input to use a billing basis of 1 for all plans. That would represent the entire annual
premium for a plan. This amount would need to be divided by the number of payrolls
in the year to see the per-pay warrant amount.
If you use a billing basis of 1, you can see the annual amounts broken down for each
employee’s pay periods by running the Update Pay Deductions Program (BM0905) in
Report Only mode. See page 5-3 for more information.
10/2010
3-97
Since the premium amounts shown on the Benefits Management form are taken
directly from the amounts typed into the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file,
using different billing bases for different plans would result in an inconsistent (and
therefore meaningless) total on the Benefits Management form. Consequently, it is
recommended that you use the same billing basis for all plans.
3-98
10/2010
Boxes for all
Plan/Level
Amounts.
Boxes only for life
insurance.
The FTE allocation
table displays only
for cases where you
fill in the FTE
Allocation boxes for
benefits pro-rated by
FTE. The allocation
table does not
display when the FTE
Allocation boxes are
blank for benefits that
are the same for all
FTEs.
Boxes only for
using Benefits
Management to
automatically
create Voluntary
Deduction in
Payroll..
Boxes only for
using
Invoicing/Billing
Management
(IBM) to invoice
employees for
benefits.
Figure 3-61: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file with FTE allocation table
The Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file has many boxes to fill in. The top part
contains boxes for all Plan/Level codes. Whether you need to fill in the remainder
depends on the options your site has chosen for implementing Benefits Management
and the type of Plan/Level code.
These instructions look at the following:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
10/2010
Boxes for All Benefit/Plan Codes
Boxes for Life Insurance Only
Boxes for Automatic Creation of Voluntary Deductions in Payroll Only
Boxes for Billing through Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) Only
FTE Allocation Tables
3-99
Because the FTE
Allocation boxes are
blank, the FTE allocation
table does not display. It
is not needed because
the benefit is the same for
all employees regardless
of FTE.
Figure 3-62: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file without FTE allocation table
Boxes for All Benefit/Plan Codes
Figure 3-63 illustrates the boxes to fill in for every Benefit/Plan code.
Figure 3-63: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes for all Plan/Level codes
Codes
select a code.
3-100
10/2010
Plan
♦ For adding, select an item from the list of codes in the
Plan Codes (BMPC) master file.
♦ For changing, inspecting, or deleting, leave the box as is.
Level
♦ For adding, select an item from the list of codes in the
Coverage Level (BMLC) master file.
♦ For changing, inspecting, or deleting, leave the box as is.
Start Date
Do any of the following:
♦ For adding, type or select the start date for the start of the
insurance year. This date is important because the premium amount may change at the beginning of the next
insurance year, requiring a new start date. Leave blank if
using the L option.
♦ For changing, inspecting, or deleting, leave the date as is.
NOTE: Once you have saved a record, you cannot change the Plan, Level, or Start Date. If
either of these boxes is incorrect, delete the incorrect record and add a new one.
End Date
Type or select the ending date for this premium period, if
known.
NOTE: You must enter the end date for a certain plan and level before you can add a new
record with a new start date for the same plan and level.
Employee Amount
as
See the section starting on page 3-49 for a discussion of how to
complete this box based on the structure of the plan you are
drafting.
♦ The Employee Amount box can contain a maximum of
2 decimal places, regardless of whether the number is a
dollar amount or a percentage. Leave this box blank if
the percentages paid by employer and employee vary
with each plan and level of coverage.
♦ In the as box, make one of the following selections:
 Dollars (page 3-50 or page 3-53)
10/2010
3-101
 Percent (page 3-67)
 Life Insurance Calculation (page 3-70)
 Amount as FTE Calculation (3-88)
Employer Amount
as
See the section starting on page 3-49 for a discussion of how to
complete this box based on the structure of the plan you are
drafting.
♦ The Employer Amount can contain a maximum of 2
decimal places, regardless of whether the number is a
dollar amount or a percentage.
♦ In the as box, make one of the following selections:
 Dollars (page 3-53 or page 3-57)
 Percent (page 3-53, page 3-64, or page 3-67)
 Dollars by FTE (page 3-54). Use when the employee
and employer amounts are in direct proportion to
FTE.
 Capped (page 3-78 or page 3-82). Use when a cap is
applied either against all employer costs or against
only the largest employer cost.
 Aggregated Pro-rated by FTE (page 3-92). Use
when FTE is applied against the total premium to
determine employer cost.
♦ Life Insurance Calculation (page 3-70)
♦ Maintain Employee Amount (page 3-85). Use when the
Employer amount varies by FTE and the Employee
amount is not affected.
FTE Allocation
Leave blank, or fill in these boxes if required for the as option
for the employer- or employee-paid amount.
♦ Leave blank for benefit plans that are the same for all
FTEs.
♦ Fill in one or more of these boxes to create an FTE allocation table for pro-rating benefit amounts.
3-102
10/2010
 The first box can contain up to 2 digits.
 The second and third box can contain 2 characters.
You can use these boxes in any way, such as using the
first box for a 2-digit fiscal year, the second for a plan,
and the third for a coverage level.
After you fill in any of these boxes and move to another
box, the tab displays a grid for defining FTE ranges. If
you have already filled in this grid, the window displays
the existing table.
For instructions on filling in the FTE allocation table, see
page 3-107.
NOTE: In the traditional software, the FTE allocation table is in a separate master file called
the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file. For QCC, you can maintain this table directly
within this master file. However, QCC does display the FTE allocation table if you have
already set up the table in the traditional software.
Billing Basis
The billing basis is the number of payroll cycles in one year to
which employee and employer amounts are billed.
If your district uses the same pay frequency for all employees, you may want to use that billing basis for all plans. In
that case, calculate the premium amount as the annual premium divided by the billing basis.
However, if your district uses a variety of different pay frequencies, you may want to use a billing basis of 1, representing the annual premium, for all plans. You can see the
annual amounts broken down for each employee’s pay periods by running the Update Pay Deductions Program
(BM0905) in Report Only mode. See page 5-3 for more
information.
If you did not specify a default billing basis in the corresponding Plan Codes (BMPC) master file record, you can
type it here. If you did, this box will be automatically filled
in. For further information, see “Choosing a Billing Basis”
on page 3-97.
10/2010
3-103
The Billing basis box in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL)
master file is used by the Payroll System only if the pay
deduction records are written based on Update Deductions
from Benefits Management (BM0900).
Boxes for Life Insurance Only
Figure 3-64 illustrates the boxes to for Benefit/Plan codes for life insurance. These
boxes are pre-filled from the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file and Plan/Level
Amounts (BMPL) master file records linked to the Plan/Level code. However, you
can type different numbers to override the defaults.
Figure 3-64: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes for life insurance
Age
To override the pre-filled range, type your own age range.
Min Ben
Max Ben
To override the pre-filled range, type a different minimum and
maximum benefit amount.
Incr
To override the increment, type a different number here.
Max X Sal
To override the maximum times salary, type a number here.
Boxes for Automatic Creation of Voluntary Deductions in Payroll Only
Figure 3-65 illustrates the boxes to fill in for sites that are using Benefits Management
to create Pay Deductions on the Deductions form for the Employee Maintenance window. The Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
on page 5-123 allows you to launch a process that uses the information from the
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file to fill in the Deductions form.
Figure 3-65: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes
for automatic creation of Voluntary Deductions in Payroll
Ded Code
The voluntary deduction number.
♦ The system displays the voluntary deduction number
from the Plan Codes (BMPC) master file linked to this
record.
♦ You can type a voluntary deduction that is linked to your
district.
3-104
10/2010
For more details, see Chapter 5 in the QSS/OASIS Enhanced
Pqyroll Manual.
Type
This box corresponds to the Transaction Code (T column on
the grid) for the Deductions form for the Employee Maintenance window.
For a detailed explanation of transaction codes, see the discussion of the Payroll Pay Line (PR) screen in the
QSS/OASIS Payroll Manual, or the discussion of the Pay
Deduction (PD) screen in the QSS/OASIS Enhanced Payroll Manual.
Limit
This is the maximum gross pay per period that is subject to the
employer deduction.
Fill in this amount if both of the following statements are
true:
♦ You selected Percent in the Type list.
♦ The FTE Allocation boxes are blank.
Type the maximum gross pay per period subject to the
employer deduction. If the employee’s gross exceeds this
amount, the employer portion of the deduction is a percentage of the Limit amount. However, there is no limit on the
employee portion of the deduction. For an example, see
page 3-68.
Balance or
If you selected Declining Balance in the Type list, then fill in
this Balance amount box.
When setting up the deduction, type the maximum
employee deduction amount in the Balance box. The
employee contribution is subtracted from the balance at
each payroll. The Payroll System deletes the deduction
when the Balance drops to zero.
Subject
Make a selection from the list.
♦ Blank to use the Global Default Subjectivity for Section 125 from the Voluntary Deduction master file.
10/2010
3-105
The HR Code Maintenance window does not display the
default subjectivity for Voluntary Deductions set up as
Section 125 deductions.
♦ Make a selection from the list to specify whether a
deduction reduces income subject to:
 Section 125 Federal, State, OASDI and Medicare
 Section 125 Federal, State
 Section 125 Federal, OASDI, and Medicare
The selection that you make in the HR Code Maintenance window overrides the default from the Voluntary
Deduction master file.
Ignore E
R
These check boxes allow you to determine whether to load
employee- and employer-paid amounts with the Request
Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window described on page 5-123.
♦ Clear both check boxes to have the update process load
both employee- and employer-paid amounts.
♦ Select the E check box to block the loading of employeepaid amounts.
♦ Select the R check box to block the loading of employerpaid amounts.
Boxes for Billing through Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) Only
Figure 3-66 illustrates the boxes for using Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) to
invoice for benefits provided by the district. For example, some districts provide benefits to retirees at group rates, then bill retirees for those benefits.
Figure 3-66: Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file boxes
for billing through Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM)
3-106
Invoice Cycle
Select the frequency of billing through IBM from the list.
Amount
The system calculates the amount to invoice based on the
Employee Amount, Billing Basis, and Billing Cycle.
10/2010
Override
Leave blank, or type a dollar amount.
♦ Leave blank to use the calculated billing amount.
♦ Type an Override amount to use a different billing
amount.
Your site can set a limit on how much the Override can
vary from the calculated Amount, such as allowing the
Override to be no more than 10% less or more that the
calculated Amount.
FTE Allocation Tables
The Add New/Edit area allows you to add, change, and delete rows from the grid of
FTE ranges. When adding a table, start from the bottom and work up. For example,
you are defining four levels: 0.0000 to 0.2499, 0.2500 to 0.4999, 0.5000 to 0.7499,
and 0.7500 to 1.0000 FTE. Make the 0.0000 range the first row, the 0.2500 range the
second row, and so on. The rows in the grid must cover the entire span from 0.0000
through 1.0000 FTE.
Figure 3-67: Add New/Edit area for adding or changing rows
To insert a row:
1 In the FTE table, click the row under which you want to insert a row.
2 Select the Insert option button.
3 Type the FTE Low amount from 0 through 1.000 FTE. The number must be more
than the FTE Low for the previous row and less than the FTE Low for the next
row.
10/2010
3-107
6 Click the [Accept] button to insert a row. The system adjusts the FTE High for the
previous or next row to prevent the range from having any gaps between .0000 and
1.0000 FTE.
To delete a row:
1 Click the row to delete.
2 Select the Delete option button.
3 Click the [Accept] button. The system adjusts the FTE High column to fill in gaps
between 0.0000 and 1.0000 FTE created by the deletion.
To replace a row:
1 In the FTE table, click the row to replace.
2 Select the Replace option button.
4 Change the FTE Low if needed.
3-108
10/2010
6 Click the [Accept] button to replace the row. The system adjusts the FTE High for
the previous or next row to prevent the range from having any gaps between .0000
and 1.0000 FTE.
10/2010
3-109
The Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file defines deductions that may use frequency codes or deduction schedules that are different from the primary one set up for
each employee. This master file comes into play only if the Benefits Management
Module is integrated with the QSS/OASIS Payroll System.
When to Use the Deduction Class List (BMCL) Master File
This optional master file is only for sites that use the Request Update Deductions from
Benefits Management (BM0900) window to do a mass update of voluntary deductions on the Deductions (PD) form.
If you find that a certain voluntary deduction consistently needs to be taken at unusual
times: quarterly, for example, then you can add that voluntary deduction to the first
deduction class in the Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file. Then on the Payroll
Information tab or the Benefits Management form, you can apply the different schedules to the employees who need them, as discussed in the next section.
There are only four deduction class lists possible. In the Deduction Class List
(BMCL) master file, they are identified as 01, 02, 03, and 04. Each deduction class
list has a corresponding pair of box boxes on the Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management form. These boxes are labeled Class 1 through Class 4..
NOTE: A voluntary deduction for any plan may be entered in only one of the four classes,
so consider carefully if or where you want to enter it into the Deduction Class List (BMCL)
master file.
Connection to the Benefits Management (BM) Tab
Figure 3-68 illustrates the frequency codes (or deduction schedules, depending on
which one your district is using) as found on the Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management form. The deduction schedule specifies on which payrolls, or frequencies, deductions are taken, according to the voluntary deduction frequencies
either in the Vol-Ded Frequency Codes (VF) master file, or the Deduction Schedule
(DS) master file.
The Default code allow you to specify the defaults for loading voluntary deductions
into the Payroll System. You can specify both the EE (employee) and ER (employer)
frequencies. They can be either the same or different, such an employee frequency of
10 and an employer frequency of 12 for teachers who are paid over 10 months.
WARNING: These default frequency code boxes MUST be completed if Benefits Management automatically posts deductions to payroll via the Request Update Deductions from
Benefits Management (BM0900) window on page 5-123. If these boxes are left blank, the
employee will be listed as an exception during the benefits management to vol-ded load
process.
3-110
10/2010
Connection to the Benefits Management (BM) Tab
Figure 3-68: Default Frequency Codes on the
Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management form
Normally, the default frequency codes are the only ones filled in here. Classes 1-4, to
the right of the default pair of frequency codes, are usually left blank. If you fill in one
of any pair of Frequency Code boxes and leave the other box blank, the blank box
uses the same code as the filled-in box. To avoid confusion, fill in both the EE
(employee) and ER (employer) boxes, even if both use the same code.f
However, if you find that for a certain employee, a certain deduction must be taken at
different times, you can set up that deduction on the first deduction class list in the
Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file. Then, on that employee’s Payroll Information tab, type in the corresponding frequency codes for both employee and employer
for Class 1.
When an Unusual Voluntary Deduction Frequency Applies to an Employee
All of the following conditions must be met for an unusual frequency to apply to an
employee:
♦ A particular voluntary deduction is listed in one of the four deduction classes, and
♦ The employee is enrolled in that plan, and
♦ Frequency codes (or deduction schedule codes) are entered on the Payroll Information tab in the Frequency Code box that has the same number as the deduction
class list on which the plan is entered .
For example, if a certain plan is entered in Deduction Class List 1 and a frequency
code or deduction schedule code is entered in the Class 1 box on the Payroll Information tab for a certain employee, then that voluntary deduction schedule will apply to
that employee.
When a Deduction Class List May Contain Multiple Plans
If more than one plan fits the same unusual frequency of deduction, but they will not
be used by the same employee for different frequency codes, you can put them
together into the first deduction class list.
10/2010
3-111
Example of Using a Deduction Class for an Irregular Deduction
Frequency
Assume that a district wants to deduct some health care voluntary deduction costs
from the summer deferred checks for its ten and eleven month employees. These
health care vol-deds are the only deductions that will be made from these summer
deferred checks.
This set-up involves the following parts of QSS/OASIS:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Vol-Ded Frequency Codes
Payroll Information Tab
Deductions (PD) Form
Vol-Ded Frequency Codes
To set this up, you would start by creating a Vol-Ded Frequency Code (or Deduction
Schedule Code) for this unique withholding pattern. This Vol-Ded Frequency Code
for an eleven-month employee would look like the following:
Figure 3-69: Vol-ded Frequency Codes for 11-month employee
Vol-Ded Frequency code ‘13’ withholds amounts every month starting with month 2
(August) through month 13 (first summer deferred check). To do this, there are Y’s in
months 2 through 13 and N’s in all other months.
3-112
10/2010
Example of Using a Deduction Class for an Irregular Deduc-
The second step in this process would be to assign the specific health care voluntary
deductions to a Deduction Class List. Keep in mind that any Vol-Ded can be assigned
to only ONE Deduction Class List, and that there can be no more than ONE Vol-Ded
Frequency (or Deduction Schedule) attached to any one Deduction Class List.
Figure 3-70: Deduction Class List for Class 01
Deduction Class List ‘01’ contains five health care voluntary deductions. An
employee may be enrolled in one or more of these health care vol-deds. Withholding
for all of these particular health care vol deds must occur on the same Vol-Ded Frequency (or Deduction Schedule).
The third step is to link the individual employees to both Deduction Class List ‘01’
and to Vol-Ded Frequency ‘13’. The Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management form makes this link.
10/2010
3-113
Figure 3-71: Payroll Information tab showing frequency codes
Notice that the Frequency code listed on this Payroll Information tab on the far left is
11 - 12. These boxes represent the default Vol-Ded Frequency codes for this 11month employee. The first box is the employee default and the second box is the
employer default. The Vol-Ded Frequency code entered into Frequency code (1) will
override these defaults for Deduction Class List 01.
NOTE: The default Frequency code on the Payroll Information tab must be completed in
order for the employee to not be reported as an exception during the process of loading
vol-deds from benefits management.
Deductions (PD) Form
The Deductions (PD) form shows the employee’s enrollment in both the MSIA Dental Fund and the MSIA Vision Fund, which are two of the health care vol-deds
included on Deduction Class List 01.
Figure 3-72: Deductions (PD) form showing employee enrolled in deductions
3-114
10/2010
Although the Vol-Ded Frequency code on this Deductions (PD) form is 11, or the
default value for this employee, deductions for MSIA Dental Fund and MSIA Vision
Fund will actually be taken in accordance with Vol-Ded Frequency code 13, the Frequency code for Deduction Class List 01, because:
• This employee is enrolled in these deductions, and
• These deductions appear in Deduction Class List 01, and
• There is a frequency code listed in the Frequency code (1) box for this
employee.
Deductions for the other health care vol-deds in Deduction Class List 01, will NOT be
taken for this employee because the employee is not enrolled in them.
Payments for Kaiser Foundation Health will NOT be taken in accordance with
Deduction Class List 01 because Kaiser Foundation Health does not appear in Deduction Class List 01, thereby failing one of the requirements. Kaiser Foundation Health
costs will be posted to the books in accordance with Vol-ded Frequency 12, which is
both the frequency listed on the Deductions (PD) form and the default employer frequency on the employee’s Benefits Management form.
Class
select a class.
10/2010
3-115
Boxes for adding new
vol deds to a
Deduction Class
A grid that displays up
to 20 vol-deds that
belong to a Deduction
Class
Figure 3-73: Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file
The available classes are 01 through 04. They correspond to
classes 1 through 4 on the Payroll Information tab of the
Benefits Management form.
Vol Ded
To add a deduction to the grid, select a deduction from the VolDed list, then click the [Add] button.
Vol-Ded
Description
The grid displays up to 20 deductions that belong to a class.
To remove a deduction, click a row in the grid, the click the
[Delete Row] button.
3-116
10/2010
Chapter 4:
Benefits Management
Form
Description of the Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Menu Bar and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Name Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Employee Information Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Benefit Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Tab Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Opening the Employee Maintenance Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Logging On to QCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Opening the Employee Maintenance Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Searching for an Employee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Assigning Employees to Benefit Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Assigning Individual Employees on the Benefits Management Form . . . . . .4-35
Linking to a Salary Schedule on the Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . .4-37
Changing an Employee’s Benefit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Causes for Changes to Premium Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Causes for Changes to the Allocation of Premium Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Methods of Effecting Changes in Premium Amounts or Allocations . . . . . . .4-38
Creating an Audit Trail of Changes to Premium Amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Using an Exit Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Quick Change Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Making Changes Directly on the Benefits Management Form . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Updating the BM Form for Changed FTE in Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
Viewing and Maintaining Inactive Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53
10/2010
4-1
Table 4-1: Quick start guide for the Benefits Management processes and reports
TOPIC
TELLS HOW TO
PAGE
Description of the Benefits
Management Form
Understand the parts of the Benefits Management form and how to
use them for assigning benefits to employees.
4-3
Opening the Employee Maintenance
Window
Open the Employee Maintenance window from QCC and select an
employee.
4-31
Assigning Employees to Benefit
Packages
Use the Benefits Management form to make the initial assignment of 4-35
a Benefit Package to an employee.
Changing an Employee’s Benefit
Information
Update the Benefits Management form for changes to Benefit Pack- 4-38
ages, Benefit Plans, and other benefit information.
4-2
10/2010
Description of the Benefits Management Form
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Name bar
Status bar
Employee Informational area
Benefit Information area
Tab bar
Status bar
Figure 4-1: Benefits Management form of the Employee Maintenance window
♦ The title bar displays the name of the form and the current district for your QCC
session. For details, see page 4-4.
♦ The menu bar and toolbar contain the commands for maintaining Benefits Management records for employees. For details, see page 4-5.
♦ The name bar displays the name of the employee and audit information for the
most recent update. For details, see page 4-7.
♦ The status bar displays the SSN and name for the current employee and the mode
indicator. For details, see page 4-7.
♦ The Employee Information area displays demographic information about the
employee and position assignment information. For details, see page 4-8.
♦ The Benefit Information area allows you to assign an employee to a Benefit Package and change the employee’s benefit information. For details, see page 4-9.
10/2010
4-3
♦ The tab bar allows you to maintain information about an employee’s benefits. For
details, see page 4-17.
 The Plan Information tab displays the plans that are part of an employee’s benefit packages.
 The Dependents tab allows you to add, change, and delete names from the list
of an employee’s dependents.
 The Customer Information tab allows you to link an employee to Invoicing/Billing Management for billing employees for benefit costs.
 The Quick Change tab allows you to change and employee’s Benefit Plan or
Plan Level.
 The Comments tab allows you to add up to 90 lines of benefits comments for
each employee.
 The Payroll Information tab allows you to enter the default frequency codes so
that you can use the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window to update the Deductions (PD) form of the Employee Maintenance window.
♦ The status bar displays the year, district, and site for your QCC session and the
current date and time. For details, see page 4-29.
Title Bar
Figure 4-2: Title bar for the Benefits Management form
The title bar displays the following information:
♦ Name of the form
♦ District for your QCC session
♦ The standard Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons for windows.
4-4
10/2010
Menu Bar and Toolbar
The menu bar and toolbar include the commands for maintaining benefits and switching to other windows. For more information:
♦ Figure 4-3 through Figure 4-7 illustrate the commands.
♦ Table 4-2 explains how to use those commands.
Figure 4-3: Menu bar and toolbar for the Benefits Management form
Figure 4-4: File menu for the Benefits Management form
Figure 4-5: Options menu for the Benefits Management form
Figure 4-6: Window menu for the Benefits Management form
Figure 4-7: Toolbar for the Benefits Management form
10/2010
4-5
Table 4-2: Summary of commands for the Benefits Management form
COMMAND
MENU
Close
File
Close
Window
First Employee
KEYBOARD
PURPOSE
F12
Close the form without saving changes you have made. If
there are unsaved changes, a dialog box offers you the
choice of saving before closing or returning to the form.
none
Select All Open Screens for this employee to close all
forms for the current employee.
Select All Open Screens for other employees to close
the forms for all employees except the current employee.
Options
Shift+F5
In the current form, display data for the first employee in
the Search Results grid on the Employee Maintenance
window.
Last Employee
Options
Shift+F6
In the current form, display data for the last employee in the
Search Results grid on the Employee Maintenance
window.
Minimize
Window
none
Select All Open Screens for this employee to minimize
all forms for the current employee. You can click their icons
on the Windows taskbar.
Select All Open Screens for other employees to
minimize the forms for all employees except for the current
one.
Next Employee
Options
F6
In the current form, display data for the next employee in
the Search Results grid on the Employee Maintenance
window.
Previous Employee
Options
F5
In the current form, display data for the previous employee
in the Search Results grid on the Employee Maintenance
window.
Print
Options
F11
Print an image of the form on the default Windows printer
for your PC.
Rearrange all
employee screens
Window
none
Stack all forms on top of each other on the upper left corner
of the screen.
Save
Options
F9
Save the changes that you have made to the form and
leave the form open.
Save and Close
Options
Ctrl+F9
Save the changes to the form, then close it.
Show
Window
none
Select All Open Screens for this employee to open all
other forms for the current employee that have been
opened from the Employee Maintenance window.
Select All Open Screens for other employees to open
the forms for all other employees.
Switch to
Window
none
The window lists all employees for whom you have opened
this form from the Employee Maintenance window. You can
select any of these employees.
4-6
ICON
none
none
none
none
10/2010
Name Bar
Name Bar
Figure 4-8: Name bar for the Benefits Management form
The name bar includes the following information:
♦ Name and SSN for the current employee.
♦ The mode indicator.
 In Change mode, you can use the Benefits Management form to assign employees to Benefit Plans, change Benefit Packages, and make other changes
benefits.
 In Inspect mode, you can only look up existing benefits information.
♦ The background color for the mode indicator. The standard colors are red for a past
year, green for the current year, and blue for a future year. Your site can use different colors.
Status Bar
Message area
Audit information
Figure 4-9: Status bar for the Benefits Management form
The status bar includes the following.
♦ The message area displays a variety of messages, such as confirming that a save is
successful or problems that keep the record from being saved.
♦ Audit information for the form. If your site has implemented detailed audit information, click the arrow to see those details.
The standard audit information includes the following:
 An audit up to 4 characters long linked to each QCC logon ID.
 The date of the most recent change.
 The time of the most recent change.
10/2010
4-7
Employee Information Area
Figure 4-10: Employee Information area of the Benefits Management form
Demographic Information
The Employee Information area displays information from the employee’s Demographic (MA) form. If any of this information is incorrect, change it on that form. You
cannot change it on the Benefits Management form.
Figure 4-11: Demographic information from the Demographic (MA) form
Most of the labels are self-explanatory. A few require comment.
Cust ID
For Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) only.
If your site is billing the employee for benefits via IBM, the
customer ID belongs here. The link is established on the
Customer Information tab.
Age
The employee’s current age based on the date of birth from the
Demographic (MA) form.
S
The employee’s age at the start of the current plan year.
Position Information
The position information comes from the employee’s Assignments/ENH (EA) form
or Assignments/STD (PO) form.
Figure 4-12: Position information
For employee with multiple position assignments, you can use the VCR buttons to
view all of their positions.
4-8
10/2010
Benefit Information Area
The boxes that you can fill are different for adding a Package code and displaying
benefit information for an existing Package code. You can change the information in
boxes with a white background. You cannot change information in boxes with a
shaded background.
Figure 4-13: Benefit Information area of the Benefits Management form
Package
A 2-digit Package code from the list.
♦ For adding, select a Package Code from the list and fill in
the other required information. For instructions, see page
4-35.
♦ Once an employee is assigned to a Package Code, you
cannot change it here. For a description of changing benefit information see, see page 4-38.
The list displays the Package Codes (BMPK) master file.
Each package contains up to 10 Benefit Plan codes. For
details, see “Package Codes (BMPK) Master File” on page
3-23.
Level
A 4-character Coverage Level from the list.
♦ If a Package code has a default Coverage Level, it displays when you select the Package Code. You can select
a different Coverage Level if needed.
♦ If there is not default Coverage Level, select the appropriate one for each employee.
Each Coverage Level code defines a level for benefit costs,
such as employee plus spouse or age ranges for benefits
with premium that vary by age of the beneficiary. For
details, see “Type an abbreviation of up to 8 characters in
length. Choose an easily recognizable abbreviation, since
some screens and reports will display this abbreviation
rather than the name.” on page 3-10.
10/2010
4-9
Ben Status
A 2-character Benefit Status code from the list.
Each Benefit Status code defines the type of employee
receiving benefits. For details, see page 3-8.
Elig (R)
The employee’s eligibility date for benefits.
♦ If your site uses automatic calculation of this date, the
system fills it in based on a specified number of months
or days after the employee’s hire date.
♦ If not, type or select the date when the employee
becomes eligible for benefits.
End (D) or (O)
The date on which the employee is no longer eligible for
benefits.
Leave this date blank until after an employee is terminated.
♦ At some sites, the system fills in the End date based on
the termination date. The set-up options at your site
determine whether you can override this date.
♦ At other sites, type or select the End date for terminated
employees.
Each district sets its own policies on whether and how long
terminated employees can receive benefits, such as no coverage after 30 days after termination.
Elect (R)
The election date for the start of coverage.
This date can come from many of several sources:
♦ Typing or selecting the date in this form.
♦ Quick Change tab that allows you to change coverage
level or premium amounts. The new election date is the
date of the change on that tab. For details, see page 4-49.
♦ Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window that does a mass update of the exit date for the old
plan year and of the election date for the new plan year.
For details, see page 5-114.
4-10
10/2010
If you get the error message: Election date conflicts with inactive records, you may need to
know the most recent exit date for this employee.
On the Plan Information tab, click the [Inactive] button to
see the exit date of the most recently inactive record. Make
the new election date the day after that exit date.
Exit (O)
The end date for coverage.
Leave this date blank until coverage under the current package or plan year ends. Once you type or select an Exit date
and update the record, it becomes inactive and
unchangeable.
This date can come from several places:
♦ Typing an Exit date when an employee changes Benefit
Packages. For details, see page 4-42.
♦ Quick Change tab that allows you to change coverage
level or premium amounts. The new election date is the
date of the change on that tab. For details, see page 4-49.
♦ Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window that does a mass update of the exit date for the old
plan year and of the election date for the new plan year.
Sect 125 (R)
Select or clear the check box to indicate whether the Benefit
Package is subject to Section 125.
When you are assigning a package, the form displays the
default from the Package Codes (BMPK) master file.
Change it if needed.
This flag has no effect on benefit calculations. However,
many of the reports and utilities in Chapter 5 allow you to
use this flag for selecting plans to update and report.
Pri (R)
Package is the employee’s primary coverage.
10/2010
4-11
Many of the reports and utilities in Chapter 5 allow you to
select records to update or report based on this flag.
Cobra (R)
Package is subject to Cobra.
Many of the reports and utilities in Chapter 5 allow you to
select records to update or report based on this flag.
FTE rule (R)
Select a rule for how to calculate the FTE for an employee.
♦ PP - Prime Position to use the FTE from the
employee’s prime position for benefit FTE.
♦ AP - All Positions to use the total FTE from all of the
♦ HP - Hours of Prime to calculate the benefit FTE from
the employee’s prime position hours. This will divide the
prime position hours by the hours per day in the work
♦ HA - Hours of All to calculate the benefit FTE from the
hours of all the employee’s positions. This will divide the
sum of hours for all positions by the hours per day in the
work calendar of the prime position.
♦ BN - Benefit for benefit FTE override, to be defined by
user. Use this code if this employee’s position is defined
on the Employee Contract (EC) Screen instead of the
Position Assignment (PO) Screen.
When assigning an employe, the following message may
display: Invalid. There are no positions on
file for the current year. This message means
that the employee has no position assignment on the
Assignments/ENH (EA) or Assignments/STD (PO) form.
[FTE lock rule] (R)
Select an option from the list for the FTE box.
♦ F - Frozen to prevent the FTE on the Benefits Management form from being recalculated.
4-12
10/2010
♦ L - Locked to allow the FTE to be recalculated.
This flag applies to the following situations:
♦ Recalculating an employee’s benefits with the [Recalculate] button on the Plan Information tab of the Benefits
Management form.
♦ Mass recalculation of benefits with the Request Benefits
Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window.
FTE (R)
One of the following cases applies.
♦ If the employee has a position assignment in Position
Control, the system imports the FTE from the position
assignment. You cannot change this box if the FTE Rule
is PP, AP, HP, or HA.
To override the FTE from Position Control, select an
FTE Rule of BN and type the FTE for benefit
calculation.
♦ If the employe has no position assignment, select an
FTE Rule of BN and type the employee’s FTE of 1.0000
(full-time) to 0.0000. The maximum FTE for benefit calculation is 1.0000.
Alloc (O )
♦ Leave this blank if you are using a Plan/Level-type FTE
allocation table for this employee. See page 3-60 for
details.
♦ If you are using an Employee-Type FTE allocation table
for this employee, type in the allocation code of the FTE
table you want to apply to this employee. The effect of
the Employee-Type FTE allocation is to prorate the
employee and employer amounts by percentage ranges.
Empe % (D)
Employee percentage.
♦ If you are using the Plan/Level-type FTE allocation table
for this employee and the Alloc box is blank, this box
will default to 100%. This refers to 100% of the
employee portion of the premium amount.
10/2010
4-13
for this employee and have filled in the Alloc box, this
box will fill in with the employee percentage that is
shown in the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file
for this allocation code and this employee’s FTE.
Empr %
Employer percentage.
♦ If you are using the Plan/Level-type FTE allocation table
for this employee and the Alloc box is blank, this box
will default to 100%. This refers to 100% of the
employer portion of the premium amount.
for this employee and have filled in the Alloc box, this
box will fill in with the employer percentage that is
shown in the FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file
for this allocation code and this employee’s FTE.
M
This is a two-character user-defined box. The definition and
use of this box is controlled by the BMFLDM user security
matrix.
M, and an eight-character abbreviated label can be defined
in the BMFLDM user security matrix.
This box may be used as either two separate one-character
boxes, or as a single two-character box. It can be defined as
being either Required or Optional. Up to 20 two-character
definitions or 40 one-character definitions can be established for use in this box.
For instructions on setting up BMFFLDM, see Chapter 4 in
D
This is a one-character user-defined box. The definition and
use of this box is controlled by the BMFLDD user security
matrix.
D, and an eight-character abbreviated label can be defined
in the BMFLDD user security matrix.
4-14
10/2010
This box can be defined as being either Required or
Optional. Up to 20 one-character definitions can be established for use in this box.
For instructions on setting up BMFFLDD, see Chapter 4 in
Sal rule (R)
Select a rule from the list to determine how to calculate the
employee’s salary for life insurance coverage.
♦ AP - All Positions to use the total FTE from all of the
♦ PP - Prime Position to use the FTE from the
employee’s prime position for benefit FTE.
♦ BN - Benefit for benefit FTE override, to be defined by
user. Use this code if this employee’s position is defined
on the Employee Contract (EC) Screen instead of the
Position Assignment (PO) Screen.
[Salary lock rule]
(R)
Select an option from the list for the FTE box.
♦ F - Frozen to prevent the FTE on the Benefits Management form from being recalculated.
♦ L - Locked to allow the FTE to be recalculated.
♦ D - Dynamic to amount recalculates every time you
open the Benefits Management form based on the
employee’s position assignment. Do not use this option
if you want an audit trail of changes.
This flag applies to the following situations:
♦ Recalculating an employee’s benefits with the [Recalculate] button on the Plan Information tab of the Benefits
Management form.
♦ Mass recalculation of benefits with the Request Benefits
Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window.
10/2010
4-15
Sal (D) or (R)
One of the following:
♦ For a Sal rule of AP or PP, the box displays the
employee’s salary rounded up to the next $1,000.
♦ For a Sal rule of BN, type the salary for life insurance.
Wrk Sp (O)
For working spouse only.
If the employee’s spouse works for the school district and is
going to be regarded as a dependent of the employee’s benefit coverage, type the district number and the spouse’s 6digit ExtRef or 9-digit social security number. This action
flags the employee as the Primary plan member and the
working spouse as a dependent.
Only one of the spouses may be the Primary person in the
plan. If a spouse’s social security number is entered, check
to ensure that employee and spouse are not both set as Primary.
If you have entered both spouses as primary by attaching
both of them to a package code and then type the social
security number of one of them in this box, you will see a
message similar to this:
WARNING: Both employee & spouse (Pkg: XX
Elect: MM/DD/YYYY) are primary.
If you have typed a working spouse’s social security number here and then enter the spouse’s social security number
on the Dependents Window, you will get the following
message:
WARNING: This SSN is the same as the
working spouse SSN.
NP (D)
The number of plans not posted on the Plan Information tab.
The Posted column on the Plan Information tab allows you
to type or select a date on which each Benefit Plan is posted
(or reconciled). The count in the NP box is the number of
plans that have not been posted.
The date for each posted date is on the Plan Information tab.
4-16
10/2010
Tab Bar
Tab Bar
Figure 4-14: Tab bar for the Benefits Management form
To view a tab, click its label. The orange line on the top of the tab indicates the active
tab.
♦ The Plan Information tab displays the Benefit Plans to which the employee is
assigned.
♦ The Dependents tab allows you to maintain a list of dependents for the employee.
♦ The Customer Information tab allows you to set up an employee for billing for
benefits through the Invoicing/Billing Management window.
♦ The Quick Change tab allows you to change the Package Code or Level code for
an employee’s benefits package.
♦ The Comments tab allows you to create up to 90 lines of benefits comments for the
employee.
♦ The Payroll Information tab allows you to set up the Vol-Ded Frequency codes or
Deduction Schedules updating the Deductions (PD) form from Benefits
Management.
10/2010
4-17
Plan Information Tab
Figure 4-15: Plan Information tab for the Benefits Management form
Commands for Plan Information
Add a new Plan Code to the bottom of the grid.
This command is available only for Package Codes that are
partly or fully user-defined. For Package Codes with only
pre-defined Plan Codes, you cannot add additional Plan
Codes.
Remove a user-defined Plan Code from the grid.
This command is available only when you select a userdefined Package Code in the grid. You cannot remove predefined Package Codes.
Recalculate the employer-paid and employee-deducted
amounts for each Package Code.
After you add user-defined Package Codes or change an
employee’s Coverage Level code, salary, or FTE, the form
requires recalculation before you can save the changes.
4-18
10/2010
Tab Bar
This command is a toggle.
♦ When the [Inactive] button displays, the Benefits Management form displays the active (current) Benefit Package for the employee. Select this button to display
inactive (former) Benefit Packages. For instructions, see
page 4-53.
♦ When the [Active] button displays, the Benefits Management form displays the inactive (former) Benefit Packages for the employee. Select this button to display the
active (current) Benefit Package.
These commands are available only for inactive Benefit
Packages. For instructions, see page 4-53.
Columns in the Grid
With the default width of the Benefits Management form, you cannot see all of the
columns in the grid at once. To view them all, do either of the following:
♦ Make the Benefits Management form larger by maximizing it or dragging the right
edge of the dialog box.
♦ Use the horizontal scroll bar on the bottom of the select the columns that you want
to see.
Plan
The Benefit Plan for the row in the grid.
Each Benefit Package includes up to 10 Benefit Plans that
fall into either of the following categories:
♦ Only pre-defined Benefit Packages, which means that an
employee is automatically assigned to all of those packages. You cannot add any additional Benefit Plans.
The [Add Plan] and [Remove Plan] buttons appear
dimmed because you cannot add Benefit Plans.
10/2010
4-19
♦ Only a user-defined Benefit Plan, which means that grid
is blank when you assign an employee to a Benefit Package. You must specify the Benefit Plans for each individual employee on the Plan Information tab.
The [Add Plan] and [Remove Plan] buttons are both
available because you can customize the Benefit Packages for each employee.
♦ Both kinds of Benefit Plans. The grid automatically
assigns all of the pre-defined Benefit Plans. However,
you can add additional plan for each employee.
The [Add Plan] button is available. The [Remove Plan]
button is available only when you select a user-defined
Benefit Plan.
Level
Override
The Level column displays the default Coverage Level code
for the Plan.
To select a different Level, select the Override check box
and select a code from the Coverage Level (BMLC) master
file described on page 3-10.
Employee
The system calculates the employee amount or percentage of
pay per billing period for the benefit.
The system uses the rules in the Plan/Level Amounts
(BMPL) master file described on page 3-49. If applicable,
the master file uses an FTE allocation table to determine the
percentage of the total cost that the employee pays.
EE Rule
Select a rule for the Employee amount from the list.
♦ F - Frozen for amounts initially calculated by the program, then frozen. The amount is not updated when you
select the Recalculate command or run the Benefit Management Recalculation Report (BM0855).
♦ L - Locked (recommended selection) to update the
amount when you select the Recalculate command or
run the Benefit Management Recalculation Report
(BM0855).
4-20
10/2010
Tab Bar
♦ D - Dynamic to use the current plan amounts. Any
changes affecting these amounts made anywhere
(whether made to employee FTE, the FTE rule, or in
Position Control) will change these amounts. Whenever
changes are made on the Assignments/ENH or Assignment/STD forms, they will be reflected here too. Every
time this record is accessed by the software, it will recalculate the amounts based on what is in the master files
for the current date.
Do not use this choice if either of the following is true:
 Your site uses Benefits Management to create deductions on the Deductions form.
 You want to maintain an audit trail of changes.
♦ O - Override to type an amount in the Employee box
that the system does not update. The override amount
remains as is until you change it.
Employer
The system calculates the employer amount or percentage of
pay per billing period for the benefit.
The system uses the rules in the Plan/Level Amounts
(BMPL) master file described on page 3-49. If applicable,
the master file uses an FTE allocation table to determine the
percentage of the total cost that the employer pays.
ER Rule
Use the same codes as for the EE Rule.
Total Ded
For a benefit with a fixed dollar cost, the total amount of the
employee- and employer-paid parts.
Total %
For a benefit with a percentage cost, the total of the employeeand employer-paid percentages.
Units
For life insurance, the number of units purchased.
For an example of how to use this box, see page 3-70.
10/2010
Increment
For life insurance, incremental amount by which the benefit
can be increased from the minimum to the maximum amount.
Rate
For life insurance that is based on an employee’s salary, the
maximum multiple of the salary that the benefit can be.
4-21
Posted
If your site is reconciling benefit packages, type or select the
date on which the employee’s participation in the Benefit Plan
is verified.
If you can change this date, one of the following things happen when you click this box:
♦ If there is no date (not posted), the box reads, "<select
date>." Click the arrow in the right of the box to select a
date. (You cannot type the date directly when adding a
date.)
♦ If there is a Posted date, you can type over the existing
date or click the arrow to pick a date.
Your security profile determines whether you can add or
change a Posted date. You may be able to do so for no packages, active packages only, inactive packages only, or both.
Many reports and processes use the posting date as a selection criterion.
Totals
Employee Totals
Total employee-paid benefits.
♦ The first box is the total dollar amount for benefits that
are a fixed cost pay period.
♦ The second box is the total percentage for deductions
that are a percentage of gross pay.
Employer Totals
Total dollar amount and percentage for employer-paid benefits.
Totals
Total dollar amount and percentage for benefit costs.
Dependents Tab
Figure 4-16: Dependents tab for the Benefits Management form
4-22
10/2010
Tab Bar
The instructions for the Dependents tab focus on the following:
♦ Adding and Deleting Dependents
♦ Columns in the Grid
♦ Total, Active, and Inactive Dependents
Adding and Deleting Dependents
To add a dependent:
1 Click the
(Add Dependent) icon to open a new row in the bottom of the grid.
2 Fill in the new row with information about a dependent. For a description of the
columns, see page 4-24.
3 After you are finished adding and deleting dependents, do either of the following:
 Click the
(Save [F9]) icon to save the changes and leave the Benefits Management form open.
 Click the
(Save and Close [Ctrl+F9]) icon to save your changes and close
the Benefits Management form.
 Click the
(Close [F12]) icon to close the Benefits Management form without saving your changes.
To delete a dependent:
1 Click the row with the dependent to delete.
2 Click the
(Remove Dependent) icon.
3 After you are finished adding and deleting dependents, do either of the following:
 Click the
 Click the
 Click the
10/2010
4-23
Columns in the Grid
Figure 4-17: Columns in the grid for the Dependents tab
Name
or
Last Name
First Name
Middle Initial
Type the name of the dependent.
SSN
Type the SSN for the dependent.
Your site may have just a Name box for typing the first and
last names, or it may have separate boxes for the last name,
first name, and middle initial.
If you have typed a working spouse’s social security number in the Benefit Information Window, and then enter the
spouse and spouse’s social security number as a dependent
in the Dependent Window, you will get the error message:
WARNING: This SSN is the same as the
working spouse SSN. Remove the working spouse
from the Dependents Window to clear this error.
Gender
Make a selection from the list.
Date of Birth
Select the dependent’s date of birth.
If you supply this optional information, you can use the
Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window on page
5-70 to determine when dependents are no longer eligible
for coverage.
Start
Select the date on which the employee’s coverage began for
this dependent.
End
Select the date on which the employee’s coverage ends for this
dependent.
Flags
Cobra
Other
Type up to 6 flags for dependent coverage. This sample illustrates the default flags.
♦ For the Cobra flag, type a Y for COBRA coverage or an
N for non-COBRA coverage.
♦ For the Other flag, type a Y if the dependent has other
coverage or N if the dependent does not.
4-24
10/2010
Tab Bar
Many reports and mass updates allow you to select employees based on these flags.
If the column tables differ from those in Figure 4-17, see
your site’s procedures on how to use those customized
columns.
Total, Active, and Inactive Dependents
Figure 4-18: Totals for an employee’s dependents on the Benefits tab
The bottom of the Dependents tab lists the count of dependents for the employee.
♦ Total dependents is all of the employee’s dependents.
♦ Active is the count of dependents with a Start date in the past and an End date in
the future.
♦ Inactive is the count of dependents who have a flag of F (Start date in the future)
or D (End date in the past) to the right of their End dates.
Customer Information Tab
Use the Customer Information Tab to link an employee to the optional Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) module. It allows you to bill employees for insurance coverage purchased through the district, such as retiree benefits or COBRA. Before using
this tab, you must set up vendors in IBM. For details, see the QSS/OASIS Invoicing/Billing Management Manual.
Figure 4-19: Customer Information tab for the Benefits Management form
To link an employee to Invoicing/Billing Management:
1 Type the customer ID in the A/R Customer ID box.
2 Select the Create Customer icon to fill in the rest of the tab with information from
the Customer master file in IBM.
10/2010
4-25
You cannot change any customer information from here. If you need to correct the
address or other information, do so from IBM.
3 Click the
(Save [F9]) icon to create the link.
To stop billing through IBM:
1 If needed, select the Customer Information tab to make it the active tab.
2 Select the Remove Customer Link command.
3 In the Remove Link dialog box, select [Yes] to stop billing the employee or [No] to
continue billing the employee..
Quick Change Tab
Use the Quick Change tab to change an employee’s Package Code or Coverage Level.
This tab speeds up such changes when the changed Benefit Plans have the same type
of Coverage Level codes as the old one, such as costs based on number of people covered or pricing based on ages. For details, see page 4-49.
Figure 4-20: Quick Change tab for the Benefits Management form
Comments Tab
Figure 4-21: Comments tab for the Benefits Management form
Adding, Changing, and Deleting Comments
To add a comment:
1 Click the
4-26
(Add Comment) icon to open a BM comment dialog box.
10/2010
Tab Bar
2 Fill in the BM comment dialog box, as described on page 4-27. After you save the
new comment, the grid sorts the comments by date.
To change a comment:
1 Click the comment that you want to change.
2 Click the
(Change Comment) icon to open a BM comment dialog box.
3 Fill in the BM comment dialog box, as described on page 4-27. After you save the
changes to the comment, the grid sorts the comments in order by date.
To delete a comment:
1 Click the comment that you want to delete.
2 Click the
(Change Comment) icon to open a BM comment dialog box.
3 In the BM comment dialog box, click the
(Delete [Ctrl+F8]) icon, then confirm
the deletion in the Edit Comment dialog box to remove the comment from the grid.
Dialog Box for Typing Comments
Each employee can
have up to 90 lines of
BM comments. The
line counter keeps
track of the remaining
lines.
The text box for typing
comments has
automatic word wrap
and uses the standard
Windows keys for
navigating and editing
text.
Figure 4-22: Benefit comment dialog box for adding, changing, or deleting comments
To add or change a comment:
1 In the Date box, type or select the date for the comment.
2 In the text box, add or change the text of the comment.
10/2010
4-27
3 To close the dialog box, do either of the following:
 Click the
(Save [F9]) icon to save the comment and close the dialog box.
 Click the
comment.
(Close [F12]) icon to close the dialog box without saving the
Table 4-3: Summary of commands for the BM comment dialog box
COMMAND
MENU
Save
ICON
KEYBOARD
PURPOSE
File
F9
Close the dialog box and save the added or changed
comments. The new or changed comment displays in the
grid.
Delete
File
Ctrl+F8
Close the dialog box and delete the comment it contains
from the grid of comments.
Print
File
F11
Print an image of the dialog box on the default Windows
printer for your PC.
Close
File
F12
Close the dialog box with saving the changes to the
comments.
Figure 4-23: Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management form
To fill in the tab:
1 Fill in the Default frequencies for each employee for whom you want to use the
Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window to
update the Deductions (PD) form.
2 Fill in Class 1 through Class 4 if needed for deductions in the Deduction Class
List (BMCL) master file. For details, see page 3-110.
3 Do any of the following
 Click the
4-28
10/2010
Status Bar
 Click the
 Click the
Boxes in the Tab
Figure 4-24: Boxes in the Payroll Information tab
Default
The the default for EE (employee-paid) and ER (employerpaid) deductions.
If you fill in a code for only the EE or ER box, the blank
box uses the same code as the filled-in box. QSS suggests
that you always fill in both boxes to avoid confusion.
Your site uses either Vol-Ded Frequency codes or Deduction
Schedules to determine the payrolls on which the deductions are taken. See your payroll department for the appropriate codes to use at your site. For details, see the
QSS/OASIS Enhanced Payroll Manual.
These Default codes must be filled in to use the Request
Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900)
window to update the employee’s Deductions (PD) form
from Benefits Management.
Class 1
through
Class 4
Leave blank in most cases.
If the employee has a Voluntary Deduction code in a deduction class for the Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file,
type the EE and ER codes to use.
Status Bar
District for session
Date and time
Figure 4-25: Status bar for the Benefits Management form
The status bar includes the following information:
10/2010
4-29
♦ The fiscal year, district, and site for the QCC session. The background color indicates the fiscal year. The standard colors are red for a previous year, green for the
current year, and blue for a future year.
♦ The right side of the status bar displays the date and time from your computer’s
clock.
4-30
10/2010
Opening the Employee Maintenance Window
Logging On to QCC
These instructions focus on the following areas:
♦ Logging On to QCC
♦ Opening the Employee Maintenance Window
♦ Searching for an Employee
Logging On to QCC
If you have not already done so, log on to QCC.
To log on to QCC:
1 Double-click the QSS ControlCenter icon on the Windows desktop.
Figure 4-26: QCC icon on the Windows desktop
2 Fill in the Login dialog box.
Figure 4-27: Login dialog box
 For the User Name, the dialog box displays the user name from the previous
time you used QCC. You can type a different User Name if you like.
 Type the Password.
> Select [Login] to log in to QCC.
> Select [Cancel] to close the dialog box and return to Windows.
For more information, see "Logging in to QCC" in the QSS ControlCenter Guide.
10/2010
4-31
The Employee Maintenance window allows you to select an employee and open the
Benefits Management form. From the QSS ControlCenter window, you can open the
Employee Maintenance window from the Go menu, tree view, or toolbar view.
To select Job Menu from the Go menu:
♦ Click Go, point to Human Resources, and click Employee Maintenance.
To select Job Menu from the Tree View:
1 On the View menu, check the Tree View command.
2 Click the Go folder to expand the tree to the first level.
3 Click the Human Resources subfolder.
4 Click the Employee Maintenance command.
To select Job Menu from the Toolbar view:
1 On the View menu, click the Toolbar command.
2 Click the Human Resources tab.
3 Click the Benefits Managements Job Menu icon.
For more information, see "QSS ControlCenter Window" in the QSS ControlCenter
Guide. For instructions viewing this document, see page 1-4.
Searching for an Employee
The Employee Maintenance window allows you to select the employee for whom to
view the Benefits Management form.
To search for employees:
1 In the Search Panel, select how you want to search.
 Click By SSN, then type all or part of the SSN. For example, type 123456 to
match SSNs that begin with those 6 digits.
 Click By Ext Ref, then type all or part of the 6-digit ExtRef number, which is
an alternate employee ID that some sites use.
 Click By Name, then type a last name and optional first name.
> The last name is a Soundex search. For example a search for Jonsen matches
Jenkins, Jensen, Johnson, and Jonson.
4-32
10/2010
Searching for an Employee
The tree view lists the
forms that you can
open for an employee,
such as the Benefits
Management form.
The Search Panel
allows you to search
for employees by
SSN, ExtRef, or
Name.
After you press Fe,
the Search Results
grid displays the
employees who match
the search criteria.
Figure 4-28: Employee Maintenance window to illustrate searching for an employee
> The first name matches all that start with as much as you type. For example,
a search for jo matches all first names that begin with those two letters.
For example, type the following to search for all last names that sound like
Johnson and all first names that begin with "Ma":
johnson, ma
If you know only a first name, type an * for the last name and a first name. For
example, type the following to list all employees with a first name of Mary:
*, mary
2 If the District list is available, select the district for which to search employees.
3 Select the Include Terminated check box if you want the search to include terminated employees.
4 Click the
(Search [F3]) icon or press the ENTER key to display the matching
employees in the Search Results grid.
5 To select an employee, double-click a name in the Search Results grid.
10/2010
4-33
6 To open a form, click the form name in the tree view.
The Benefits Management form is under the Personnel branch in the tree view. If
the Personnel branch is close, click the + next to it to open the branch.
After the form opens, the row changes to a color, such as orange or green. The title
bar of all forms that you open for that employee display that color. You can have
forms open for more than one employee at a time. The exact number of employees
depends on the set-up options for your site.
HINT: The Window menu on the Employee Maintenance window allows you to see the
employees for whom you have opened forms, to switch to different employees, and to close
forms for selected employees.
To select an employee from a previous search:
1 Select an employee from the Selected Employee/List.
2 Click a form in the tree view to open that form.
4-34
10/2010
Assigning Employees to Benefit Packages
Assigning Individual Employees on the Benefits Manage-
These instructions tell how to assign employees to Benefit Packages for the first time:
They focus on the following:
♦ Assigning Individual Employees on the Benefits Management Form
♦ Linking to a Salary Schedule on the Benefits Management Form
For instructions on changing Benefit Packages or Benefit Plans, see page 4-38.
Assigning Individual Employees on the Benefits Management
Form
These instructions tell how to assign individual employees to a Benefits Package
on the Benefits Management form. These instructions are only for adding a Benefits Package to an employee for the first time.
Figure 4-29: Benefits Information area for adding an employee to a Package Code
To add a Benefit Package to an employee for the first time:
1 Open the Employee Maintenance window and select an employee. For instructions, see page 4-31.
2 From the Package list, select a Benefit Package code from the Package Codes
(BMPK) master file described on page 3-23.
3 From the Level list, select a Level Code from the Coverage Level (BMLC) master
file described on page 3-10.
If the Benefit Package has a default Coverage Level, the level is pre-selected. You
can change it if needed.
4 Fill in the boxes in the Benefits Information area that have a white background.
For a detailed description, see page 4-9.
5 The Plan Information tab displays the Plan Codes associated with the employee’s
benefit package. For a detailed description of the Plan Information tab, see page
4-18.
10/2010
4-35
Figure 4-30: Plan Information tab for assigning an employee to a Package Code
 For a package with only pre-defined plans, you cannot add or change anything
in the Plan column.
Figure 4-31: Add Plan and Remove Plan commands dimmed for pre-defined plans
The Add Plan and Remove Plan commands appear dimmed because employees assigned to a pre-defined Package Code must enroll in all benefits defined
for that code.
 For a package with only user-defined plans, you can add as many plans as you
like from the list in the Plan column.
> The Add Plan command allows you to add Benefit Plans for the employee.
> The Remove Plan command allows you to delete Benefit Plans added in
error.
For a user-defined Package Code, the grid in the Plan Information tab is empty
after assigning an employee. In the Plan column, select the Benefit Plans for
the employee.
 Some packages include a combination of pre-defined plans and user-defined
plans. The Plan Information tab lists the pre-defined Package Codes. You can
add additional Plan Codes at the bottom of the grid.
> The Add Plan command is available to allow you to add additional Plan
Codes to the bottom of the grid.
> The Remove Plan command is available only when you select a userdefined Package Code on the grid. You cannon remove a pre-defined Plan
Code from a benefit package.
For more information about Package Codes, see page 3-23.
4-36
10/2010
Linking to a Salary Schedule on the Benefits Management
6 Do either of the following:
 Click the
 Click the
 Click the
Linking to a Salary Schedule on the Benefits Management
Form
Setting Up Automatic Assignment
To make automatic assignment work, set up the following:
♦ The Package Assignment (BMPA) master file on page 3-36. This master file links
a Salary Schedule to Package Code.
♦ The PP02BM user security. Your system administrator must set up this user security to activate automatic assignment and select whether to use automatic or triggered assignment. For details, see Chapter 4 of Modules, Tasks, and User Security
for QCC.
Automatic Assignment from Salary Schedule
Automatic assignment takes place when you add an employee on the Benefits Management form. The system compares the position assignment in the Employee Information area against the records in the Package Assignment (BMPA) master file. If
the position is assigned a salary schedule in that master file, the system fills in the
Package Code in the Benefit Information area and the Plan Codes in the Plan Information tab.
Assignment Based on Trigger Character
As of 2010, automatic assignment is available only in the traditional version. In the
traditional software, you can type a trigger character, such as semicolon, in the Package code. The system will match the employee’s salary schedule against those in the
Package Assignment (BMPA) master file, then fill in the Plan Code and Package
Codes for that plan in the Benefits Management form.
10/2010
4-37
Changing an Employee’s Benefit Information
The discussion of changing benefit information focuses on the following:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Causes for Changes to Premium Amounts
Causes for Changes to the Allocation of Premium Amounts
Methods of Effecting Changes in Premium Amounts or Allocations
Creating an Audit Trail of Changes to Premium Amounts
Using an Exit Date
Quick Change Tab
Making Changes Directly on the Benefits Management Form
Updating the Benefits Management form for Changed FTE in Position Control
Viewing and Maintaining Inactive Records
Causes for Changes to Premium Amounts
All changes to the amount of premiums in a package result in a package change. A
package change can be due to:
♦ Change in premium amounts charged by the insurer, as at the end of a plan year.
♦ Adding or dropping of a plan by an employee, unless the package is user-defined.
See “User-Defined Packages” on page 3-53 for more information.
♦ Change in coverage level, as when an employee increases or decreases the number
of dependents, or moves into a different age bracket.
♦ Change in employee type (for example, from certificated to classified).
♦ Termination of an employee.
Causes for Changes to the Allocation of Premium Amounts
Whereas the total premium amounts may remain the same, the allocation, or division,
of those amounts between employee and employer may change. An allocation
change can be due to:
♦ Change in an employee’s FTE.
♦ Change in an FTE allocation table that affects all employees enrolled in a plan connected to that allocation table.
Methods of Effecting Changes in Premium Amounts or
Allocations
Besides user-defined packages, there are several other ways to change an employee’s
benefit information. For an explanation of user-defined packages, see “User-Defined
Packages” on page 3-53. The other ways are discussed in the following sections. The
surest way is to use an exit date.
4-38
10/2010
Methods of Effecting Changes in Premium Amounts or Allo-
Following are two decision tables, the Table of Causes of Change to BM Screen and
the Table of Methods of Change to BM Screen. Use them together to make changes in
the way your district needs.
 To use Table 4-4, start at the first column on the left in the row that fits your situation, and follow the appropriate conditions to the right until you find the
change that is needed.
 After you have found the change needed, use Table 4-5 on page 4-40 to see
which methods of effecting the necessary change are most applicable to your
situation.
Table 4-4: Causes for changes to the Benefits Management form
IF THE CAUSE OF CHANGE IS...
AND THE
PACKAGE IS...
YOU NEED TO
CHANGE:
Insurer changes premium amounts
Pre-Defined
Package
User-Defined
Package or plans
Pre-Defined
Package
User-Defined
Package or plans
Pre-Defined
Package
User-Defined
Package or plans
Employee changes coverage level
Any
Coverage level
Employee termination
Any
Package
Employee FTE changes
Any
Employee FTE
FTE allocation table changes
Any
Package or premium
amounts
Employee or employer amount
overrides
Any
Premium amounts
Correcting wrong package
Any
Package
Employee adds or drops plan
Employee type changes
10/2010
4-39
Table 4-5: Methods of change to the Benefits Management form
TO CHANGE
Package
Plans
Coverage
level
Employee
FTE
NEED FOR WHOM USE METHOD(S)
AUDIT
TRAIL?
yes
no
yes
Individual
employees
Exit date and new election date No restrictions
4-42
Quick Change tab
Can use only if all plans in new package
offer same coverage level codes
4-49
All User-Defined Plans
No restrictions
3-25
Partially User-Defined Plans
Can change plans that are user defined
but not core plans
3-27
4-42
Quick Change tab
Can use only if all plans in new package
offer same coverage level codes
4-49
Individual
employees
Directly on Benefits Management (BM) Screen
Can use for coverage level only
4-52
yes
Groups of
employees
Roll-Over Program (BM0800)
and Recalculation Program
(BM0850)
No restrictions
5-114
5-84
Individual
employees
and [Recalculate] button
4-42
4-53
Groups of
employees
Recalculation Program
(BM0850)
No restrictions
5-84
Individual
employees
[Recalculate] button
No restrictions
4-53
Groups of
employees
Roll-Over Program (BM0800)
and Recalculation Program
(BM0850)
No restrictions
5-114
5-84
Individual
employees
and [Recalculate] button
4-42
4-53
Individual
employees
<Re-Calc Amounts> function or No restrictions
Change amounts lock rule from
L to D or to O
4-53
4-52
yes
no
4-40
Individual
employees
SEE
PAGE
no
no
Premium
amounts
Individual
employees
RESTRICTIONS
10/2010
If you make a change to the current record on the Benefits Management (BM)
Screen, the change will be retroactive to the election date on this screen. The system
will not leave an audit trail of the change or the date of the change.
On the other hand, when you need to preserve a record of changes for the purpose of
producing an audit trail, programs and safeguards in the Benefits Management Module
help you to do this.
Two features of the Benefits Management Module, when used together, preserve a
history of records for each employee through successive premium periods, or plan
years. They are:
♦ Lock rules
♦ Roll-over process
Lock Rules
Lock Rule for FTE Value
The lock rule for the employee FTE value can be set to either F (Frozen) or L
(Locked). This prevents the allocation of premium amounts from changing if an
employee’s position or FTE is changed in the Position Control System.
If frozen, the FTE value for the purpose of calculating premium allocations will not
change for any reason.
If locked, the FTE value for the purpose of calculating premium allocations remains
the same until you run a recalculation by using either the <Re-Calc Amounts> function or the Recalculation Program (BM0850). The locked setting allows you to control when the result of the FTE changes will affect the premium allocations according
to the rules of your district.
However, to leave an audit trail, you must run the Roll-Over Program (BM0800)
before you run the Recalculation Program (BM0850). See page 5-31 for information
about the Roll-Over Program and page 5-39 for information about the Recalculation
Program.
Lock Rules for Employee and Employer Amounts
The lock rules for the employee and employer amounts can be set to F (Frozen), L
(Locked), D (Dynamic), or O (Override). For details on these settings, see page 4-15.
10/2010
4-41
If these lock rules are set to L (Locked) and you need to adjust the employee and
employer amounts, run the Roll-Over Program (BM0800) followed by the Recalculation Program (BM0850) to leave an audit trail. See page 5-31 for information about
the Roll-Over Program and page 5-39 for information about the Recalculation
Program.
Roll-Over Process
To roll over records for any group or category of employees, use the Roll-Over Program (BM0800), discussed in Chapter 5 of this manual. The roll-over process preserves previous records and leaves a history, an audit trail.
As a result of events like marriage, divorce, child birth, and adoption, coverage level
changes with their resultant premium changes may apply to part of a year. In this case,
you will do a roll-over for individual employes, thus creating a new benefit record
for the employee. For individual employees, use the exit date procedure discussed
under the next heading.
Using an Exit Date
Using an exit date ensures that an audit trail will be kept of former inactive benefit
records. Use this method whenever you need to make a change to individual
employee records and preserve a history of their benefit records.
Use an exit date:
♦ To change a package in which each plan offers different types of coverage levels
from other plans in the same package.
> For example, if medical coverage is offered with codes based on the number
of people covered, but life insurance is offered for employee only with codes
based on employee age, you must use the exit date method to change packages that include the two varying types of coverage level codes.
♦ To update changes to an employee’s FTE as it affects benefit premium allocations.
♦ To allow changes to an FTE allocation table to affect premium allocations when
the lock rule is set to L (Locked).
♦ To correct a wrong package entry.
♦ To inactivate the benefit record for a terminated employee.
The advantage of using the exit date method is that it will create a history of the previous record. This method is like running the Roll-Over Program (BM0800) for one
employee in the ’Inactivate only’ update mode.
WARNING: Before entering an exit date, be certain all information on the screen is correct.
Once an exit date is entered and the record is saved, the record becomes inactive and it
cannot be changed.
4-42
10/2010
Using an Exit Date
To change an employee’s package and/or coverage level using an exit date:
1 In the Exit box, type the date that coverage under the current package ends. This
date may be past, present, or future.
2 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon. In the same screen, the Benefit Information Window will change to a blank window.
3 Select a new Package from the list.
If using this method only for updating an employee’s benefit FTE, type in the same
package code that was in place previously.
4 Select the default Level from the list.
If using this method only for updating an employee’s benefit FTE, type in the same
coverage level code that was in place previously.
5 Type the new election date, which is the day after the exit date for the old package,
in the Elect box.
6 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Any required box that needs information not coming from another screen will
flash, and you will see a message to fill in the required boxes..
WARNING: Leave the Exit box blank on this new record, or this record will be inactivated.
 Fill in any other required boxes
 Make changes to any other boxes as necessary.
 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Sample Case of Using the Exit Date for a Package Change
Figure 4-32 illustrates a current Package Code assignment with an Exit date to close
it.
Figure 4-33 shows how selecting the
(Save [F9]) icon results in a blank Benefit
Information Window, ready for a new package.
Enter the new package and the changed information. Type the Election date as one
day after the old exit date.
Figure 4-34 shows the result of assigning a new Package. Select the
icon to save the changes.
10/2010
(Save [F9])
4-43
Figure 4-32: Closing a package by using the Exit date
Figure 4-33: Benefits Management form ready to accept a new Package
4-44
10/2010
Using an Exit Date
Figure 4-34: Benefits Management form with a new Package
Correcting a Package Entry
The Benefits Management Module allows only one package to be assigned to an
employee on any given date. So if an incorrect package has been given to an
employee and the data has been saved, you can use a past cutoff date range that is outside the realm of likelihood of there being any existing benefit records. To be effective, you must change the date for the eligibility date as well as for the election and
exit dates to this outside date. The date used in the procedure is 01/01/50 because that
is the oldest date the software recognizes.
To correct a wrong package entry:
1 Change the date in the Elig box to 010150 (or a past date decided on by your district that has no existing records).
2 Change the date in the Elect box to 010150 (or a date that matches what you
typed in the Elig box).
3 Change the date in the Exit box to 010150 (or a date that matches what you typed
in the Elig box).
4 Select the
10/2010
(Save [F9]) icon.
4-45
5 The screen now displays a blank Benefit Information Window that is waiting for
your input. The correct eligibility date is also displayed.
6 Type the correct package code and the other required information, using the correct election date.
Sample Case of Correcting a Package Entry
The following three figures illustrate the correction of a package entry.
Figure 4-35: Benefits Management form before package correction
In Figure 4-32, a clerical error resulted in assignment of this employee to package 5L
instead of to package 8L. The Eligibility date of this erroneous assignment is
12/01/1996 and the Election date is 02/01/2010.
Figure 4-36 illustrates the corrections. The Elig date, the Elect date, and the Exit date
will all be changed to 01/01/1950. Select the
(Save [F9]) icon to move the erroneous package assignment into a time frame that will not conflict with current activity.
In Figure 4-37, the correct package (8L) has been typed in, with the same Elig date
(12/01/1996) and Elect date (02/01/2010) as were originally given to the
incorrect package. This corrected record is now complete after you select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
4-46
10/2010
Using an Exit Date
Figure 4-36: Benefits Management form during package correction
Figure 4-37: Benefits Management form after package correction
10/2010
4-47
Terminated Employees
The Benefits Management Module does not take the termination date into consideration in relation to an employee receiving benefits. Thus, a retired employee will still
receive the benefits on the Deductions form for the Employee Maintenance window,
even though the employee has a termination date on the Termination form. It also
means that an employee who has left the district’s employ for a reason other than
retirement will also continue to be included in district benefit calculations if your distracted does not supply an Exit date for the employee on the Benefits Management
form.
4-48
10/2010
Quick Change Tab
Quick Change Tab
The instructions for the Quick Change tab focus on the following areas:
♦ Using the Quick Change Tab
♦ Sample Case of a Quick Change of Coverage Level
Using the Quick Change Tab
Use the Quick Change tab to change:
♦Package
♦ Coverage level
The Quick Change tab is a semiautomatic version of using an exit date to make
changes.
Use the Quick Change tab only if the coverage level codes offered are similar for all
plans included in the new package. For example, all of the plans in the package use
coverage levels that are based on employee, such as Employee Only, Employee + 1,
etc. As long as the codes offered are similar across plans, you can select a coverage
level code that applies to most plans, and after using the Quick Change tab, change
the levels that the employee needs changed for specific plans.
If, however, medical coverage is offered with codes based on the number of people
covered, but life insurance is offered for employee only with codes based on
employee age, you cannot use the Quick Change tab to change packages that include
the two varying types of coverage level codes.
By using the Quick Change tab, the employee’s benefit history is preserved. Information about which package and/or coverage level was held before the change as well as
the date of the change continues to be available by running the Benefit Information
Listing (BM0200) on page 5-36.
Figure 4-38: Quick Change tab for the Demographic (MA) form
10/2010
4-49
To change an employee’s package and/or coverage level using the Quick
Change tab:
1 Click the Quick Change tab.
2 Type or select the last date of the old coverage in the Exit Date box, if different
from the default of the current date.
3 Type the first date of the new coverage in the New Election Date box, if different
from the default of tomorrow. This date must be at least one day after the exit date.
4 Select the new coverage level in the New Level box, if the employee has elected to
change the coverage level.
5 Select L - Locked or F - Frozen in the Amount Rule box, if the lock rule must be
changed.
6 Type the new package code in the New Package box, if the employee has elected
to change the package.
7 Select the
(Save [F9]) icon in the Quick Change tab.
 If the change is successful, the Plan Information tab displays.
 If the change did not work, the Error Messages box displays any problems
with the change. Make any needed corrections, the select the
(Save [F9])
icon again.
Sample Case of a Quick Change of Coverage Level
Let’s suppose an employee gets married and wants to change the level of health coverage. The following illustration shows the steps for changing the coverage level
using the Quick Change tab.
Figure 4-39 illustrates the results of clicking the Quick Change tab and filling in the
information needed to change the coverage level. The tab has the following changes:
♦ An Exit Date of 06/28/2010 for the last date of coverage for Coverage Level E
Employee Only.
♦ A New Election Date of 06/29/2010 for the start of coverage under the New Level
of E2 Employee Plus Two or More.
Figure 4-40 shows the new coverage level for this employee. Notice that the change is
reflected at the default level as well as for the coverage for the health plan and dental
plans. The life and disability coverages remained with the default coverage of
employee-only.
4-50
10/2010
Quick Change Tab
Figure 4-39: Benefits Management form with Quick Change tab filled in
Figure 4-40: Benefits Management form with Quick Change tab updated
10/2010
4-51
Making Changes Directly on the Benefits Management Form
Any changes made directly on the Benefits Management form that do not involve the
use of an exit date will not leave an audit trail.
WARNING: If you do not use an exit date or the Quick Change tab, you will lose the audit
trail of the record as it was before the change!
Make changes directly on the Benefits Management (BM) Screen to change:
♦ Coverage level
♦ Premium amounts
Changing Coverage Level
If you don’t need to preserve a record of changes, you can change the coverage level
for one or more plans directly on the Benefits Management form. While fast and easy
to do, this method has one disadvantage: Information about coverage levels before the
change will be lost. To preserve a history of the employee’s deductions, use an exit
date. See page 4-42.
To change coverage level(s) on the Benefits Management (BM) Screen:
1 If needed, click the Plan Information tab to make it the active tab.
2 Select the Override check box for a Plan.
3 In the Level list, select a Coverage Level code from the list.
4 Click the
(Recalculate) icon to recalculate the benefits amounts.
5 Click the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Changing Premium Amounts
To allow immediate (or dynamic) changes to employee and employer premium
amounts, you can change their lock rules to D. However, any changes made while the
lock rules are set to D will not leave an audit trail.
To change premium amounts on the Benefits Management form:
2 For overriding employee-paid amounts, do the following.
 In the EE Rule column, select O - Override.
 Type the custom amount in the Employee column.
4-52
10/2010
Updating the Benefits Management form for Changed FTE
3 For overriding employer-paid amounts, do the following:
 In the ER Rule column, select O - Override.
 Type the custom amount in the Employer column.
4 Click the
(Recalculate) icon to recalculate the benefits amounts.
5 Click the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Updating the Benefits Management form for Changed FTE in
Position Control
If your site is using Position Control, the lock rules on the Benefits Management form
determine whether that form automatically recalculates benefits when an employee’s
FTE changes.
♦ If the lock rules for the employee and employer amounts are set to D - Dynamic,
the changes will occur immediately and automatically, but no audit trail will be
left.
♦ If the lock rules for the employee and employer amounts are set to L - Locked and
you need an audit trail, you need to update the change by using the Recalculate
command.
For Standard Position Control, the Assignments/STD form records the FTE. For
Enhanced Position Control, the Assignments/EA form records the FTE.
WARNING: If you do not use an exit date or the Quick Change tab before using the Recalculate command, you will lose the audit trail of the record as it was before the change!
To update an employee’s changed FTE:
2 Click the
(Recalculate) icon.
3 Click the
(Save [F9]) icon.
Viewing and Maintaining Inactive Records
The Plan Information tab allows you to view inactive Package Code assignments for
an employee. A Package Code becomes inactive after you give it an exit date. For an
explanation of the Plan Information tab, see page 4-18.
10/2010
4-53
To view and maintain former (inactive) benefit records:
2 Click the [Inactive] button on the top of the tab.
The button label changes to [Active] to indicate that you are viewing inactive
records.
3 The commands on the right side of the tab become available. Your security profile
determines which of these commands are available to you.
Navigate through inactive Package Codes for an employee.
From left to right the VCR buttons are Oldest, Previous,
Next, and Newest. The Benefit Information area displays
the information about the inactive Package Code
assignment.
♦ In the Benefit Information area, change Exit date. You
may need to change this to resolve conflicts between
Elect and Exit dates. An employee can have only one
active Package Code at a time.
♦ In the Plan Information tab, change the Posted date for a
Plan Code to confirm that it is accurate.
Delete the inactive Package Code that is currently displayed.
This command is available only when there are no other active
records. It removes the Exit date and reactivates the Benefit
Package.
4 After making any change to the inactive records, select the
(Save [F9]) icon.
5 After you are finished viewing and changing inactive records, click the [Active]
button to resume viewing the active Package Code assignment.
4-54
10/2010
Chapter 5:
Reports, Processes, and
Invoicing
Chapter Contents
Overview of Reports, Processing, and Invoicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Categories on the Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Benefits Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Benefits Management Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Benefits Management Invoicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
The Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Options Menu and Toolbar Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Message Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Tab Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Opening a Report Window from QCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Logging On to QCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Selecting the Job Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Opening a Report Window from the Job Menu Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Benefits Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) Window . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Request Benefits Management Cash Out Report (BM0230) Window . . . . . . .5-44
Request Benefits Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) Window . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
Request Billing Report (BM0210) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60
Request Dependents Report (BM0220) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-79
Benefits Management Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84
Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) Window . . . . . . . .5-97
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) Window . . . .5-103
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) Window . . . . .5-109
Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) Window . . . . . . . . . . .5-114
10/2010
5-1
Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900)
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-123
Benefits Management Invoicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100) Window . .5-143
Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-148
Code Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-160
Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-160
Description of Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-160
Selecting Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-161
5-2
10/2010
Chapter Contents
Table 5-1: Quick start guide for the Benefits Management processes and reports
TOPIC
TELLS HOW TO
Overview of Reports, Processing, and
Invoicing
Identify the report or process that you want to run. This heading lists 5-6
the reports and processes available from the Job Menu window for
Benefits Management and provides a one-paragraph description of
each one.
The Launch Window
Use the report window to launch reports and processes for Benefits
Management. The mechanics of filling in the window are the same
for each report or process. However, the selection criteria in the
Report Selection, Employee Selection, and other tabs vary from
report to report.
5-10
Opening a Launch Window from QCC
Open the Job Menu window for Benefits Management and select a
report window from the tree view and grid view.
5-17
Fill in the Report Selections, Select Employees, and other tabs for
5-28
reports on the Benefits Management Reports branch of the tree view
on the Job Menu window.
Fill in the Report Selections and Select Employees tabs for the
reports on the Benefits Management Processes branch of the tree
view on the Job Menu window.
5-84
Fill in the Report Selections and Select Employees tabs for the
reports on the Benefits Management Invoicing branch of the tree
view on the Job Menu window.
5-136
Code Selection Dialog Box
Fill in the dialog box for selecting codes, such as Plan Codes,
Bargaining Unit codes, and Benefit Status codes. Many report
windows allow you the choice of typing such codes directly in the
launch window or selecting them from this dialog box.
5-160
10/2010
PAGE
5-3
Table 5-2: Reports and processes listed by launch window
LAUNCH WINDOW
REPORT NAME
PAGE
Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window
Benefits Employee/AR Customer Mass Create/Link
(BMI020) report
5-136
Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260)
window
Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260)
5-28
Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240)
window
Benefit Employee Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240)
5-50
Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window
Benefit Management Recalculation Report (BM0855)
5-84
Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing
(BMI100) window
Benefits Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing (BMI100)
5-143
Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window
Benefit Information Listing (BM0200)
5-36
Request Benefits Management Cashout Report
(BM0230) window
Benefit Management Cash Out Report (BM0230)
5-44
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830)
window
Mass Benefit Plan Add Report (BM0835)
5-97
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change
(BM0810) window
Mass Benefit Plan Change Report (BM0815)
5-103
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete
(BM0820) window
Mass Benefit Plan Delete Report (BM0825)
5-109
Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800)
window
Benefits Management Roll-Over Report (BM0805)
5-114
Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window Benefits Pre-Invoice Duplicates (BMI011)
Benefits Pre-Invoice Errors (BMI011)
Benefits Pre-Invoice Prel-Lst (BMI011)
Benefits Pre-Invoice CSAR Post (BMI012)
5-148
Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250)
window
Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report (BM0250)
5-56
Request Billing Report (BM0210) window
Billing Report (BM0210)
5-60
Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window
Dependents Report (BM0220)
5-79
Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window
Life Insurance Benefit Listing (BM0270)
5-79
Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window
Update Pay Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0905) report
5-123
5-4
10/2010
Chapter Contents
Table 5-3: Reports and processes listed by report name
REPORT NAME
LAUNCH WINDOW
window
5-28
Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240)
window
5-50
Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window
5-36
Request Benefits Management Cashout Report
(BM0230) window
5-44
Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window
5-84
window
5-56
(BMI020) report
Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window
5-136
Benefits Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing (BMI100)
(BMI100) window
5-143
Benefits Management Roll-Over Report (BM0805)
window
5-114
Benefits Pre-Invoice Duplicates (BMI011)
Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window
5-148
Request Billing Report (BM0210) window
5-60
Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window
5-79
Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window
5-79
window
5-97
(BM0810) window
5-103
(BM0820) window
5-109
(BM0905) report
(BM0900) window
5-123
10/2010
PAGE
5-5
Overview of Reports, Processing, and
Invoicing
This overview focuses on the following areas:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Categories on the Tree View
Categories on the Tree View
The Benefits Management Job Menu window categorizes reports and processes into
three areas on the Tree view.
♦ Benefits Management Reports provide a variety of ways to look at benefit information, such as listing covered dependents, costs of benefits for each employee,
and employees who have used less than the cap amount for benefits.
♦ Benefits Management Processes allow your site to automate processes, such as
loading deductions from Benefits Management into the QSS/OASIS Payroll
System.
♦ Benefits Management Invoicing allows a site to use Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) to invoice employees for health care costs, such as COBRA benefits
or retiree benefits. IBM is an optional module for managing receivables with
invoices, aging, and a variety of reports. For more information, contact your QSS
account manager.
The Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) on page 5-28 allows you to print
the comments that have been recorded on the Benefits Management form for all
employees or for a selected group of employees. It can be sorted by bargaining unit,
alphabetically by employee name, by package, by benefit status code, or by birth date.
Selection of employees to be included on the report can be limited by sort option,
and/or by report code, plan code and level, benefit vendor, active or inactive status,
the section 125/primary/Cobra/M or D flags, and individually by SSN.
5-6
10/2010
Overview of Reports, Processing, and Invoicing
Think of the Benefit Information Listing (BM0200) on page 5-36 as the Benefit
HISTORY Report. This report lists the benefit information, for current and past years,
for each employee selected in the report, including the package and member plans,
and the premium breakdown for each plan, for both employee and employer. Total
costs for each employee are also listed.
The Benefit Management Cash Out Report (BM0230) on page 5-44 lists those
employees who did not use the full amount of their available Cap and are therefore
entitled to receive a Cash-out for the difference. This report is for information only. It
can be used as a guide by the Payroll staff to create the necessary Cash-out paylines.
The Benefit Employee Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) on page 5-50 lists
employees selected on the basis of bargaining unit, report code, benefit status, plan
code/level of coverage, a range of plan codes, vendor or posting status that are
assigned to the various benefit plans offered by the district. The benefit plans are presented with the employees listed either alphabetically or by election date.
The Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report (BM0250) in page 5-56 allows you to compare your benefit records against the billing statements received from benefit providers. It is organized first by benefit provider and then alphabetically by employee.
Optional selections can be made by bargaining unit and report code. There is the
capability to include employee comments on the report.
The Billing Report (BM0210) on page 5-60 lists the billing information for each
employee selected in the report, including plans and the premium breakdown for each
plan, for both employee and employer. Total costs for each employee are also listed.
When sorted by plan, it shows the totals owed to each plan from the employee and
from the employer. This facilitates writing out one check for all employees to each
plan or each vendor.
The Dependents Report (BM0220) on page 5-70 lists all the dependents covered for
each employee selected in the report. Moreover, it will allow you to specify a date
range within which to report all dependents who will become ineligible for coverage
under the parent’s plan. This will allow your district to stop making premium payments at the correct time, rather than getting a refund some months after the insurance
company has informed you that the dependent is no longer covered.
10/2010
5-7
The Life Insurance Benefit Listing (BM0270) on page 5-79 prints information concerning
those life insurance plans with a premium cost based upon a percent of the life benefit, or
face value, of the policy. The report can be sorted alphabetically by participating employee
or by plan/level. Selection of employees to be included on the report can be made on the
basis of bargaining unit, report code, benefit status code, plan and level code, vendor, active
or inactive status, and/or whether the employee or the employer pay the premium.
The Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window on page 5-84 allows you to
launch a process that globally recalculates the employee and employer amounts displayed on the Benefits Benefits Management (BM) form of the Employee Maintenance window for the current active record, based on the employee’s FTE in effect on
the start date. When changes are made, this program will automatically recalculate the
benefits for every employee who has the specified benefit(s). You do not have to manually change the data for each employee. However, the recalculation process by itself
will not preserve an audit trail of records before the recalculation.
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) window on page 5-97 is
a part of a series of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits Management (BM) form of the Employee Maintenance window. This window allows you
to do a mass add of plans to benefit packages on the Benefits Management (BM)
form.
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) window on page
Management (BM) form of the Employee Maintenance window. This window allows
you to do a mass update to Plan Codes already assigned to employees on the Benefits
Management (BM) form.
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) window on page
Management (BM) form of the Employee Maintenance window. This window allows
you to do a mass deletion of Plan Codes from the Demographic (MA) form.
The Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window on page 5-114
allows you to globally transfer the employee benefit information on the Benefits
Management form of the Employee Maintenance window from one plan year (calen-
5-8
10/2010
Overview of Reports, Processing, and Invoicing
dar, fiscal, or other) to the next. The advantages to using this program are that it saves
you from having to re-type all the employees’ benefit information every year, and it
preserves the previous year’s information for your records.
The Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window on
page 5-123 allows you to launch a process that will automatically load each benefit
deduction from the Benefits Management Module into the QSS/OASIS Payroll System. The deductions display on the Deductions (PD) form of the Employee Maintenance window.
The Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window on page 5-136 allows
you to create customer IDs in Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) and to link them
to benefits employees designated by the selection criteria. This allows you to create
and link a group of employee records to individual IBM customer ID records for the
purpose of using IBM to invoice the employees for health care costs
The Benefits Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing (BMI100) on page 5-143 can be
used to report either those benefits employees who have been linked to a ClientServer Accounts Receivable (CSAR) customer ID, those employees who should be
linked but are not, or both.
The Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window on page 5-148 allows
you to initiate benefits invoicing on the Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) window. IBM is an optional module in QCC that allows you to create invoices, record
receipts, age invoices, and create a variety of reports.
REMINDER: To invoice for benefits, a site must be using the optional Invoicing/Billing
Management (IBM) window. For more information, see the QSS/OASIS Invoicing/Billing
Management (IBM) Manual.
10/2010
5-9
The Launch Window
This topic describes the report window for launching Benefits Management reports
and processes. The sample in Figure 5-1 is for the Request Update Deductions from
Benefits Management (BM0900) window. The windows for other reports have a very
similar look and feel.
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Message bar
Tab bar
Status bar
Figure 5-1: Report window for Benefits Management reports
5-10
10/2010
The Launch Window
Title Bar
Table 5-4: Overview of the report window 7
PART OF WINDOW
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Title bar
Displays the name of the report and the current district for
your QCC session.
5-11
File menu
Allows you to select commands for saving or clearing
report settings, showing status of your session, and closing the window. These commands are the same for every
report.
5-12
Options menu and toolbar
Allows you to retrieve presets, save presets, launch the
report, save or reset report settings, and print the screen.
These commands are the same for every report.
5-13
Message bar
Displays messages to help you to fill in the screen, such
as informing you when dates are out of the range for a
fiscal year or when you use the same account field twice
in a sort sequence.
5-15
Tab bar
Allows you to fill in the tabs for launching the report. The
tabs vary from report to report.
5-15
♦ Every report has its own Main Selection tab that is
unique for the specific requirements of the report.
♦ Some reports have additional tabs, such as a Sort
tab or Accounts tab.
Status bar
Displays the user security for the report, the current time,
and the year, district, and site for your QCC session.
5-16
Title Bar
Buttons
Name of report launch program
Figure 5-2: Title bar for the report window
The title bar follows the same pattern for every report or process.
♦ The left side displays the name of the report launch program that you ran from the
Job Menu window.
♦ The right side displays the product name and includes the standard Minimize,
Maximize, and Close buttons for Windows.
10/2010
5-11
File Menu
The File menu is the same for every report or process. Table 4-2 summarizes the purpose of each command and points to where you can turn for more information.
Figure 5-3: File menu for the report window
Table 5-5: Summary of commands on the File menu
MENU COMMAND
KEYBOARD
PURPOSE
File |
Cancel/Close
F12
Close the report window after you are through launching a report.
The window does not close automatically.
File | View job
script
CTRL+J
Display the Display a job script for last job launched (STTEMP)
window. This window is a tool that helps QSS diagnose why a
report did not work as expected.
Figure 5-4: Display a job script for last job launched (STTEMP) window
The Display a job script for last job launched (STTEMP) window is primarily for
QSS account managers and the data processing staff at your site. They can use the
information in this window to figure out why a report did not work as expected.
Whenever you launch a report, the report window creates a file called STTEMP that
5-12
10/2010
The Launch Window
Options Menu and Toolbar Icons
runs on the server to create the report. The STTEMP file merges the command for
running the report with the selections that you have made on the tabs for the report
window. To close the window, click the
[Close] button.
The STTEMP file is related to the $STDLIST. The STTEMP file contains the commands for producing a report. The $STDLIST is a transcript of what happens when
the STTEMP file is executed on the server to create the report.
Options Menu and Toolbar Icons
♦ Commands on the Options Menu and Toolbar
♦ Undo Changes and Reset Commands
♦ Submit Job Command
Commands on the Options Menu and Toolbar
The Options menu and toolbar icons are the same for every financial report. Once
you learn how they work in one report, you know how to use them for the other
reports.
Figure 5-5: Options menu for the report window
Figure 5-6: Toolbar icons for the report window
Clear Screen Command
After you select the Clear Screen command, the boxes in the current tab revert to the
way they were when you opened the report from the Job Menu window. All other tabs
are unchanged.
10/2010
5-13
Table 5-6: Summary of commands on the Options menu and toolbar
MENU COMMAND
ICON
KEYBOARD
PURPOSE
PAGE
Options | Save
Preset
CTRL+A
Save the report parameters for the current
window in a report preset so you can reuse
them the next time you launch this report. For
instructions, see Appendix B.
B-3
Options | Retrieve
Preset
CTRL+T
Retrieve or delete a report preset. The report
window pre-fills with the parameters from the
preset that you retrieve. For instructions, see
Appendix B.
B-7
Options | Clear
Screen
SHIFT+F1
Undo the changes in the current tab. The
boxes in the tab revert to the way they were
when you opened the report window from the
Job Menu window. All other tabs are
unchanged.
5-13
Options | Submit
CTRL+S
Launch the job that creates the report. The
job number displays in a Launch Job message box and the message bar. You can use
this job number to identify the report in Print
Manager.
5-14
Options | Print
Screen
F11
Print a copy of the window on the default Windows printer for your PC.
none
File |
Cancel/Close
F12
Close the report window.
none
Submit Command
After you select the Submit Job command, the system assigns a job number to the
report. This job number displays in the following places:
♦ Launch Job message box.
♦ Message bar on the report window: Last #Jxxxx where xxxx is the job number.
The job to create the report or process goes into the system’s report queue. The jobs
for are processed in the order that they are submitted. The time required to create your
report or batch update depends on how many other report jobs are in line ahead of
yours.
After a report is finished, it shows up in Print Manager. Figure 5-7 illustrates the relationship between the job number, report name, and report title in the report window
and the columns in the Print Files tab for the Print Manager window.
5-14
10/2010
The Launch Window
Message Bar
Last job number on report window
Report Title from Report Selections tab
Report name from title bar of report window
Figure 5-7: Relationship of job number, report title, and report name to Print Manager window
For more information about reports, see Printing Reports with Print Manager.
Message Bar
The message bar displays a variety of messages. They can confirm that an operation
has completed or provide information that you need to fill in the report window.
The message bar is
between the toobar
and tab bar.
Figure 5-8: Message bar for the report window
The message bar provides a variety of messages, such as "Cancelled retrieval of preset," when you start to retrieve a preset but exit the Preset Maintenance - Retrieve dialog box without retrieving one.
Tab Bar
Figure 5-9: Tab bar for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
Many report launch windows two or more tabs: a Report Selections tab and additional
tabs, such as the Employee Selection tab and Deduction Selection tab. This illustration has three tabs. If a report has only a Report Selections tab, that tab may not have
a label.
♦ The Report Selections tab allows you to select the basic options for a report, such
as report title, year, and sort options.
10/2010
5-15
♦ For reports with more extensive selection criteria, there are additional tabs, such as
an Employee Selection tab for selecting employees by Pay Schedule, Control
Group, and other such codes.
Status Bar
The status bar allows you to view the user security for a report, information about the
current QCC session, and the current date and time.
Figure 5-10: Status bar for the report window
Yr
Dist
Site
The fiscal year, district number, and site number for your QCC
session.
The background color indicates the fiscal year for the
report. The standard colors are:
♦ Red for a previous fiscal year.
♦ Green for the current fiscal year.
♦ Blue for a future fiscal year.
Your site can define different color codes.
[date]
The current date from your PC’s system clock.
If you hover the mouse pointer over this pane, a ToolTip
displays the time when you opened the current report
window.
[time]
5-16
The current time from your PC’s system clock.
10/2010
Logging On to QCC
The following instructions are the same for each report:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Logging On to QCC
Selecting the Job Menu Window
Selecting a Report from the Job Menu Window
Restoring the Job Menu Window
Logging On to QCC
If you have not already done so, log on to QCC.
To log on to QCC:
1 Double-click the QSS ControlCenter icon on the Windows desktop.
Figure 5-11: QCC icon on the Windows desktop
2 Fill in the Login dialog box.
Figure 5-12: Login dialog box
 For the User Name, the dialog box displays the user name from the previous
time you used QCC. You can type a different User Name if you like.
 Type the Password.
> Select [Login] to log in to QCC.
> Select [Cancel] to close the dialog box and return to Windows.
For more information, see "Logging in to QCC" in the QSS ControlCenter Guide.
10/2010
5-17
Selecting the Job Menu Window
After you have logged on to QCC, you can open the Job Menu from the Go menu,
Toolbar View, or Tree View. The following examples use the standard QCC menus as
of 2010. Your menus may look different due to customized set-up at your site.
To select Job Menu from the Go menu:
♦ Click Go, point to Finances, and click Finance Reports/Processes.
Figure 5-13: Opening the Job Menu window for Benefits Management from the Go menu
To select Job Menu from the Tree View:
1 On the View menu, check the Tree View command.
2 Click the Go folder to expand the tree to the first level.
3 Click the Human Resources subfolder.
4 Click the HR Reporting and Downloading subfolder.
5 Click the Benefits Management Job Menu command.
5-18
10/2010
Opening a Launch Window from the Job Menu Window
Figure 5-14: Tree View with HR Reporting and Downloading subfolder expanded
To select Job Menu from the Toolbar view:
1 On the View menu, click the Toolbar command.
2 Click the Human Resources tab.
3 Click the Benefits Managements Job Menu icon
.
Figure 5-15: Toolbar view for opening the Job Menu window for Benefits Management
For more information, see "QSS ControlCenter Window" in the QSS ControlCenter
Guide. For instructions viewing this document, see page 1-4.
♦
♦
♦
♦
10/2010
Tree View and Grid View
Selecting a Report from the Tree View
Selecting a Report from the Grid View
5-19
Tree View and Grid View
The Job Menu window displays the reports and processes that you can launch from
QCC. The security profile for your QCC user name determines which reports are
listed on your Job Menu window.
You can use the following views:
♦ The tree view contains a series of folders for selecting reports. Each folder is a category of financial reports, such as Budget Reports/Processes. After you open a
folder, it displays additional folders and the names of reports that you can launch.
For instructions, see "Selecting a Report from the Tree View."
♦ The grid view displays a list of all reports that you can launch. You can search for
reports by typing one or more search terms. For instructions, see page 5-23.
Selecting a Report from the Tree View
These instructions take you through the basics of selecting a report from the Job
Menu window. See page 5-25 for a description of the commands for this window.
To select a report from the tree view:
1 In the View area, click the Tree option button.
Figure 5-16: Job Menu window with all folders closed
5-20
10/2010
When the tree view is active, the Search box is unavailable. If you want to search,
use the grid view.
HINT: If you check the Preserve Expanded Branches command on the Options menu, the
system saves your work space, and the tree view looks just as it did the last time you closed
the Job Menu window.
2 Click the + to open up the branches in the tree view.
Figure 5-17: Job Menu window with all folders closed
Figure 5-17 illustrates the first level of folders for the tree view. Each of these folders can contain other folders and lists of reports that you can select.
3 Open or close folders to display additional folders and reports windows that you
can open.
Each folder has either a + or - icon.
 A + icon indicates a closed folder. To open it, click the + icon or double-click
the folder name. A folder can contain subfolders, reports, or both.
 A - icon indicates an open folder. To close it, click the - icon or double-click the
folder name. This action closes the folder and all subfolders under it.
10/2010
5-21
Use the scroll bar to see parts of the tree that do not fit in the window.
Figure 5-18 shows what the tree view looks like with some of the financial reports
exposed. This example uses the standard folders as of 2008. The actual folders
may look different at your site.
Closed folder. To
open it, click the +
icon or double-click its
name. The + changes
to a -.
Open folder. To close
it (and all its
subfolders), click the icon or double-click its
name. The - changes
to a +.
Report. Click a report
to launch it from a
report window.
Reports can be under
any folder or
subfolder. You may
have to open several
levels of folders to
expose reports.
Figure 5-18: Job Menu window with folders opened to expose reports and processes
4 To open a report window, double-click a report name (or single-click if Load ’Job
Screen’ in a Single Click is checked on the File menu).
 A progress bar displays on the top of the screen while the report window is
loading,
 A report window for the report opens.
5 The Job Menu window remains on the Windows desktop until you close it.
You can open as many report windows as you want from the Job Menu window.
Press F12 to close the Job Menu window. You can also use the standard Minimize,
Maximize, and Close buttons in the title bar.
5-22
10/2010
Selecting a Report from the Grid View
These instructions take you through the basics of using the grid view to select a
report. See page 5-25 for a description of all of the commands for the Job Menu
window.
To select a report from the grid view:
1 In the View area, click the Grid option button to display a list of available reports.
Figure 5-19: Grid view for Job Menu window
 The Job Title is the name of the report.
 The JCL Name is the name of the job that creates the report.
You can sort the grid on either column.
 Double-click a column heading to sort in ascending order (A – Z).
 Double-click a column heading again to sort in descending order (Z – A).
2 If desired, use the Search box to locate a report.
 Type one or more words in the Search box, then press ENTER.
> If you have a specific report in mind, you can type a full title, such as General Ledger Report or Assets by Project.
> You can do a more general search by typing a key word that is in the title of
several reports. For example, a search for budget matches any report title
10/2010
5-23
that includes the word budget, such as Adopt/Revise Budget, Budget Transfers Report, and SACS Budget Report. The search is not case sensitive.
> The window does partial word searches. For example, the a search for grad
matches all words that contain those letters, such as grade, Grade, GRADE,
grades, grading, graduation, retrograde, and degrade.
 To search, press ENTER or F3.
The grid displays all reports that match the word or words in the Search box.
Figure 5-20: Grid view with results of searching for the "rec"
 To reset the search and display the full list of reports, press SHIFT+F3 or click
the
[Reset Search] icon.
3 To open a report window, double-click a report name (or single-click if Load ’Job
Screen’ in a Single Click is checked on the File menu).
 A progress bar displays on the top of the screen while the report window is
loading.
 A report window for the report opens.
4 The Job Menu window remains on the Windows desktop until you close it.
You can open as many report windows as you want from the Job Menu window.
Press F12 to close the Job Menu window. You can also use the standard Minimize,
Maximize, and Close buttons in the title bar.
5-24
10/2010
Table 5-7: Summary of commands for the Job Menu window
COMMAND
MENU
ICON
KEYBOARD
PURPOSE
About
Help
none
SHIFT+F12
Display the About QSS/OASIS Job Menu window. It works
just like the About windows elsewhere in QCC.
Collapse All
Branches
View
none
CTRL+C
For the tree view, collapse all branches except for the first
level. The commands for the tree view in the Job Menu
window work very much like the tree view in QCC. For a
more detailed explanation, see "Customizing the Tree
View" in the QSS ControlCenter Guide.
Exit
File
none
F12
Close the Job Menu window.
Expand All
Branches
View
none
CTRL+E
For the tree view, expand all branches of the tree.
Grid Output...
Options
SHIFT+F11
Open a Grid Output window with a list of the reports in the
tree view or grid view. For instructions, see Appendix D.
Hot Tracking
View
none
CTRL+H
For the tree view, check this option to make the arrow
cursor change to an open hand cursor when you hover the
mouse pointer over a report that you can select.
Launch Minimized
File
none
CTRL+M
Check this option to minimize the Job Menu window after it
opens. To display the window on the Windows desktop,
select its taskbar button from the taskbar.
Lines
View
none
CTRL+I
For the tree view, check this option to display lines
connecting the levels of folders and reports.
Load ’Job Screen’
in a Single Click
File
none
none
Check this option to open report windows by single-clicking
from the tree view and grid view. Uncheck to double-click to
open report windows.
Load Job Screen
Options
F2
Open the report window for the report selected in the tree
view or grid view.
Plus and Minus
View
none
CTRL+U
For the tree view, display the + and - icons to the left of
each folder that you can expand or collapse.
Preserve Expanded
Branches
View
none
CTRL+P
For the tree view, check this option to make the Job Menu
window save your work space when you close the window
and restore it when you open the window again.
Print Screen
Options
F11
Print a copy of the Job Menu window on the default
Windows printer for your PC.
Reset Search
Options
SHIFT+F3
Clear the contents of the Search box so you can begin a
new search.
Roots
View
CTRL+R
For the tree view, show the + and - icons to the left of
folders at the first level (applicable only if you also check
the Lines and Plus and Minus commands).
Search
Options
F3
Search the grid view for the text in the Search box. You
can type one or more search terms in the box.
Show Status
File
CTRL+F12
Display a status window, which is a log of commands
executed on the computer. In most cases, this information
is only of interest to software developers.
10/2010
none
none
5-25
QCC imposes a limit on the number of Job Menu windows that you can open. If you
exceed this number, the following message displays:
Figure 5-21: Message when you try to open a second Job Menu window
This situation can happen if you minimize the Job Menu window after opening a
report, then open another Job Menu window to launch a new report.
To restore the Job Menu window, do either of the following:
♦ Hold down the ALT key, then press the TAB key repeatedly until the Job Menu
Anton is selected, and the bottom of the dialog box displays Job Menu, followed
by your district number and name. Then release the ALT key to switch to the Job
Menu window.
Currently selected icon
Figure 5-22: Application switching after pressing ALT+TAB
In this example, there are four
icons. Only one is for the Job Menu window.
The other three icons are for reports that were launched from the Job Menu
window.
♦ In the Windows taskbar, click the
5-26
icon for the Job Menu window.
10/2010
If you have several report windows open, there will be multiple icons that look the
same. To identify the one for the Job Menu window, hover the mouse pointer over
the toolbar buttons. The one for the Job Menu window displays the name Job
Menu in its ToolTip.
HINT: You can keep the Job Menu window open and minimized during your entire QCC session, then restore the window whenever you want to launch a report. To close the window
during your QCC session, press F12 while the window is active or click the Close button on
the upper right corner of the window.
10/2010
5-27
This heading describes the following report launch windows:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Window
The instructions for this report focus on the following areas:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Launching the Report
Report Selections Tab
Select Employees Tab
Report Sample
Purpose
The Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) allows you to print the comments
that have been recorded on the Benefits Management form for all employees or for a
selected group of employees. It can be sorted by bargaining unit, alphabetically by
employee name, by package, by benefit status code, or by birth date. Selection of
employees to be included on the report can be limited by sort option, and/or by report
code, plan code and level, benefit vendor, active or inactive status, the section
125/primary/Cobra/M or D flags, and individually by SSN.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefit
Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) from the Request Benefit Employee Comment
Listing (BM0260) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the
same for all reports, see page 5-10.
There are two operations in launching a report:
♦ Opening the report window.
♦ Filling in the report window and launching the report.
5-28
10/2010
To open the report window:
1 Open the Job Menu window or restore it from the Windows taskbar.
 If you have not done so already, log on to QCC and open the Job Menu window.
For detailed instructions, see “Logging On to QCC” on page 5-17 and “Selecting the Job Menu Window” on page 5-18.
 If you have minimized the Job Menu window, restore it from the Windows
taskbar. For detailed instructions, see “Restoring the Job Menu Window” on
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) window from the
Job Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window
from the Job Menu Window” on page 5-19.
To fill in the report window and launch the report:
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) window.
Here are some hints for filling in the tabs.
 For a quick reference guide to commands on the report window, see page 5-25.
 To select a tab, click its label. An orange bar displays in the active tab. For general instructions on filling in tabs, see “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9.
 Report presets allow you to save a snapshot of how you have filled in a report
window, then retrieve that snapshot when you want the same report again. For
2 Launch the report with the Submit command.
After you launch the report, a dialog box displays a job number. You will need this
job number to locate the report in Print Manager.
3 View or print the report in Print Manager.
For instructions, see Printing Reports with Print Manager. For more information,
see “Related Documentation” on page 1-4.
Table 5-8: Tabs for the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) window
10/2010
TAB
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Report Selections
Select the records to report by Bargaining Unit code, Package Code, Section 125 flag, date of birth, and other criteria.
5-30
Select Employees
Select up to 20 individual employees by SSN.
5-33
5-29
Figure 5-23 illustrates the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260)
window. See “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in text boxes, selecting options from drop-down lists, selecting dates, checking
boxes, and selecting option buttons.
Many boxes have a code selection icon
. Click this icon to look up codes and
paste them into the report launch window. For instructions, see page 5-160. You can
also type codes in the selection boxes.
WARNING: If you type codes directly on the launch window, the system does not verify the
codes against their master files. If you are not sure of what codes to use, select them in the
code selection dialog box described on page 5-160.
Figure 5-23: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) window
Report Title
5-30
Type a title of up to 30 characters that will be printed in the
headings of each page of the report.
10/2010
Sort by
Select an option from the list:
♦ Bargaining Unit
♦ Employee Name
♦ Package
♦ Benefit Status
♦ Date of Birth
Bargaining Unit
To limit the report to specific Bargaining Unit codes, type or
select up to 5 codes, each of which is 2 digits.
Report Code
To limit the report to specific Report Codes, type or select up to
5 codes, each of which is 2 digits.
Benefit Status
To limit the report to specific Benefit Status codes, type or
select up to 5 codes, each of which is 2 characters.
Package Code
To limit the report to specific Package Codes, type or select up
to 5 codes, each of which is 2 characters.
Plan Code/Level
To limit the report by Plan Code and Coverage Level code,
type or select up to 5 Plan Codes and optional Coverage Level
codes.
♦ Click the icon to the right of Select Plan Code to select
the 4-character Plan Codes.
♦ Click the icon to the right of Select Level Codes to select
the 4-character Coverage Level codes.
For each pair of codes, you can select just a Plan Code to
report all Coverage Level codes associated with it. However, if you specify a Coverage Level code, you must also
specify a Plan Code.
10/2010
Plan Range
To limit the report by Plan Code, type or select a low and high
range of 4-character Plan Codes.
Vendor Numbers
To limit the report by vendor, type or select up to 5 vendor
numbers.
5-31
Date of Birth
To limit the report to employes with a birth date within a specific range, type or select a range of birth dates.
Section 125
Select an option from the list.
♦ Blank to include employee records with this flag set to
either Y or N on the Benefits Management (BM) form.
♦ Yes to include only employee records with this flag set to
Y on the Benefits Management form.
♦ No to include only employee records with this flag set to
N on the Benefits Management form.
Primary
either Y or N on the Benefits Management form.
Cobra
♦ Yes to include employee records with this flag set to Y on
♦ No to include employee records with this flag set to N on
M Flag
If your site is using the optional M flag, type a specific value in
this field to include only records that contain that value. Leave
blank to include all.
D Flag
If your site is using the optional D flag, type a specific value in
Each site determines how to use the M and D flags. Follow
the instructions for your site.
5-32
10/2010
Active/inactive
♦ Both to report both active and inactive benefit records.
♦ Active to report only active benefit records.
♦ Inactive to report only inactive benefit records.
♦ No to print only those employees whose plans have been
posted on the Benefits Management (BM) screen.
Not Posted?
♦ Blank to include all employees regardless of posting
status.
♦ Yes to print only those employees whose plans have been
not posted on the Benefits Management (BM) screen.
Posting is an optional manual process whereby Benefits
Management records are compared to vendor records and a
notation made of the date the two were reconciled. The field
for entering this reconciliation date, i.e., for indicating that
the plans have been posted, is on the Plan Information grid
for the Benefits Management form (page 4-22).
Figure 5-26 illustrates the Select Employees tab for the Request Benefit Employee
Comment Listing (BM0260) window. This entire tab is optional.
[SSN]
Leave blank, or type up to 20 SSNs.
♦ Leave blank to include all employees who meet the
selection criteria on the Report Selections tab.
♦ To select employees, type up to 20 SSNs.
10/2010
5-33
Figure 5-24: Select Employees for the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260) window
5-34
10/2010
Report Sample
65 QSS UNIFIED SCHOOL DISTRICT
SAMPLE FOR DOCUMENTATION
BENEFIT EMPLOYEE COMMENT LISTING
Sort by Employee name
J321
BM0260
H.01.02 04/05/06 PAGE
1
Employee
Birth
Sec
CoEligible
Election
Exit
FTE
Name
SSN
Date
Age ST BU RC 125 Pri bra M D Date
Date
Date
Rule FTE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOUSE MICKEY
04/05/02
POPPINS MARY
01/05/06
POTTER HARRY
11/15/03
10/2010
000-00-0000
07/05/1966
39
CE
40
41
Y
Y
Y
02/01/1996 04/05/2002
AP L 1.0000
51
Y
Y
Y
10/01/1969 03/22/2002
AP L 1.0000
20
Y
Y
Y
07/01/2001 07/01/2001
AP L 0.5400
FAMILY IS COVERED BY HUSBAND'S EMPLOYER INSURANCE
000-00-0000
11/17/1945
60
CL
50
INQUIRED ABOUT COVERAGES POST RETIREMENT; GIVEN
COBRA PACKET
000-00-0000
08/06/1945
60
SH
30
GRANDSON ADDED TO POLICY; LEGAL GUARDIANSHIP
5-35
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
Think of the Benefit Information Listing (BM0200) as the Benefit HISTORY Report.
This report lists the benefit information, for current and past years, for each employee
selected in the report, including the package and member plans, and the premium
breakdown for each plan, for both employee and employer. Total costs for each
employee are also listed.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching theBenefit Information Listing (BM0200) from the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200)
window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the same for all reports,
see page 5-10.
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window from the Job
Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window from the
Job Menu Window” on page 5-19.
5-36
10/2010
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window.
Table 5-9: Tabs for the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window
TAB
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Main Selection
Select the employees to include on the report by Bargaining
Unit, Package Code, Plan Code, and other selections.
5-37
Select Employee
Select up to 20 individual employees by their SSN.
5-41
Figure 5-25 illustrates the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window.
See “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in text
boxes, selecting options from drop-down lists, selecting dates, checking boxes, and
selecting option buttons.
10/2010
5-37
Figure 5-25: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window
Report title
Many districts use this title to identify who launched the
report so the printout can be routed to its owner.
5-38
10/2010
Sort by
♦ Bargaining Unit
♦ Employee Name
♦ Package
♦ Benefit Status
♦ Date of Birth
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
Package
Plan Code/Level
codes.
10/2010
Plan Code Range
Vendor Number
numbers.
5-39
Date of Birth
Section 125
Primary
Cobra
M Flag
D Flag
Each site determines how to use these flags. Follow the
instructions for your site.
5-40
10/2010
Active/inactive
Not Posted?
status.
Print Comments?
♦ Blank or No to suppress printing of comments for the
Benefits Management (BM) form.
♦ Yes to print benefits comments.
Figure 5-26 illustrates the Select Employees tab for the Request Benefits Information
Listing (BM0200) window. This entire tab is optional.
[SSN]
10/2010
5-41
Figure 5-26: Select Employees for the Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200) window
Report Samples
Report of All Categories
In the following partial report, notice that each premium period for each employee is
shown separately. For example, employee Gordon’s first premium period ran from
06/18/03 to 05/18/06. Then the health care cost increased. His second premium period
took effect 05/19/06, and is still open. His active premium period is shown in the top
record, with an eligible date of 05/19/06 and no exit date.
Reading each column from left to right, we see employee name, social security number, birth date, age, benefit status, bargaining unit, report code, the flags for Section
125, primary coverage, COBRA, M flag, and D flag, integration with Client Server
Accounts Receivable, eligible date, eligible end date, election date, exit date, the FTE
5-42
10/2010
rule and employee FTE value. Underneath this information for each employee, we see
the salary rule, lock, and amount fields, package code and name, coverage level,
employee amount, employer amount, and total amount, broken down by plan.
ALL
BENEFIT INFORMATION LISTING
J763
BM0200
H.01.05 07/10/06 PAGE
15
Employee
Birth
Sec
CoEligible Eligible Election Exit
FTE
Name
SSN
Date
Age ST BU RC 125 Pri bra M D CSAR
Date
End
Date
Date
Rule FTE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------FLINTSTONE WILMA
Salary:
Package:
Plan:
PP L
7L
KS2
DDCL
JHL
AFDS
000-00-0000 05/06/xx
9000
KAISER - CLASSIFIED PLUS
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
DELTA DENTAL - CLASSIFIED
JOHN HANCOCK MUTUAL LIFE
AMERICAN FIDELITY-DISABILITY
59 CL 50 50
Level:
N
Y
N
10/01/89
Alloc:
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE TO AGE 59
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E1
E1
E
A59
E
Post
Totals
FROG KERMIT
Salary:
Package:
Plan:
PP L
5T
KAIS
DENT
000-00-0000 08/21/xx
39000
KAISER - CERTIFICATED BASIC
KAISER BASIC
DELTA DENTAL BASIC
60 CE 40 41
Level:
Y
Y
Y
000109 01/01/01
Alloc:
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E1
E
E
Post
Totals
FUDD ELMER
Salary:
Package:
Plan:
000-00-0000 11/17/xx
PP L
KC
KS2
DDCL
GORDON FLASH
Salary:
Package:
Plan:
AP L
RT
KSRT
DDCL
29000
KAISER CAPPED OPEN ENDED
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
000-00-0000 07/18/xx
39000
RETIREMENT HEALTH COVERAGE
KAISER - RETIREE
60 CL 50 51
Y
Y
Y
10/01/69
Alloc:
Level:
E
E
E
35 CL 40 41
Level:
E1
E1
E1
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
O
O
Y
Y
Post
000110 08/30/95
Alloc:
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
Post
Totals
Totals
GORDON FLASH
Salary:
Package:
Plan:
5L
KS2
DDCL
000-00-0000 07/18/xx
KAISER - CLASSIFIED BASIC
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
35 CL 40 41
Level:
Y
Y
Y
000110 08/30/95
Alloc:
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
E1
E1
E1
Post
Totals
KIRK JAMES
Salary:
Package:
Plan:
000-00-0000 08/15/xx
AP L
5T
KS1
DDCT
OTLE
39000
KAISER -CERTIFICATED
DELTA DENTAL - CERTIFICATED
Opt Term Life-Employee Policy
32 CE 40 41
Y
Y
Y
09/01/97
Alloc:
Level:
E
E
E
3034
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Age 30-34
Post
Totals
01/01/05
PP L 0.4375
Empl Pct: 100.00 Empr Pct: 100.00
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
300.00 L
100.00 L
400.00
7.86 L
31.46 L
39.32
4.00 L
3.50% L
0.00 L
112.00 L
112.00
---------------------311.86
243.46
555.32
0.00%
3.50%
3.50%
05/21/06 06/10/06 BN F 1.0000
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
200.00 L
200.00 L
400.00
50.00 L
50.00 L
100.00
---------------------250.00
250.00
500.00
04/12/05
AP L 1.0000
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
0.00 L
275.00 L
275.00
7.86 L
31.46 L
39.32
---------------------05/19/06
AP L 1.0000
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
347.58 L
200.00 L
547.58
15.35 L
61.42 L
76.77
---------------------362.93
261.42
624.35
7.86
306.46
314.32
06/18/03 05/18/06 AP L 1.0000
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
0.00 L
400.00 L
400.00
15.35 L
61.42 L
76.77
---------------------15.35
461.42
476.77
01/01/05
BN F 1.0000
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
0.00 L
170.32 L
170.32
10.00 L
25.00 L
35.00
5.50 L
0.00 L
5.50
---------------------15.50
195.32
210.82
Report of One Package Only
The following report is a listing of the active records of all employees who have package 7T. The resulting report follows it.
10/2010
5-43
Request Benefits Management Cash Out Report (BM0230)
Window
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Benefit Management Cash Out Report (BM0230) lists those employees who did
not use the full amount of their available Cap and are therefore entitled to receive a
Cash-out for the difference. This report is for information only. It can be used as a
guide by the Payroll staff to create the necessary Cash-out paylines.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefit Management Cash Out Report (BM0230) from the Request Benefits Management Cashout
Report (BM0230) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Management Cashout Report (BM0230) window from
the Job Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Management Cashout Report (BM0230)
window.
5-44
10/2010
Figure 5-27 illustrates the Request Benefits Management Cashout Report (BM0230)
Report Title
Type a title which will appear on the top of each page of the
report.
Sort by
♦ Bargaining Unit
♦ Employee Name
10/2010
5-45
Figure 5-27: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Cashout Report (BM0230) window
Start Date
Type or select the effective date of the report. The report will
include only those individuals who are entitled to a cash-out
payment as of this date.
Include
Package/Plan
Detail
♦ Yes to have the report contain detailed information about
the various Packages and Plans for each eligible
employee.
♦ No to list only the cap amount and the cash out amount
for each eligible employee.
The remainder of the window is optional. Leave it blank to include all employees on
the report. To limit the scope of the report, use one or more selection criteria. If you
define multiple selection criteria, an employee must match all of them to be included
on the report.
5-46
Bargaining Unit
Benefit Status
10/2010
Package/Level
Codes
To limit the report by Package Code and Coverage Level code,
type or select up to 5 Package Codes and optional Coverage
Level codes.
♦ Click the icon to the right of Select Package Code to
select the 2-character Package Codes.
For each pair of codes, you can select just a Package Code
to report all Coverage Level codes associated with it. However, if you specify a Coverage Level code, you must also
specify a Package Code.
Plan Code/Level
codes.
Section 125
Primary
10/2010
5-47
Cobra
M Flag
D Flag
Report Sample
This first sample includes the package/plan detail. It shows not only the Cap Amount
and the Cash-Out amount, but also the detail of the various plans in the employee
package and their costs.
5-48
10/2010
TESTING SAMPLE
Benefit Management Cash Out Report
Sort by Employee Name
J318
BM0230
H.01.01 04/05/06 PAGE
1
Employee
Election
Exit
Barg Sec
CoFTE
Employer
Cash out
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
Unit 125 Pri bra M D Rule FTE
Cap Amt
Amount
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOOP BETTY
Package: 8T
Plan: BCCT
DDCT
AFDS
CAP
000-00-0000
CE
04/05/2002
BLUE CROSS - CERTIFICATED PLUS Level: E
BLUE CROSS - CERTIFICATED
E
E
E
CAP AMOUNT APPLIED TO TOTAL
ANY
40
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE
ANY
LANE LOIS
Package:
Plan:
000-00-0000
CL
KAISER CAPPED OPEN ENDED
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
03/22/2002
Level: EC
EC
E
50
Y
Y
Y
EMPLOYEE ONLY - CAPPED
EMPLOYEE ONLY - CAPPED
EMPLOYEE ONLY
000-00-0000
CL
BLUE CROSS - CLASSIFIED PLUS
BLUE CROSS - CLASSIFIED
CAP AMOUNT APPLIED TO TOTAL
04/05/2002
Level: E
E
E
E
ANY
30
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE
EMPLOYEE
ANY
KC
KS2
DDCL
POPPINS MARY
Package: 8L
Plan: BCCL
DDCL
AFDS
CAP
Y
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
Y
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
Y
Y
Y
Y
AP L 1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-------Totals
0.00
AP L 1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
7.86
-------Totals
7.86
PP L 1.0000
Empe Amt
25.00
7.86
0.00
0.00
-------Totals
32.86
L
L
L
L
685.00
Empr Amt
525.00
35.00
112.00
0.00
-------672.00
L
L
300.00
Empr Amt
175.04
31.46
-------206.50
L
L
L
L
550.00
Empr Amt
375.00
31.46
112.00
0.00
-------518.46
L
L
L
L
13.00
Totals
525.00
35.00
112.00
0.00
-------672.00
L
L
93.50
Totals
175.04
39.32
-------214.36
L
L
L
L
31.54
Totals
400.00
39.32
112.00
0.00
-------551.32
This second sample does not include the package plan detail. It shows only the
amount of the cap and the amount of the Cash-Out payment due to the employees.
SAMPLE WITH NO PACKAGE DETAIL
Benefit Management Cash Out Report
J319
BM0230
H.01.01 04/05/06 PAGE
1
Employee
Election
Exit
Barg Sec
CoFTE
Employer
Cash out
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
Unit 125 Pri bra M D Rule FTE
Cap Amt
Amount
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOOP BETTY
000-00-0000
CE
04/05/2002
LANE LOIS
000-00-0000
CL
03/22/2002
POPPINS MARY
000-00-0000
CL
04/05/2002
40
50
30
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
AP L
AP L
PP L
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
685.00
300.00
550.00
13.00
93.50
31.54
10/2010
5-49
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Benefit Employee Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) lists employees selected
on the basis of bargaining unit, report code, benefit status, plan code/level of coverage, a range of plan codes, vendor or posting status that are assigned to the various
benefit plans offered by the district. The benefit plans are presented with the employees listed either alphabetically or by election date.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefit
Employee Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) from the Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are
the same for all reports, see page 5-10.
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) window from the Job
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) window.
5-50
10/2010
Figure 5-28 illustrates the Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) window. See “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in
text boxes, selecting options from drop-down lists, selecting dates, checking boxes,
and selecting option buttons.
Report Title
Type a title to appear on the top of each page of the report.
Sort by
Select a sort option from the list:
♦ Name/Elect Date
♦ Elect Date/Name
10/2010
5-51
Figure 5-28: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefit Plan Assignment Listing (BM0240) window
Bargain Unit
♦ Leave blank to report employees assigned to any Bargaining Unit code.
♦ To select employees, type or select up to 5 2-digit Bargaining Unit code.
Report Code
♦ Leave blank to report employees assigned to any Report
Code.
♦ To select employees, type or select up to 5 2-digit Report
Codes.
5-52
10/2010
Benefit Status
♦ Leave blank to report employees with any Benefit Status
code.
♦ To select employees, type or select up to 5 2-character
Benefit Status codes.
Plan Code/Level
codes.
♦ Click the icon to the right of Select Level Code to select
Plan Range
♦ Leave blank to include all Plan Codes.
♦ To select employees, type or select a range of Plan
Codes.
Plan Date Range
♦ Leave blank to select all plan dates.
♦ To select plan codes, type or select a range or dates.
Vendor Number
♦ Leave blank to report Plan Codes assigned to any vendor.
♦ To select vendors, type up to 5 4-digit vendor numbers.
The report includes only Plan Codes assigned to one of
these vendors.
10/2010
5-53
Not Posted?
status.
Report Samples
The following sample reports illustrate for a very small employee base the reports
produced under each of the Sort by selections.
Sorted by Employee, then Election Date
Vendor: 020051
Benefits Employee Plan Assignments Listing
Sort By Employee Name
KAISER FOUNDATION HEALTH PLAN
J239
BM0240
H.01.00 03/17/06 PAGE
4
Plan Description
Level
Elect
End
Post
Empl.
Empr.
Total
SSN
Employee Name
BU ST RC Age
Date
Date
Date
Amount
Amount
Amount
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------KS2
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
000-00-0000 Mouse, Mickey
000-00-0000 Potter, Harry
PLAN KS2
/ LEVEL E1
PLAN KS2
5-54
E1
- COUNT:
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
10 SH 20
60
07/01/01
00 CL 00
62
10/01/00
2
- COUNT:
2
VENDOR 020051 - COUNT:
2
PLAN KS2
/ LEVEL E1
PLAN KS2
183.61
253.08
---------- TOTALS:
436.69
- TOTALS:
VENDOR 020051 - TOTALS:
436.69
436.69
183.61
84.36
---------267.97
267.97
267.97
367.22
337.44
---------704.66
704.66
704.66
10/2010
Sorted by Election Date, then Employee
Benefits Employee Plan Assignments Listing
J240
BM0240
H.01.00 03/17/06 PAGE
4
Sort By Election Date
Vendor: 020051
KAISER FOUNDATION HEALTH PLAN
Plan Description
Level
Elect
End
Post
Empl.
Empr.
Total
SSN
Employee Name
BU ST RC Age
Date
Date
Date
Amount
Amount
Amount
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------KS2
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
000-00-0000 Potter, Harry
000-00-0000 Mouse, Mickey
PLAN KS2
/ LEVEL E1
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
00 CL 00
62
10/01/00
10 SH 20
60
07/01/01
- COUNT:
2
- COUNT:
2
VENDOR 020051 - COUNT:
2
PLAN KS2
10/2010
E1
PLAN KS2
/ LEVEL E1
PLAN KS2
253.08
183.61
---------- TOTALS:
436.69
84.36
183.61
---------267.97
337.44
367.22
---------704.66
- TOTALS:
436.69
267.97
704.66
436.69
267.97
704.66
5-55
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report (BM0250) allows you to compare your benefit records against the billing statements received from benefit providers. It is organized first by benefit provider and then alphabetically by employee. Optional
selections can be made by bargaining unit and report code. There is the capability to
include employee comments on the report.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefit Plan
Reconciliation Report (BM0250) from the Request Benefits Reconciliation Report
(BM0250) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the same for
all reports, see page 5-10.
page 5-26.
Open a Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) window from the Job
5-56
10/2010
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) window.
Figure 5-29 illustrates the Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) window.
Report Title
10/2010
Type a title up to 30 characters long that prints on the upper left
corner of each page.
5-57
Figure 5-29: Main Selection tab for the Request Benefits Reconciliation Report (BM0250) window
Bargaining Unit
♦ Leave blank to report employees assigned to any Bargaining Unit code.
♦ To select employees, type up to 5 Bargaining Unit codes.
Report Code
♦ Leave blank to report employees assigned to any Report
Code.
♦ To select employees, type or select up to 5 Report Codes.
5-58
10/2010
Print Comments
♦ Blank or No to suppress the printing of employee comments.
♦ Yes to print employee comments.
Report Sample
Vendor: 020046
Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report
DELTA DENTAL
J299
ADDITIONS
BM0250
H.01.00 04/04/06 PAGE
2
REPORT MONTH: APRIL, 2006
Plan
Level
Elect
End
Post
Empe
Empr
Total
Name / Comments
SSN
Date
Date
Date
Amount
Amount
Amount
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DDCL DELTA DENTAL - CLASSIFIED
Potter, Harry
E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
000-00-0000
03/22/02
- TOTALS:
7.86
---------7.86
31.46
---------31.46
39.32
---------39.32
- TOTALS:
15.35
15.35
---------30.70
61.42
61.42
---------122.84
76.77
76.77
---------153.54
PLAN DDCL - TOTALS:
38.56
154.30
192.86
38.56
154.30
192.86
PLAN DDCL / LEVEL E
DDCL DELTA DENTAL - CLASSIFIED
Mouse, Minnie
Oop, Alley
E1
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
000-00-0000
07/01/01
000-00-0000
10/01/00
PLAN DDCL / LEVEL E1
10/2010
5-59
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
This report lists the billing information for each employee selected in the report,
including plans and the premium breakdown for each plan, for both employee and
employer. Total costs for each employee are also listed. When sorted by plan, it shows
the totals owed to each plan from the employee and from the employer. This facilitates writing out one check for all employees to each plan or each vendor.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Request Billing
Report (BM0210) window from the Billing Report (BM0210). For a description of
the parts of the window that are the same for all reports, see page 5-10.
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Billing Report (BM0210) window from the Job Menu window. For
detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window from the Job Menu Window” on page 5-19.
5-60
10/2010
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window.
job number to locate the report in Print Manager.c
Table 5-10: Tabs for the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window
TAB
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Report Selections
Select the employees to include on the report by Bargaining
Unit, Package Code, Plan Code, and other selections.
5-61
Select Employee
Select up to 20 individual employees by their SSN.
5-65
Figure 5-30 illustrates the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window. See “Filling In
Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in text boxes, selecting
options from drop-down lists, selecting dates, checking boxes, and selecting option
buttons.
10/2010
5-61
Figure 5-30: Report Selections tab for the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window
Report title
Sort by
♦ Bargaining Unit
♦ Employee Name
♦ Package
♦ Benefit Status
5-62
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
10/2010
Plan Code/Level
codes.
Plan Range
Vendor Numbers
numbers.
Plan Cutoff Date
Type or select the date to be used for the selection of records
for the report.
The report will select only those employee records for
which the Plan cutoff date falls after the Election date and
prior to the Exit date.
Section 125
Primary
10/2010
5-63
Cobra
M Flag
D Flag
Print Total
♦ Yes to print totals for the selected sort code: bargaining
unit, employee name, plan, or benefit status. Print also
grand totals: employee, employer, and both combined.
♦ No to suppress totals.
Print Dependents
♦ Yes to print the dependents for each employee. All
dependents in the database will be listed, whether their
coverage is current or not.
♦ No to suppress printing dependents.
Not Posted?
status.
5-64
10/2010
Figure 5-31 illustrates the Select Employees tab for the Request Billing Report
(BM0210) window. This entire tab is optional.
Figure 5-31: Select Employees for the Request Billing Report (BM0210) window
[SSN]
10/2010
5-65
Report Samples
Sample with Dependents
The following is the last page of the report requested in Figure 5-30. Because the
report is sorted by employee name, it shows totals for each employee, as well as the
grand totals listed at the bottom of the page.
SHOW DEPENDENTS
BILLING REPORT
J249
BM0210
H.01.02 03/21/06 PAGE
4
Employee
125
Pst
Empl.
Empr.
Total
Name
SSN
BU RC
P C M D
Plan
Level
Amount
Amount
Amount
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DUCK DAFFY
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
DELTA DENTAL - CLASSIFIED EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
Employee Total
DUCK DAFFY
PAN PETER
Dependents:
DAFFODIL
000-00-0000 10 20 Y Y Y
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y Y
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
AMERICAN FIDELITY-DISABIL EMPLOYEE ONLY
JOHN HANCOCK MUTUAL LIFE EMPLOYEE TO AGE 4
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
Employee Total
RABBIT ROGER
Dependents:
Total number of employees:
MATHILDA
AURA
61.42
337.44
76.77
337.44
---------- ---------- ---------15.35
398.86
414.21
PARENT
Employee Total
RABBIT ROGER
15.35
.00
15.35
183.61
61.42
183.61
76.77
367.22
---------- ---------- ---------198.96
245.03
443.99
.00
15.35
1.50
253.08
107.00
61.42
1.50%
84.36
76.77
337.44
---------- ---------- ---------269.93
252.78
522.71
.00%
1.50%
1.50
PARENT
SPOUSE
25
Report Total
---------- ---------- ---------2327.00
8229.60
10556.60
Reading each column from left to right, we see employee name, social security number, bargaining unit, report code, the flags for Section 125, primary coverage, Cobra,
M, and D, post, the plan name, coverage level, employee amount, employer amount,
and total amount. Because the choice has been made to print dependents for this
report, dependent names and relationships are listed below each employee. Because
the choice has been made to print totals for this report, the total cost is listed at the
bottom, broken down for employer and all employees.
Sample by Plan
Figure 5-32 illustrates the first request screen for a billing report sorted by plan. When
sorted by plan, each plan has its own pages of employees with plan totals at the end of
the report.
5-66
10/2010
Figure 5-32: Report Request Screen for Billing Report Sorted by Plan
As a result of the report request in Figure 5-32, the following report shows all
employees enrolled in the Blue Cross Classified plan. Because this report is sorted by
plan, it shows totals for each plan, as well as the grand totals at the end of the report.
BY PLAN
BILLING REPORT
Sort by Plan
J250
BM0210
H.01.02 03/21/06 PAGE
2
Employee
125
Pst
Empl.
Empr.
Total
Name
SSN
BU RC
P C M D
Plan
Level
Amount
Amount
Amount
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------COYOTE WYLIE
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
EMPLOYEE PLUS TWO
.00
561.18
CRICKET JIMINY
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
EMPLOYEE PLUS TWO
.00
561.18
DOONESBURY MIKE
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
81.97
292.84
DUCK DONALD
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
.00
374.81
FLINTSTONE FRED
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y Y
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
248.21
148.93
FROG KERMIT
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
EMPLOYEE ONLY
.00
163.25
Number of employees:
6
Total plan BCCL
---------- ---------- ---------330.18
2102.19
2432.37
Sample with Multiple Plans by One Insurer
Figure 5-33 illustrates a request for several plans offered by one insurer, and the
resulting report follows it. Notice that no specific levels were requested, only the
codes for the various Kaiser plans.
10/2010
5-67
Figure 5-33: Billing Report—Request for one insurer only
KAISER ONLY
BILLING REPORT
J251
BM0210
H.01.02 03/21/06 PAGE
1
Employee
125
Pst
Empl.
Empr.
Total
Name
SSN
BU RC
P C M D
Plan
Level
Amount
Amount
Amount
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ANTHONY SUSAN B
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y Y
EMPLOYEE ONLY
.00
170.32
170.32
---------- ---------- ---------Employee Total
.00
170.32
170.32
ANTHONY MARC
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
EMPLOYEE ONLY
ANTOINETTE MARIE
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
KAISER BASIC
EMPLOYEE ONLY
.00
164.84
164.84
---------- ---------- ---------Employee Total
.00
164.84
164.84
Employee Total
BALL LUCILLE
BALL LUCILLE
BARTON CLARA
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
Dependents:
JUDE
000-00-0000 00 00 Y Y N
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
200.00
200.00
400.00
---------- ---------- ---------200.00
200.00
400.00
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
.00
337.44
337.44
---------- ---------- ---------Employee Total
.00
337.44
337.44
CHILD
KAISER - CLASSIFIED
EMPLOYEE ONLY
.00
164.84
164.84
---------- ---------- ---------Employee Total
.00
164.84
164.84
Reading each column from left to right, we see employee name, social security number, bargaining unit, report code, the flags for Section 125, primary coverage, Cobra,
M, and D, post, the plan name, coverage level, employee amount, employer amount,
and total amount. Because the choice has been made to print dependents for this
5-68
10/2010
report, dependent names and relationships are listed below each employee. Because
the choice has been made to print totals for this report, the total cost is listed at the
bottom, broken down for employer and all employees.
These totals make it easy to write one check to each vendor for several plans offered
by that vendor.
10/2010
5-69
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Dependents Report (BM0220) lists all the dependents covered for each employee
selected in the report. Moreover, it will allow you to specify a date range within which
to report all dependents who will become ineligible for coverage under the parent’s
plan. This will allow your district to stop making premium payments at the correct
time, rather than getting a refund some months after the insurance company has
informed you that the dependent is no longer covered.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Dependents
Report (BM0220) from the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window. For a
description of the parts of the window that are the same for all reports, see page 5-10.
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window from the Job Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window from the Job
Menu Window” on page 5-19.
5-70
10/2010
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window.
Table 5-11: Tabs for the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window
TAB
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Report Selections
Select the employees for whom to report dependents and
age of dependents to report.
5-71
Select Employees
Select up to 20 individual employees for whom to report
dependents.
5-75
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window. See “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in text boxes,
selecting options from drop-down lists, selecting dates, checking boxes, and selecting
option buttons.
10/2010
5-71
Figure 5-34: Report Selections tab for the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window
Report Title
Sort by
♦ Bargaining Unit and Then Employee Name
♦ Employee Name
Dependent Sort
♦ Name
♦ Date of Birth
5-72
10/2010
♦ Relation to Employee
♦ Coverage End Date
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
Plan Code/Level
codes.
Plan Range
Vendor Numbers
numbers.
Date of Birth
Plan Cutoff Date
Type or select a date.
This selection is based on the election date of the employee.
Employees with an election date on or before the plan cutoff
date will be listed only if they have dependents listed in the
Dependent tab of the Benefits Management form. All
dependents of such employees will be listed even if the
dependents were added after the cutoff date you specify
here.
10/2010
5-73
Section 125
NOTE: The following two flags are dependent on your answer to the Section 125 flag,
above. If an employee’s Section 125 flag is set to N on the Benefits Management form,
dependents of that employee will not be reported, regardless of whether their COBRA and
Other Coverage flags are set to Y or N.
Cobra
Other
♦ Blank to dependents with any flag.
♦ Yes to report only dependents flagged with yes.
♦ No to report only dependents flagged with no.
This selection is based on the contents of the Other column
on the Dependents tab of the Benefits Management (BM)
form.
5-74
M Flag
D Flag
10/2010
Active/inactive
Age Greater Than
as of date range
Type the age at which dependents become legally of age and
ineligible for parental coverage, then type or select a date
range.
For an example of how to do this, see Figure 5-36.
Dependent Codes
To limit the report, type or select up to 10 Dependent Codes,
each of which is 2 characters.
In the line below the codes, select one of the following:
♦ Include to have the report include dependents assigned
to any of the selected codes.
♦ Exclude to have the report include all dependents except
those assigned to the specified codes.
Print Comments
♦ Blank or No to suppress the printing of comments.
♦ Yes to print employee comments.
Print Address and
Phone
♦ Blank or No to suppress printing the address and phone
number.
♦ Yes to print the address and phone number.
Figure 5-26 illustrates the Select Employees tab for the Request Dependents Report
(BM0220) window. This entire tab is optional.
[SSN]
10/2010
5-75
Figure 5-35: Select Employees for the Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window
5-76
10/2010
Report Sample
All Dependents
The first report shows all dependents. Because the dependents are sorted by date of
birth, the oldest is listed first under each employee.
ALL DEPENDENTS
DEPENDENTS REPORT
Sort by Employee Name and Birth Date
J242
BM0220
H.01.02 03/20/06 PAGE
1
Employee
Dependent
Birth
Dep
Start
End
Name
SSN
Name
SSN
Sex Date
Age Relation Date
Date
C O
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------BOOP BETTY
000-00-0000 MARVIN
VERNE
000-00-0000 M
000-00-0000 M
06/14/xxxx
11/01/xxxx
34 SPOUSE
13 CHILD
01/01/1992
N N
11/01/1992 11/01/2010 N N
BUMSTEAD BLONDIE
000-00-0000 JOSEPH
ELAINE
BRADLEY
000-00-0000 M
000-00-0000 F
000-00-0000 M
10/03/xxxx
05/07/xxxx
03/14/xxxx
27 CHILD
22 CHILD
21 CHILD
01/01/1984 11/01/1996 N Y
01/01/1984 05/07/2001 N N
03/14/1985 03/14/2003 N N
DUCK DAISY
000-00-0000 JASPER
000-00-0000 F
04/12/xxxx
54 SPOUSE
01/01/1997
LANE LOIS
000-00-0000 JUDE
000-00-0000 M
09/04/xxxx
15 CHILD
03/01/1995 09/04/2008 N N
MOUSE MICKEY
000-00-0000 JACK FOSTER
000-00-0000 M
12/18/xxxx
75 PARENT
12/01/1999
MOUSE MINNIE
000-00-0000 ALAN
000-00-0000 M
10/07/xxxx
18 CHILD
09/01/1996 10/07/2005 N N
PIG PORKY
000-00-0000 CHERYL
DANIEL
000-00-0000 F
000-00-0000 M
11/14/xxxx
05/27/xxxx
45 SPOUSE
24 CHILD
09/01/1993
N N
09/01/1993 05/27/2002 N Y
PIGGY MISS
000-00-0000 JULIE
000-00-0000 F
02/15/xxxx
16 CHILD
06/01/1994
POPPINS MARY
000-00-0000 LARRY
GARY
000-00-0000 F
000-00-0000 M
05/14/xxxx
09/08/xxxx
39 SPOUSE
17 CHILD
09/01/1995
N Y
09/01/1995 09/08/2006 N Y
POTTER HARRY
000-00-0000 ELENA
JORGE
JULIO
000-00-0000 F
000-00-0000 M
000-00-0000 M
08/18/xxxx
03/02/xxxx
11/01/xxxx
47 SPOUSE
23 CHILD
16 CHILD
09/01/1985
N N
09/01/1985 03/02/2001 N Y
11/01/1989 11/01/2007 N N
RABBIT PETER
000-00-0000 MATHILDA
000-00-0000 F
04/18/xxxx
56 PARENT
08/01/1999
N Y
N N
N N
N N
Age Restriction within Date Range
In Figure 5-36, the report request screen is restricted to show only those minor children who reach age 18 in the first six months of 2001. Notice the date range and the
dependent codes to include children and step-children only.
The report resulting from this request follows.
10/2010
5-77
Figure 5-36: Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window for dependents reaching age 18
In the following report, only those dependents reaching age 18 in fiscal 06/07 are
listed, as a result of the request screen shown in Figure 5-36.
DEPENDENTS REACHING AGE 18
DEPENDENTS REPORT
Sort by Employee Name and Birth Date
J244
BM0220
H.01.02 03/20/06 PAGE
1
Employee
Dependent
Birth
Dep
Start
End
Name
SSN
Name
SSN
Sex Date
Age Relation Date
Date
C O
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------POPPINS MARY
5-78
000-00-0000 GARY
000-00-0000 M
09/08/xxxx
17 CHILD
09/01/1995 09/08/2006 N Y
10/2010
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Life Insurance Benefit Listing (BM0270) prints information concerning those life insurance plans with a premium cost based upon a percent of the life benefit, or face value, of the
policy. The report can be sorted alphabetically by participating employee or by plan/level.
Selection of employees to be included on the report can be made on the basis of bargaining
unit, report code, benefit status code, plan and level code, vendor, active or inactive status,
and/or whether the employee or the employer pay the premium.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Life Insurance
Benefit Listing (BM0270) from the Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the same for all reports, see
page 5-10.
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window from the Job Menu
window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window from the Job
10/2010
5-79
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window.
Figure 5-37 illustrates the Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window. See
“Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in text
Report title
Many districts use this title to identify who launched the
report so the printout can be routed to its owner.
5-80
10/2010
Figure 5-37: Report Selections tab for the Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window
Sort by
♦ Employee Name
♦ Plan/Level
10/2010
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
Package Code
5-81
Plan Code/Level
codes.
Plan Range
Vendor Numbers
numbers.
Date of Birth
Active/Inactive
Premium Amounts Select an option from the list to report premiums paid by:
♦ Employee
♦ Employer
♦ Both
Not Posted?
status.
5-82
10/2010
Report Sample
This sample report was sorted by employee name.
Life Insurance Benefit Listing
J778
BM0270
H.01.02 07/10/06 PAGE
1
Employee
Elect
Exit
Plan /
Incre
Life
Employee Employer
Name
SSN
BU RC ST Date
Date
Pst Level
-ment Units
Benefit
Rate
Premium
Premium
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Buehler, Ferris
000-00-0000
50 55 CL 01/01/05
N
BLIF/ANY
Cricket, Jiminy
000-00-0000
40 41 CE 01/01/05
N
OTLE/3034
Employee Count:
10/2010
2
1000
12.00
12000.00
1.86
.93
.93
10000
10.00
100000.00
6.60
5.50
.00
Grand Totals:
------------112,000.00
--------- --------6.43
.93
5-83
This heading documents the following processes for Benefits Management:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window allows you to launch the Benefit Management Recalculation Report (BM0855). This process globally recalculates
the employee and employer amounts displayed on the Benefits Management (BM)
form of the Employee Maintenance window for the current active record, based on
the employee’s FTE in effect on the start date. When changes are made, this program
will automatically recalculate the benefits for every employee who has the specified
benefit(s). You do not have to manually change the data for each employee. However,
the recalculation process by itself will not preserve an audit trail of records before the
recalculation.
The Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window is a part of a series of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits Management (BM) form of the
Employee Maintenance window.
1 Use the Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window to roll benefits management records forward from one year to the next. For details, see page
5-114.
2 Make mass adjustments to the Benefits Management (BM) form.
 The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) window
allows you to change or replace plans within packages. For details, see page
5-103.
5-84
10/2010
 The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) window allows
you to delete plans from packages. For details, see page 5-109.
 The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) window allows
you to add plans to packages. For details, see page 5-97.
3 Use the Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window to recalculate the
employee- and employer-paid amounts on the Benefits Management (BM) form.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefit Management Recalculation Report (BM0855) from the Request Benefit Recalculation
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window from the Job Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window from the Job
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window.
10/2010
5-85
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window.
Report Title
Sort by
♦ Bargaining Unit
♦ Employee Name
Run Mode
♦ Report Only to create a report to preview the billing
amounts in the reports.
♦ Update, Save Changes to create invoices in Invoicing/Billing Management.
5-86
10/2010
Figure 5-38: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window
QSS recommends that you run this process in Report Only
mode first. Review the report carefully, then make any
needed changes. Once the reports are correct, run the process in Update, Save Changes mode.
Update Locked
FTE’s
♦ Select the check box to update FTEs that are locked on
the Benefits Management (BM) form of the Employee
Maintenance window.
♦ Clear the check box to leave locked FTE’s unchanged.
Locked Salary
♦ Select the check box to update salaries that are locked on
the Benefits Management (BM) form.
♦ Clear the check box to leave locked salaries unchanged.
10/2010
5-87
Position Control
Year
If you select the Locked Salary check box, type the 2-digit fiscal year to use for Position Control, such as 10 for FY 2009 2010.
CAUTION: If you site is not using Position Control, clear the Update Locked FTE’s and
Locked Salary check boxes.If you do not, the process will encounter errors like the
following: Cannot calculate FTE: No prime position on file for the
requested year and date.
Update Locked
Amounts Employee
Employer
♦ Select the check box to update locked benefit amounts on
the Benefits Management (BM) form.
♦ Clear the check box to not update locked amounts.
QSS recommends that you check both boxes if you are
going to update locked amounts.
Start Date
Type or select the date you want the recalculation to take place.
The recalculation will be based on the employees’ FTE on
this start date and will use the plan/level records for this
date.
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
Package/Level
Code
Level codes.
For each pair of codes, you can select just a Package Code to
report all Coverage Level codes associated with it. However, if
5-88
10/2010
you specify a Coverage Level code, you must also specify a
Package Code.
Plan Code/Level
codes.
Plan Range
Vendor Numbers
numbers.
All Plans Posted
♦ Blank or No for include all.
♦ Yes to roll over only plans that have been reconciled, or
posted.
Section 125
10/2010
5-89
Primary
Cobra
M Flag
D Flag
Report Sample
The following Benefit Management Recalculation Report (BM0855) was generated
before benefit deductions were rolled over to a new plan year. It was done in Report
Only run mode. It illustrates the deduction amounts that would be in effect if an actual
recalculation were done. This allows you to check results before making actual
changes.
5-90
10/2010
65 QSS Unified School District
BEFORE ROLL-OVER
Benefit Management Recalculation Report
J933
BM0855
H.00.02 12/21/00 PAGE
1
Employee
Eligible
Election
Sect Pri- Cob- FTE
Alloc- Employee Employer
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
125 mary ra
Rule FTE
ation Percent Percent
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------OOP ALLEY
Package:
Plan:
EM
BCCL
000-00-0000
PE
EMPLOYEE BASIC
12/01/1999 12/01/1999
Y
Level: E1
EMPLOYEE + ONE
E1
EMPLOYEE + ONE
Y
N
BN L
Totals
PAN PETER
Package:
Plan:
KT
KS1
DDCT
JHL
VIST
000-00-0000
AD
06/01/1994 06/01/1994
KAISER - CERTIFICATED COMPLETE Level: E1
EMPLOYEE
KAISER - CERTIFICATED
E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
A39
EMPLOYEE
MSIA/VISION FUND CERTIFICATED
E1
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
+ ONE
+ ONE
+ ONE
TO AGE 39
+ ONE
Y
BN L
Totals
PIG PORKY
Package:
Plan:
BT
BCCT
DDCT
CML
VIST
000-00-0000
CE
10/01/1976 10/01/1976
BLUE CROSS CERTIFICATED COMPLT Level: E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
CONNECTICUT MUTUAL LIFE
A49
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
+ ONE
+ ONE
+ ONE
TO AGE 49
+ ONE
Y
PP L
Totals
PIGGY MISS
Package: BL
Plan: BCCL
DDCL
CML
VISL
000-00-0000
CL
06/01/1989 06/01/1989
BLUE CROSS CLASSIFIED COMPLETE Level: E
EMPLOYEE
E
EMPLOYEE
E
EMPLOYEE
A39
EMPLOYEE
MSIA/VISION FUND CLASSIFIED
E
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
TO AGE 39
ONLY
Y
AP L
Totals
POPPINS MARY
Package: EM
Plan: BCCL
000-00-0000
CL
EMPLOYEE BASIC
10/01/1997 10/18/2000
Y
Y
Level: E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E2
EMPLOYEE + 2 OR MORE
N
AP L
Totals
POTTER HARRY
Package: 5T
Plan: KS1
DDCT
000-00-0000
CE
03/01/1988 07/01/1991
Y
Level: E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
Y
AP L
Totals
RABBIT PETER
Package: 8L
Plan: BCCL
DDCL
CML
VISL
AFDS
000-00-0000
CL
05/01/2000 05/01/2000
Level: E2
EMPLOYEE
E2
EMPLOYEE
E2
EMPLOYEE
A49
EMPLOYEE
E2
EMPLOYEE
AMERICAN FIDELITY - DISABILITY
E
EMPLOYEE
Y
+ 2 OR
+ 2 OR
+ 2 OR
TO AGE
+ 2 OR
ONLY
Y
MORE
MORE
MORE
49
MORE
Y
HP L
Totals
10/2010
0.5000
Empe Amt
187.40
-------187.40
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
12.00
0.00
2.00
-------14.00
0.00%
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
12.00
1.80%
2.00
-------14.00
1.80%
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
7.86
0.30%
2.00
-------9.86
0.30%
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
L
187.41 L
374.81
--------------187.41
374.81
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
325.07 L
325.07
48.00 L
60.00
1.00% L
1.00%
10.00 L
12.00
--------------383.07
397.07
1.00%
1.00%
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
358.75 L
358.75
48.00 L
60.00
1.00% L
2.80%
10.00 L
12.00
--------------416.75
430.75
1.00%
2.80%
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
163.25 L
163.25
31.46 L
39.32
0.90% L
1.20%
10.00 L
12.00
--------------204.71
214.57
0.90%
1.20%
0.6875
Empe Amt
175.37
-------175.37
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
L
385.81 L
561.18
--------------385.81
561.18
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
6.00
-------6.00
L
L
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
26.55
1.80%
2.00
0.00
-------28.55
1.80%
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
153.57 L
153.57
24.00 L
30.00
--------------177.57
183.57
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
561.18 L
561.18
106.21 L
132.76
1.00% L
2.80%
10.00 L
12.00
107.00 L
107.00
--------------784.39
812.94
L
1.00% L
2.80%
L
L
L
L
L
5-91
Recalculation Error Report
The previous report revealed some errors, as shown in the following error report. The
error report is generated automatically at the same time as the recalculation report and
has the same job number. It shows what needs to be changed before the actual recalculation should be done.
Benefit Management Recalculation Errors
J933
BM0855
H.00.02 01/09/01 PAGE
FOR ANN
Employee
Name
SSN
Error
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SKYWALKER LUKE
000-00-0000
Cannot calculate FTE:
No positions on file for request year.
SMART MAXWELL
000-00-0000
No prime position on file for requested year and date.
SOLO HAN
000-00-0000
No prime position on file for requested year and date.
1
Sample Recalculation Report—After a Roll-Over
The following report illustrates the new premium amounts for both employee and
employer after a roll-over. By comparing it with the previous recalculation report, you
can see that the amounts for each employee have changed because of the roll-over.
5-92
10/2010
AFTER ROLL-OVER
J950
BM0855
H.00.02 01/09/01 PAGE
1
Employee
Eligible
Election
Sect Pri- Cob- FTE
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
125 mary ra
Rule FTE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------OOP ALLEY
Package:
Plan:
EM
BCCL
000-00-0000
PE
EMPLOYEE BASIC
12/01/1999 01/01/2001
Y
Level: E1
EMPLOYEE + ONE
E1
EMPLOYEE + ONE
Y
N
BN L
Totals
PAN PETER
Package:
Plan:
KT
KS1
DDCT
JHL
VIST
000-00-0000
AD
06/01/1994 01/01/2001
KAISER - CERTIFICATED COMPLETE Level: E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
A39
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
+ ONE
+ ONE
+ ONE
TO AGE 39
+ ONE
Y
BN L
Totals
PIG PORKY
Package:
Plan:
BT
BCCT
DDCT
CML
VIST
000-00-0000
CE
10/01/1976 01/01/2001
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
A49
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
+ ONE
+ ONE
+ ONE
TO AGE 49
+ ONE
Y
PP L
Totals
PIGGY MISS
Package: BL
Plan: BCCL
DDCL
CML
VISL
000-00-0000
CL
06/01/1989 01/01/2001
BLUE CROSS CLASSIFIED COMPLETE Level: E
EMPLOYEE
E
EMPLOYEE
E
EMPLOYEE
A39
EMPLOYEE
E
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
ONLY
ONLY
ONLY
TO AGE 39
ONLY
Y
AP L
Totals
POPPINS MARY
Package: EM
Plan: BCCL
000-00-0000
CL
EMPLOYEE BASIC
10/01/1997 01/01/2001
Y
Y
Level: E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E2
EMPLOYEE + 2 OR MORE
N
AP L
Totals
POTTER HARRY
Package: 5T
Plan: KS1
DDCT
000-00-00000
CE
03/01/1988
Level: E
E
E
01/01/2001
Y
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
Y
AP L
Totals
RABBIT PETER
Package: 8L
Plan: BCCL
DDCL
CML
VISL
AFDS
000-00-0000
CL
05/01/2000 01/01/2001
Level: E2
EMPLOYEE
E2
EMPLOYEE
E2
EMPLOYEE
A49
EMPLOYEE
E2
EMPLOYEE
AMERICAN FIDELITY - DISABILITY
E
EMPLOYEE
Y
+ 2 OR
+ 2 OR
+ 2 OR
TO AGE
+ 2 OR
ONLY
Y
MORE
MORE
MORE
49
MORE
Y
HP L
Totals
RABBIT ROGER
Package: BL
Plan: BCCL
DDCL
CML
VISL
000-00-0000
CL
10/01/1977 01/01/2001
BLUE CROSS CLASSIFIED COMPLETE Level: E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
A59
EMPLOYEE
E1
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
+ ONE
+ ONE
+ ONE
TO AGE 59
+ ONE
Y
AP L
Totals
SIMPSON BART
10/2010
000-00-0000
BM
03/01/1995
01/01/2001
Y
Y
Y
BN L
0.5000
Empe Amt
198.57
-------198.57
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
12.00
0.00
3.00
-------15.00
0.00%
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
12.00
1.80%
3.00
-------15.00
1.80%
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
7.86
0.30%
3.00
-------10.86
0.30%
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
L
198.57 L
397.14
--------------198.57
397.14
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
347.58 L
347.58
48.00 L
60.00
1.00% L
1.00%
12.00 L
15.00
--------------407.58
422.58
1.00%
1.00%
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
381.20 L
381.20
48.00 L
60.00
1.00% L
2.80%
12.00 L
15.00
--------------441.20
456.20
1.00%
2.80%
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
181.57 L
181.57
31.46 L
39.32
0.90% L
1.20%
12.00 L
15.00
--------------225.03
235.89
0.90%
1.20%
0.6875
Empe Amt
182.95
-------182.95
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
L
402.48 L
585.43
--------------402.48
585.43
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00
6.00
-------6.00
L
L
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
170.32 L
170.32
24.00 L
30.00
--------------194.32
200.32
1.0000
100.00
100.00
Empe Amt
Empr Amt
Totals
0.00 L
585.43 L
585.43
26.55 L
106.21 L
132.76
1.80% L
1.00% L
2.80%
3.00 L
12.00 L
15.00
0.00 L
107.00 L
107.00
---------------------29.55
810.64
840.19
1.80%
1.00%
2.80%
0.7813
100.00
100.00
Empe Amt
Empr Amt
Totals
86.85 L
310.29 L
397.14
15.35 L
61.42 L
76.77
5.70% L
2.00% L
7.70%
3.00 L
12.00 L
15.00
---------------------105.20
383.71
488.91
5.70%
2.00%
7.70%
1.0000
100.00
100.00
5-93
Sample Recalculation Report—After a Mass FTE Change
Notice how the following imaginary district does a recalculation for a group of
employees whose FTE has changed. They all have a benefit status code, as shown on
the Benefits Management (BM) Screen, that applies to that group only, so it is easier
to do a group recalculation than to do it for one employee at a time on the Payroll Pay
Line (PR) Screen.
First the district wants to see the figures as they are before the recalculation. Since a
Recalculation Report shows the “after” picture, either real or what-if, the district uses
a different report to show the actual state of affairs before the recalculation. Here a
Benefit Information Listing Report of active records done before the recalculation
shows the following. (For more information on this type of report, see page 6-13 of
Chapter 6 of this manual.)
BENEFIT INFORMATION LISTING
OLD FTE
J125
BM0200
H.00.01 05/03/01 PAGE
1
Employee
Eligible
Election
Exit
Sect Pri- Cob- FTE
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
Date
125 mary ra
Rule FTE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------KENT CLARK
Package: 5T
Plan: KS1
DDCT
LANE LOIS
Package:
Plan:
000-00-0000
PT
11/01/1991 11/01/1991
Y
Level: E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
000-00-0000
PT
09/01/1996
BT
BLUE CROSS CERTIFICATED COMPLT Level:
BCCT BLUE CROSS - CERTIFICATED
DDCT DELTA DENTAL - CERTIFICATED
CML
Y
09/01/1996
Y
Y
E1
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
E1
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
E1
EMPLOYEE PLUS ONE
A39
EMPLOYEE TO AGE 39
N
AP L
0.4000
100.00
100.00
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
115.18 L
38.39 L
153.57
6.00 L
24.00 L
30.00
---------------------Totals
121.18
62.39
183.57
N
PP L
Totals
0.2500
100.00
100.00
Empe amt
Empr amt
Totals
269.06 L
89.69 L
358.75
12.00 L
48.00 L
60.00
0.30% L
0.90% L
1.20
---------------------281.06
137.69
418.75
0.30%
0.90%
1.20%
Notice that before the FTE change and recalculation, employee Clark Kent pays
$115.18 each pay period for medical coverage, while the employer pays $38.39. Lois
Lane pays $269.06 for medical coverage, and the employer pays $89.69. From this
report you can also see their FTEs upon which the medical premium portions are
based.
5-94
10/2010
Figure 5-39: Report Selections tab for Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850)
Figure 5-39 shows the recalculation parameters that are reflected in the following
report. For the amounts to change due to an FTE change, the Update Locked FTE’s
field must be set to Y.
RECALC FTE'S FOR PT
J133
BM0855
H.00.02 05/04/01 PAGE
1
Employee
Eligible
Election
Sect Pri- Cob- FTE
AllocEmployee Employer
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
125 mary ra
Rule FTE ation
Percent
Percent
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------KENT CLARK
Package: 5T
Plan: KS1
DDCT
000-00-0000
PT
11/01/1991 07/01/1993
Y
Level: E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
E
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
Y
AP L
Totals
LANE LOIS
Package:
Plan:
000-00-0000
PT
09/01/1996 09/01/1996
BT
EMPLOYEE
BCCT BLUE CROSS - CERTIFICATED
E1
EMPLOYEE
DDCT DELTA DENTAL - CERTIFICATED
E1
EMPLOYEE
CML
A39
EMPLOYEE
Y
Y
PLUS ONE
PLUS ONE
PLUS ONE
TO AGE 39
N
PP L
Totals
10/2010
0.7500
100.00
Empe Amt
Empr Amt
0.00 L
153.57 L
6.00 L
24.00 L
--------------6.00
177.57
100.00
Totals
153.57
30.00
-------183.57
0.5000
100.00
100.00
Empe Amt
Empr Amt
Totals
179.37 L
179.38 L
358.75
12.00 L
48.00 L
60.00
0.30% L
0.90% L
1.20%
---------------------191.37
227.38
418.75
0.30%
0.90%
1.20%
5-95
After the FTE change and recalculation, Clark Kent pays nothing for medical coverage, while the employer pays $153.57 each pay period. Lois Lane pays $179.37 for
medical coverage, and the employer pays $179.38.
5-96
10/2010
Window
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
When to Use This Process
Report Sample
Purpose
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) window is a part of a
series of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits Management
(BM) form of the Employee Maintenance window. This window allows you to do a
mass add of plans to benefit packages on the Benefits Management (BM) form. The
Mass Benefit Plan Add Report (BM0835) lists the results of this update.
5-114.
5-103.
you to add plans to packages.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Mass Benefit
Plan Add Report (BM0835) from the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add
10/2010
5-97
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) window from the
Job Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch Window
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830)
window.
5-98
10/2010
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830)
Figure 5-40: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add (BM0830) window
Required Selections
Fill in the boxes on the top of the window to select how to sort the report and the plans
to update.
10/2010
5-99
Report Title
Sort
Select an option for sorting the report:
♦ Employee
♦ Bargaining Unit
Run Mode
♦ Report Only to produce a Mass Benefit Plan Add
Report (BM0835) that is a preview of the effect of adding plans.
♦ Update, Save Changes to update the Benefits Management (BM) form of the Employee Maintenance window.
The Mass Benefit Plan Add Report (BM0835) is a list of
the changes mode.
QSS suggests that you use Report Only mode to preview
the changes before running the process in Update, Save
Changes mode.
Plans to Have/Add
Select up to 10 Plan Codes for adding new plans.
Each pair of boxes has a “Have” box on the left and an
“Add” box on the right.
Have box
Add box
♦ In the “Have” box, type a Plan Code that is currently
assigned to employees.
♦ In the “Add” box, type a plan code to be added to the
benefit package on the Benefits Management (BM)
form.
The process searches for employees assigned to a Package
Code that includes the Plan Code in the “Have” box, then
updates the employee’s Benefits Management (BM) form
with the Plan Code in the “Add” box.
5-100
10/2010
You can use the Select Plan Have and Select Plan Add
icons to look up the plans for filling in the boxes.
Optional Selections
The remainder of the window is optional. Leave it blank to select all employees in
your district. To select employees, fill in one or more of the optional selections.
Bargaining Unit
To select employees, type or select up to 5 Bargaining Unit
codes, each of which is 2 characters.
Benefit Status
To select employees, type or select up to 5 Benefit Status
Package
To select employees, type or select up to 5 Package Codes,
Report Sample
The following sample report shows employees to which the plan XTRA has been
added.
57 SMARTVILLE UNIFIED
MASS BENEFIT PLAN ADD REPORT
J3921
BM0835
H.00.00 06/15/05 PAGE
1
Employee
Start
Added
Employee
Employer
Name
SSN
Package
Level
Date
Plan Level
Amount
Amount
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAESAR AUGUSTUS
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
CAESAR JULIUS
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
CAESAR SID
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
A Recalculation Report (BM0850) run after the Mass Plan Add update shows the
addition of the XTRA plan for the selected employees.
10/2010
5-101
The Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window is discussed beginning on
page 5-84.
J3922
BM0855
H.00.07 06/15/05 PAGE
1
Employee
Eligible
Election
Barg Sect Pri- Cob- FTE
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
Unit 125 mary ra
Rule FTE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CAESAR AUGUSTUS
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
XTRA
000-00-0000
S1
11/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
PROVIDENT LIFE & ACCIDENT
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
XTRA PLAN CODE FOR DEMONSTRATN
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
CAESAR JULIUS
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
XTRA
000-00-0000
13
06/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
CAESAR SID
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
XTRA
000-00-0000
11
06/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
BN L
Totals
BN L
Totals
BN L
Totals
5-102
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00 L
1.25 L
-------1.25
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
20.00 L
20.00
7.75 L
9.00
--------------27.75
29.00
0.7500
Empe Amt
0.00 L
1.25 L
-------1.25
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
20.00 L
20.00
7.75 L
9.00
--------------27.75
29.00
0.4600
Empe Amt
20.00 L
1.25 L
-------21.25
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
0.00 L
20.00
7.75 L
9.00
--------------7.75
29.00
10/2010
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810)
Window
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) window is a part of
a series of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits Management
mass update to Plan Codes already assigned to employees on the Benefits Management (BM) form. The Mass Benefit Plan Change Report (BM0815) lists the results of
this update.
5-114.
allows you to change or replace plans within packages.
Plan Change Report (BM0815) from the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan
Change (BM0810) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the
10/2010
5-103
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) window from
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810)
window.
5-104
10/2010
Figure 5-41 illustrates the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change
(BM0810) window. See “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in text boxes, selecting options from drop-down lists, selecting dates,
checking boxes, and selecting option buttons.
Figure 5-41: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Change (BM0810) window
Required Selections
to update.
Report Title
10/2010
5-105
Sort
♦ Employee
♦ Bargaining Unit
Run Mode
♦ Report Only to produce a Mass Benefit Plan Change
The Mass Benefit Plan Change Report (BM0815) is a list
of the changes made.
Changes mode.
Plans to Change
Old/New
Select up to 10 Plan Codes for changing plans.
Each pair of boxes has a “Old” box on the left and an
“New” box on the right.
Old box
New box
♦ In the “Old” box, type a Plan Code that is currently
assigned to employees.
♦ In the “New” box, type a Plan Code to replace the old
one.
The process searches for employees assigned to a Package
Code that includes the Plan Code in the “Old” box, then
replaces the employee’s Benefits Management (BM) form
with the Plan Code in the “New” box.
You can use the Select Old Plan and Select New Plan icons
to look up the plans for filling in the boxes.
5-106
10/2010
Optional Selections
Bargaining Unit
Benefit Status
Package
Report Sample
The following sample report shows employees to which the plan XTRA has been
added.
MASS BENEFIT PLAN ADD REPORT
J3921
BM0835
H.00.00 06/15/05 PAGE
1
Employee
Start
Added
Employee
Employer
Name
SSN
Package
Level
Date
Plan Level
Amount
Amount
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAESAR AUGUSTUS
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
CAESAR JULIUS
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
CAESAR SID
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
A Recalculation Report (BM0850) run after the Mass Plan Add update shows the
addition of the XTRA plan for the selected employees.
10/2010
5-107
J3922
BM0855
H.00.07 06/15/05 PAGE
1
Employee
Eligible
Election
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
Unit 125 mary ra
Rule FTE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------CAESAR AUGUSTUS
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
XTRA
000-00-0000
S1
11/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
BN L
Totals
CAESAR JULIUS
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
XTRA
000-00-0000
13
06/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
BN L
Totals
CAESAR SID
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
XTRA
000-00-0000
11
06/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
BN L
Totals
5-108
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00 L
1.25 L
-------1.25
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
20.00 L
20.00
7.75 L
9.00
--------------27.75
29.00
0.7500
Empe Amt
0.00 L
1.25 L
-------1.25
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
20.00 L
20.00
7.75 L
9.00
--------------27.75
29.00
0.4600
Empe Amt
20.00 L
1.25 L
-------21.25
100.00
100.00
Empr Amt
Totals
0.00 L
20.00
7.75 L
9.00
--------------7.75
29.00
10/2010
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820)
Window
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) window is a part of a
series of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits Management
mass deletion of Plan Codes from the Demographic (MA) form. The Mass Benefit
Plan Delete Report (BM0825) lists the results of this mass deletion.
5-114.
5-103.
you to delete plans from packages.
Plan Delete Report (BM0825) from the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan
Delete (BM0820) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the
10/2010
5-109
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) window from
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820)
window.
5-110
10/2010
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820)
Figure 5-42: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Delete (BM0820) window
Required Selections
to update.
Report Title
10/2010
5-111
Sort
♦ Employee
♦ Bargaining Unit
Run Mode
♦ Report Only to produce a Mass Benefit Plan Delete
The Mass Benefit Plan Delete Report (BM0825) is a list
of the changes mode.
Changes mode.
Plan Codes
Type or select up to 10 Plan Codes to delete.
The update process deletes the selected Plan Codes from the
Benefits Management (BM) form for all employees who
have a Package Code that includes these plans.
Optional Selections
Bargaining Unit
Benefit Status
Package
Report Sample
The following sample report shows that the plan XTRA will be deleted from the listed
employees.
5-112
10/2010
MASS BENEFIT PLAN DELETE REPORT
J3933
BM0825
H.00.00 06/15/05 PAGE
1
Employee
Start
Deleted
Employee
Employer
Name
SSN
Package
Level
Date
Plan Level
Amount
Amount
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ANTHONY MARC
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
ANTHONY SUSAN B
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
ANTOINETTE MARIE
000-00-0000
03 LIFEONLY
EE
EE ONLY
07/01/2001
XTRA
EE
0.00
L
0.00
L
A Recalculation Report (BM0850) run after the update of the Mass Plan Delete shows
the removal of the XTRA plan from Package 03.
The Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window is discussed beginning on
page 5-56.
finalizing delete
J3935
BM0855
H.00.07 06/15/05 PAGE
1
Employee
Eligible
Election
Name
SSN
Status Date
Date
Unit 125 mary ra
Rule FTE
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ANTHONY MARC
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
000-00-0000
S1
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
11/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
BN L
1.0000
Empe Amt
0.00 L
--------
100.00
Empr Amt
20.00 L
--------
100.00
Totals
20.00
--------
ANTHONY SUSAN B
Package: 03
Plan: LIFE
000-00-0000
13
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
06/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
BN L
0.7500
Empe Amt
0.00 L
-------0.00
100.00
Empr Amt
20.00 L
-------20.00
100.00
Totals
20.00
-------20.00
ANTOINETTE MARIE
000-00-0000
11
Package: 03
LIFE INSURANCE ONLY
Plan: LIFE PROVIDENT LIFE & ACCIDENT
06/01/2000 07/01/2001
00
N
Level: EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
EE
EMPLOYEE ONLY
Y
N
0.4600
Empe Amt
20.00 L
-------20.00
100.00
Empr Amt
0.00 L
-------0.00
100.00
Totals
20.00
-------20.00
Totals
BN L
Totals
10/2010
5-113
The instructions for this process focus on the following areas:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window allows you to globally transfers the employee benefit information on the Benefits Management form of
the Employee Maintenance window from one plan year (calendar, fiscal, or other) to
the next. The advantages to using this program are that it saves you from having to retype all the employees’ benefit information every year, and it preserves the previous
year’s information for your records. The Benefits Management Roll-Over Report
(BM0805) lists the results of this operation.
The process works in two stages. First, it takes the current active benefits record and
attaches an exit date for current amounts. Then it creates a new record from the next
day onward. You can use the first stage without the second stage by selecting ’Inactivate only’ as the update mode. Alternatively, you can use both stages of the Roll-Over
Program by selecting Roll-Over as the update mode.
The ’Inactivate only’ update mode does the first half of the roll-over by ending the
current benefits record with an exit date, but it does not then create a new record for
the next time period. This mode can be used to end participation in the district’s benefit program for those employees who have been identified by their Benefit Status code
as being terminated. It can also be used for packages which are no longer offered by
the district. A new package assignment would then need to be manually entered on
each affected employee’s Benefits Management form.
You can roll over or inactivate either plan years for all employees, or you can roll over
or inactivate certain bargaining units, packages (with or without coverage levels), or
records with the flags Section 125, Primary, or COBRA.
If you want to roll over or inactivate individual employees, use an exit date on each
employee’s Benefits Management form. For details, see page 4-42.
The Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window is a part of a series
of processes for a mass update of deductions on the Benefits Management (BM) form
of the Employee Maintenance window.
5-114
10/2010
1 Use the Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window to roll benefits management records forward from one year to the next.
5-103.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefits Management Roll-Over Report (BM0805) from the Request Benefits Management RollOver (BM0800) window. For a description of the parts of the window that are the
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window from the Job
10/2010
5-115
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window.
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window. See “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in
text boxes, selecting options from drop-down lists, selecting dates, checking boxes,
and selecting option buttons.
Roll-Over Selections
The top of the window allows you to specify how to roll records. Fill in this part of
the window whenever you do this process.
Report Title
5-116
10/2010
Figure 5-43: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Management Roll-Over (BM0800) window
Sort by
Select an option for how to sort the report:
♦ Bargaining Unit
♦ Employee Name
Run Mode
♦ Report Only to do a what-if report that shows the results
as if you had done an update, but without making any
changes.
♦ Update, Save Changes to update and save changes, and
produce a report on those changes.
CAUTION: Run this program in ’Report only’ run mode first, and check the resulting
report carefully to make sure everything is the way you want it. If it’s not, make changes,
and run the program again in ’Report only’ run mode. After you get everything just right, only
then should you run the program in ’Update/Report’ run mode.
10/2010
5-117
Update Mode
♦ Inactivate Only to close the current benefits period, and
do not create a new record.
This mode is often used for terminated employees.
♦ Roll-Over to roll over benefits to a new time period, and
produce a report on those changes.
This mode is usually used for continuing employees.
Exit Date
Type or select the closing date for the current plan/level premium period. This date will close the current records for all
employees whom you have specified.
Update Levels
Based on Age
♦ Blank for does not apply. There are no basic life insurance or optional term life insurance plans present.
♦ Yes to have the program check the employee’s actual age
against the Coverage Level Age Range and make any
necessary adjustments.
♦ No to make the program not check the employee’s actual
age against the Coverage Level Age Range.
This field is pertinent only if you are updating basic life insurance or optional term life insurance plans.
Employee Selections
The bottom half of the window allows you to select employees. Leave blank to process all employees in your district. This part of the window is optional. If you fill in
multiple selections, and employee must match all of the selections to be included in
the process.
5-118
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
10/2010
Package
Code/Level
codes.
the 4-character Package Codes.
For each pair of codes, you can select just a Package Code
to report all Coverage Level codes associated with it. However, if you specify a Coverage Level code, you must also
specify a Package Code.
Section 125
Primary
10/2010
5-119
Cobra
M Flag
D Flag
All Plans Posted
♦ Blank or No for include all.
♦ Yes to roll over only plans that have been reconciled, or
posted.
Include Updated
Age Levels Only
♦ Clear the check box to include all employees.
♦ Select the check box to limit the process to employees
who have moved into a new age range.
5-120
10/2010
Report Samples
The following report shows employees whose benefits have terminated. Notice that
there is no new election date after the exit date for their benefits packages.
BENEFIT MANAGEMENT ROLL-OVER REPORT
TERMINATING BENEFITS
J156
BM0805
H.00.00 05/08/01
PAGE 1
Employee
Old Elect
Exit
New Elect
Name
SSN
Package
Level
Date
Date
Date
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MOUSE MICKEY
000-00-0000
KL KSCL CMP
E1 EMP + 1
03/01/1995
06/01/2001
*NONE*
PIGGY MISS
000-00-0000
8L BC CLAS+
E2 EMP + MO
01/01/1984
06/01/2001
*NONE*
RABBIT PETER
000-00-0000
6T BC CT BA
E
08/01/1987
06/01/2001
*NONE*
EMP ONLY
The following report illustrates the new election date for the plan year. Reading each
column from left to right, we see employee name, social security number, package,
default package level, and most importantly, the old election date, the exit date, and
the new election date for the chosen package and level.
10/2010
5-121
2000-2001 ROLL-OVER
BENEFIT MANAGEMENT ROLL-OVER REPORT
J947
BM0805
H.00.00 01/09/01
PAGE
1
Employee
Old Elect
Exit
New Elect
Name
SSN
Package
Level
Date
Date
Date
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------BOOP BETTY
000-00-0000
EM EMPBASIC
E1 EMP + 1
12/01/1999
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
BUEHLER FERRIS
000-00-0000
KT KAISCERT
E1 EMP + 1
06/01/1994
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
BUMSTEAD BLONDIE
000-00-0000
BT BC CERT
E1 EMP + 1
10/01/1976
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
BUMSTEAD DAGWOOD
000-00-0000
BL BC CLASS
E
EMP ONLY
06/01/1989
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
BUNKER ARCHIE
000-00-0000
EM EMPBASIC
E
EMP ONLY
10/18/2000
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
BUNNY BUGS
000-00-0000
5T KS CT BA
E
EMP ONLY
07/01/1991
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
CLAUS SANTA
000-00-0000
8L BC CLAS+
E2 EMP + MO
05/01/2000
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
COYOTE WYLIE
000-00-0000
BL BC CLASS
E1 EMP + 1
01/01/2000
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
CRICKET JIMINY
000-00-0000
KB KAISBORD
E1 EMP + 1
03/01/1995
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
DOONESBURY MIKE
000-00-0000
6L BC CL BA
E1 EMP + 1
01/01/1995
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
DUCK DAFFY
000-00-0000
KL KAISCLAS
E2 EMP + MO
01/01/1992
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
DUCK DAISY
000-00-0000
7L KAIS CL+
E
11/01/1988
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
DUCK DONALD
000-00-0000
EM EMPBASIC
E1 EMP + 1
12/16/2000
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
FLINTSTONE FRED
000-00-0000
8B BC BD +
E2 EMP + MO
12/01/2000
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
FLINTSTONE WILMA
000-00-0000
BT BC CERT
E2 EMP + MO
09/01/1985
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
FROG KERMIT
000-00-0000
6T BC CT BA
E
EMP ONLY
11/01/1991
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
FUDD ELMER
000-00-0000
EM EMPBASIC
E
EMP ONLY
04/01/2000
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
GORDON FLASH
000-00-0000
KT KAISCERT
E1 EMP + 1
09/01/1996
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
KENT CLARK
000-00-0000
EM EMPBASIC
E
11/01/1982
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
KIRK JAMES
000-00-0000
5L KS CL BA
E1 EMP + 1
08/01/1999
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
LANE LOIS
000-00-0000
5L KS CL BA
E1 EMP + 1
09/01/1993
12/31/2000
01/01/2001
5-122
EMP ONLY
EMP ONLY
10/2010
(BM0900) Window
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Prerequisites for Updating Deductions
Update Options
Employee Selection Tab
Deduction Selection Tab.
Report Sample
Purpose
The Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
allows you to launch a process that will automatically load each benefit deduction
from the Benefits Management Module into the QSS/OASIS Payroll System. The
deductions display on the Deductions (PD) form of the Employee Maintenance
window. The Update Pay Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0905) report
lists the results of this update.
This process can update either all benefit deductions or only specific deductions. For
example, if all the medical deductions have been assigned voluntary deduction numbers from 1100 to 1300, you can choose to update only that range of voluntary deduction numbers.
Prerequisites for Updating Deductions
Do the following tasks before running this batch update.
♦ First, each benefit deduction must have a voluntary deduction number attached to
it in the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file. If no voluntary deduction number is attached, the benefit will not be imported from the Benefits Management
Module onto the Deductions (PD) form.
♦ Second, individual plan/levels can be set on the Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL)
master file screen to not load either the Employee and/or the Employer amount.
The default is to load both employee and employer amounts to the payroll system.
♦ Third, each employee must have a default set of frequency codes listed on the Payroll Information tab of the Benefits Management (BM) form. If these frequency
codes are missing, no benefits will be imported to the Deductions (PD) form.
10/2010
5-123
Update Options
The benefit load job can be set to operate at two different levels: by default there is a
full load of all the benefit information maintained in Benefits Management. Alternatively, an alternate selection can be made to load only the employee and employer
amounts from Benefits Management.
♦ The full load assumes that there is currently no active, manually maintained benefit information on the Deductions (PD) form. All of the benefit information is
loaded into the payroll system via the Request Update Deductions from Benefits
Management (BM0900) window. Each benefit thus imported will be marked by an
asterisk in the b column of the vb column.
The full load option is the default. By default, data regarding the benefits so loaded
can only be modified by Benefits Management. Payroll is not able to make manual
adjustments to the data on the Deductions (PD) form unless specific user security
is set to allow this level of access. See the QSS/OASIS Enhanced Payroll Manual
for more information.
♦ The partial load option is used when payroll is actively maintaining benefit deductions and are loading only benefit amounts based on data in Benefits Management.
Using this set-up option, only the employee and employer amount fields will be
updated. The other fields will not be changed during the load and must be manually maintained by payroll staff.
The partial load option is selected by entering a B in the F (Flag) column on
Deductions form for each employee.
There are advantages and disadvantages to each of these options.
♦ If the regular, default full load option is used, the advantage is that everything is
loaded from Benefits Management. The disadvantage is that everything is loaded
from Benefits Management and any manual adjustments that may have been made
will be over-ridden and will have to be re-entered.
♦ If the partial load option is selected, the advantage is that payroll will have manual
control of the various fields on the Deductions form. The disadvantage is that these
fields must be manually maintained and the data load from Benefits Management
will bring over only changes in amounts.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Update Pay
Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0905) report from the Request Update
Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window. For a description of the
parts of the window that are the same for all reports, see page 5-10.
5-124
10/2010
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
from the Job Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch
Window from the Job Menu Window” on page 5-19.
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window.
10/2010
5-125
Table 5-12: Tabs for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
TAB
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Report Selections
Select the year, as-of date, and whether to use report-only
mode or update mode.
5-126
Employee Selection
Select the employees to report by pay schedules, pay locations, control groups, bargaining units, and benefits status.
5-128
Deduction Selection
Select the packages, plan codes, and deductions to report or
process.
5-130
Figure 5-44 illustrates the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management
(BM0900) window. See “Filling In Boxes in Tabs” on page A-9 for general instructions on typing in text boxes, selecting options from drop-down lists, selecting dates,
checking boxes, and selecting option buttons.
Figure 5-44: Main Selection tab for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
Report Title
5-126
10/2010
Sort by
♦ Employee Name to sort the report by employee name.
♦ Deduction Code to sort the report by deduction code.
This is the voluntary deduction number from the Voluntary Deductions master file.
Run Mode
♦ Report Only to create a report that shows a preview of
the changes.
♦ Update, Save Changes and Produce a Change Report
to update the benefits records and produce a report of
those changes.
Show Changes
Only
♦ Select the check box to show only employee deductions
that will be added, changed, or deleted.
♦ Clear the check box to show all deductions including
totals.
Include Non-BM
Deductions
♦ Select the check box to include employee deductions that
are not benefit deductions or created from Benefits Management.
♦ Clear the check box to exclude employee deductions that
are not benefit deductions or created from Benefits
Management.
10/2010
Year
Type a 2-digit fiscal year for obtaining records used for the
Employee Selection tab, such as 10 for 2009-2010.
Date
Enter the date that will be used to get the active employee benefits records.
5-127
Orphaned
Deductions Option
♦ Leave Unchanged to leave orphaned records unchanged
but process non-orphaned records.
♦ Delete Orphaned, Process Others to delete orphaned
records and process non-orphaned records.
♦ Delete Orphaned, Do Not Process Others to delete
orphaned records and skip processing of non-orphaned
records.
Orphaned deduction records are benefits that have been
replaced with those by another insurer.
Write Pay
Deductions with
Zero Amount
Select or clear the check box:
♦ Select the check box to allow zero amounts.
♦ Clear the check box to disallow zero amounts.
Some districts set up a null plan or plans which would be
chosen if an employee waives a commonly-accepted coverage such as medical. This field allows the zero amounts that
go with such a null plan to be ported over to the screens
used by the Payroll staff, so they can make sure the
employee’s medical coverage has not been overlooked.
Employee Selection Tab
Figure 5-45 illustrates the Employee Selection Tab for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window. This entire tab is optional. It
allows you to narrow the choice of employees on the report. If you fill in multiple
selections, an employee must meet all of the selection criteria to be included in the
report and update process.
This tab does not validate the codes that you type, such as Pay Schedules or Control
Groups. To be sure that you use valid codes, click the
icon to use the code selection dialog box described on page 5-160.
Pay Schedule
To select employees, type or select up to 5 pay schedules.
Employees are assigned to this code on the W4/Control
form.
5-128
10/2010
Figure 5-45: Employee Selection tab for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
Pay Code
To select employees, type or select up to 5 pay codes.
form of the Employee Maintenance window.
Pay Location
To select employees, type or select up to 5 pay locations.
form.
Control Group
To select employees, type or select up to 5 control groups.
form.
Bargaining Unit
To select employees, type or select up to 5 bargaining units.
Employees are assigned to this code on the Demographic
(MA) form of the Employee Maintenance window.
10/2010
5-129
Benefit Status
To select employees, type or select up to 5 benefit statuses.
Employees are assigned to this code on the Benefits Management (BM) form of the Employee Maintenance window.
SSN
Type up to 5 SSNs to limit the report to specific employees.
Deduction Selection Tab
Figure 5-46 illustrates the Deduction Selection tab for the Request Update Deductions
from Benefits Management (BM0900) window. This tab allows you to you to select
the packages and deduction codes to include in or exclude from the report and update
process. Leave the tab blank to select all packages, plans, and deductions.
Figure 5-46: Deduction Selection tab for the Request Update Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0900) window
Package Selection
Packages Are
♦ Include to type or select a list of Package Codes to
include.
♦ Exclude to type or select a list of Package Codes to
exclude.
5-130
10/2010
Package Code
Type or select up to 10 packages to include or exclude.
Click the
button to select codes. For instructions, see
page 5-160.
Plan Code and Level Selection
Plan Code/Level
To select records to report, do either of the following in each
pair of boxes.
♦ Type or select a Plan Code in the first box to select Plan
Codes with or without levels.
♦ Type a Plan Code in the first box and a Level code in the
second box to select a plan/level combination.
Select Plan Code
Click the
icon to select up to 10 Plan Codes. For instructions, see page 5-160.
Select Level Code
Click the
icon to select up to 10 Level codes. For instructions, see page 5-160.
Update Pay Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0905) reportDeduction Selection
Deduction Codes
Are
♦ Individual for specifying up to 10 voluntary deduction
codes to include in the report.
♦ Range Pairs for up to 5 ranges of voluntary deduction
codes to include. The first pair of boxes is the first range,
the second pair of boxes is the second range, and so on.
Deduction Codes
Type or select up to 10 voluntary deduction codes.
To select, click the
5-160.
10/2010
icon. For instructions, see page
5-131
Report Sample
The following Update Pay Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0905) report
gives the most streamlined information, because only Benefits Management changes
are shown. No old deductions are shown, and no non-Benefits Management deductions are shown.
SHOW CHANGES ONLY
J308
BM0905
H.00.02 07/09/01 PAGE
1
For Date: 07/01/2000
Employee
DS Code Name
Employee Employer T F S
Balance
Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000 DUCK DONALD
12 0013 KAISER CERTIFICATED
12 9546 JOHN HANCOCK MUTUAL LIFE
153.57
0.50 P
1
Changed
Changed
000-00-0000 FLINTSTON, WILMA
12 1103 BLUE CROSS - CLASSIFIED
163.25
1
Changed
000-00-0000 FROG KERMIT
12 0015 KAISER CLASSIFIED
164.84
7.50 P
1
Changed
Changed
000-00-0000 FUDD ELMER
000-00-0000 GORDON FLASH
12 0050 AMERICAN FIDELITY-DISABILITY
12 1102 BLUE CROSS - CERTIFICATED
000-00-0000 KENT CLARK
000-00-0000 KIRK JAMES
12 0050 AMERICAN FIDELITY-DISABILITY
12 0227 DELTA DENTAL - CERTIFICATED
000-00-0000 LANE LOIS
10
12
10
12
000-00-0000 MOZART WOLFGANG
0228
0228
1103
1103
DELTA DENTAL
DELTA DENTAL
BLUE CROSS BLUE CROSS -
- CLASSIFIED
- CLASSIFIED
CLASSIFIED
CLASSIFIED
0.50 P
107.00
545.28
179.38
215.24
Changed
1
Changed
Changed
1
1
Changed
Changed
170.32
1
112.00
35.00
1
3.00 P
9.43
Added
Added
Changed
Added
68.09
1
1
1
1
Changed
Changed
Changed
Changed
337.44
1
Changed
31.46
136.18
The report sample on the next page shows deductions both before and after the
update. It was run in Report Only mode. It also includes non-Benefits Management
deductions as well as Benefits Management deductions.
5-132
10/2010
SHOW ALL
J310
BM0905
H.00.02 07/09/01 PAGE
1
For Date: 07/01/2001
Employee
DS Code Name
Balance
Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000 BOOP BETTY
000-00-0000 BUEHLER FERRIS
99 8400 NUSD APPLE PLAN TRUST
non-BM Deductions
non-BM Percent
12
12
12
12
0050
0228
1103
9525
Old BM Deductions
Old BM Percent
Old Total Deductions
Old Total Percent
12
12
12
12
0050
0228
1103
9525
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New Total Deductions
New-Total Percent
12 0017 AMERICAN FEDERATION TEACHERS
12 0055 AMERICAN FIDELITY-DEP CARE
non-BM Deductions
non-BM Percent
10
12
10
12
10
12
000-00-0000 BUNKER ARCHIE
000-45-4077 DEFOE LEE
10/2010
0013
0013
0227
0227
9546
9546
KAISER CERTIFICATED
KAISER CERTIFICATED
Old BM Deductions
Old BM Percent
Old Total Percent
3.75
0.00
3.75
15.35
1.80
15.35
1.80
15.35
5.55
15.35
1.80
15.35
1.80
15.35
5.55
40.00
85.83
125.83
0.00
3.75 P
0.00
3.75
0
107.00
61.42
374.81
1.00 P
543.23
1.00
543.23
4.75
1
1
1,500.00
107.00
61.42
374.81
1.00 P
543.23
1.00
543.23
4.75
1
1
1,500.00
0
0
0.00
0.00
1
1
1
1
153.57
7.20
24.00
7.20
0.00
133.03
0.00
P
0.50 P
177.57
0.50
177.57
0.50
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
7.20
0.00
133.03
0.00
12 0019 CSEA (LOCAL DUES)
12 3111 Robert T. Doyle, Sheriff
non-BM Deductions
non-BM Percent
4.75
25.00
29.75
0.00
0.00
0.00
12 0228 DELTA DENTAL - CLASSIFIED
Old BM Deductions
Old BM Percent
Old Total Percent
7.86
7.86
0.00
37.61
0.00
164.84
31.46
196.30
0.00
196.30
0.00
1
1
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
7.86
7.86
0.00
37.61
0.00
164.84
31.46
196.30
0.00
196.30
0.00
1
1
12 3144 SONOMA COUNTY FSD
non-BM Deductions
non-BM Percent
50.00
50.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
14
12
14
12
28.96
0228
0228
1103
1103
DELTA DENTAL
DELTA DENTAL
- CLASSIFIED
- CLASSIFIED
CLASSIFIED
CLASSIFIED
Old BM Deductions
170.32
1
7.20
Changed
1
1
24.00
0.50 P
194.32
0.50
194.32
0.50
Changed
B
0
0 8,029.69
0
106.21
191.31
220.27
9,999.00
385.81
492.02
1
1
1
1
5-133
The following report is run in Update and Report mode and excludes all non-Benefits
Management deductions.
BM DEDUCTIONS ONLY
J95
BM0905
H.00.02 04/19/01 PAGE
1
For Date: 07/01/2000
Employee
DS Code Name
Balance
Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000 BOOP BETTY
000-00-0000 BUMSTEAD BLONDIE
000-00-0000 BUNKER ARCHIE
000-00-0000 BUNNY BUGS
000-00-0000 CLAUS SANTA
000-45-3129 FOSTER JAMES
5-134
12
12
12
12
0050
0228
1103
9525
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
10
12
10
12
10
12
10
12
0013
0013
0050
0050
0227
0227
9546
9546
KAISER CERTIFICATED
KAISER CERTIFICATED
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
10
12
10
12
10
12
0013
0013
0227
0227
9546
9546
KAISER CERTIFICATED
KAISER CERTIFICATED
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
12
12
12
12
0228
0228
1103
1103
0050
0050
0227
0227
1102
1102
9525
9525
0015
0050
0228
9546
DELTA DENTAL
DELTA DENTAL
- CLASSIFIED
- CLASSIFIED
CLASSIFIED
CLASSIFIED
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
KAISER CLASSIFIED
New BM Deductions
New BM Percent
New-Total Percent
15.35
1.80
15.35
1.80
15.35
1.80
107.00
61.42
374.81
1.00 P
543.23
1.00
543.23
1.00
325.07
1
1
1
1
107.00
14.40
48.00
14.40
0.00
14.40
0.00
P
7.50 P
480.07
7.50
480.07
7.50
153.57
7.20
24.00
7.20
0.00
7.20
0.00
P
0.50 P
177.57
0.50
177.57
0.50
7.86
7.86
0.00
7.86
0.00
164.84
31.46
196.30
0.00
196.30
0.00
28.96
106.21
191.31
220.27
0.00
220.27
0.00
1
1
385.81
492.02
0.00
492.02
0.00
24.00
158.47
6.22
6.55
6.22
6.55
6.22
26.55
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
1
1
Added
Added
1
1
1
1
Added
Added
Added
Added
1
1
1
1
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
1,500.00 Added
1,500.00 Added
26.55
0.00
26.55
0.00
P
2.00 P
289.47
2.00
289.47
2.00
458.92
107.00
106.21
3.00 P
672.13
3.00
672.13
3.00
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
Added
1
1
1
1
107.00
6.55
Added
Added
Added
1,500.00 Added
1
1
Added
Added
Added
Added
10/2010
Error Report
After you run this report, any errors will be detailed in a separate report having the
same job number as the primary report. The error report is called Error Report
for Update Pay Deductions from BenMgt in Print Manager, or Update
Pay Deductions from BM Error Report on the printout. Check this report
carefully and make any necessary corrections before doing the actual update. After
you have run the report only mode and there is no longer an accompanying error
report, then you can run the update mode.
Update Pay Deductions from BM Error Report
J88
BM0910
H.00.00
04/19/01
PAGE
1
ALL EMPLOYEES
Employee
PLN/LVL Code
Error Message
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------65 000-00-0000 GORDON FLASH
0003
Warning: Found a pre-BM deduction record which the update did not map to.
Result of Updating Deductions on the Employee Maintenance Payroll Pay
Line (PR) Screen
Figure 5-47 shows the benefit deductions that have come from the Benefits Management Module to the Deductions form. These are indicated by an asterisk (*) under the
b in the vb column.
Figure 5-47: Benefit Deductions Imported to the Deduction form
10/2010
5-135
This heading describes the following processes and reports:
♦ Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) Window
♦ Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100) Window
♦ Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) Window
REMINDER: To use these reports and processes, a district must be using the optional
Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) window to create invoices, record receipts, age
receivables, and create reports for managing receivables. For details, see the QSS/OASIS
Invoicing/Billing Management Manual.
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window allows you to create
customer IDs in Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) and to link them to benefits
employees designated by the selection criteria. This allows you to create and link a
group of employee records to individual IBM customer ID records for the purpose of
using IBM to invoice the employees for health care costs. The Benefits Employee/AR
Customer Mass Create/Link (BMI020) report lists the result of this process.
NOTE: The IBM customer odometer must be active in order for this program to assign IBM
customer ID records to benefits employees.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefits
Employee/AR Customer Mass Create/Link (BMI020) report from the Create Benefits
Employee Customers (BMI020) window. For a description of the parts of the window
that are the same for all reports, see page 5-10.
5-136
10/2010
page 5-26.
2 Open a Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window from the Job
1 Fill in the tabs for the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window.
Table 5-13: Tabs for the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window
10/2010
TAB
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Report Selections
Select the employees for whom to create customer IDs in
IBM and the credit account, customer type, and terms for
billing..
5-138
Select Employees
Select up to 20 individual employees.
5-141
5-137
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window.
Figure 5-48: Report Selections tab for the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window
Report Title
5-138
10/2010
Sort
♦ Employee Name
♦ Bargaining Unit/Name
♦ Benefit Status/Name
Run Mode
Select an option from the list: .
♦ Report Only to do a what-if report that shows the results
as if you had created the customer links, but without
assigning any IBM customer IDs.
♦ Report/Create and Link Customers to create IBM customer IDs, link benefits employees to those IDs, and produce a report.
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
Section 125
Primary
10/2010
5-139
Cobra
Credit Account
Type the account string to which the IBM invoices generated
for these employee/customers are to be credited.
The debit will automatically go to the Accounts Receivable
account string designated in your district set-up for IBM.
For details, see the AR01 module in Modules, Tasks, and
User Security for QCC.
Customer Type
Select a Customer Type code for IBM to use for billing for
benefits.
For more information, see Chapter 4 of the QSS/OASIS
Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) Manual.
Statement
♦ Select the check box to have the employee/customer
receive a statement from the IBM system.
♦ Clear the check box to suppress the creation of a
statement.
Taxable
♦ Select the check box to make the benefits amounts subject to sales tax.
♦ Clear the check box to make the benefits amounts
exempt from sales tax.
5-140
10/2010
Terms
Select a code from the Terms master file in IBM.
Tax ID
Select a code to identify the tax rate that applies to taxable billing for benefits.
Figure 5-26 illustrates the Select Employees tab for the Create Benefits Employee
Customers (BMI020) window. This entire tab is optional.
Figure 5-49: Select Employees tab for the Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI020) window
10/2010
5-141
[SSN]
Report Sample
This sample illustrates the results when this program is run in Report Only mode.
Note that the CUST ID field on the report is filled with asterisks. The CSAR customer ID is only assigned when the process is run in the Report/Create and Link Customers mode.
J468
BMI020
H.01.00 05/12/06 PAGE
1
Report Only
SSN
Employee Name /
Address
Ben
Report Empl Sec
CUST ID
CSAR Name
Cust Type / Terms
Status BU
Code
Type 125 Primary Cobra
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000
xxx MOLINO AVE
SOMEVILLE
******
Axxxxx, Janice
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000 N30
000-00-0000
Axxxxx
xxx RIDGE ROAD
SOMEVILLE
******
Fxxxx, Bruce
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000 N30
000-00-0000
Fxxxx
JANICE
Hxxxxxxxxx
CE
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
BRUCE
xxx LILLIAN LANE
SOMEVILLE
******
Hxxxxxxxxx, Thomas
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000 N30
40
41
CE
Y
Y
Y
CA
Y
Taxable: N
CE
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
40
41
Tax ID: NONE Rate:
CE
Y
Y
Y
CA
THOMAS
Y
Taxable: N
CL
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
40
41
Tax ID: NONE Rate:
CE
Y
Y
Y
CA
Y
Taxable: N
Tax ID: NONE Rate:
This sample illustrates the results when this program is run in Report/Create and Link
Customers mode. Note that there are now values for the Cust ID.
J556
BMI020
H.01.00 05/18/06 PAGE
1
Report, Create, Link
SSN
Employee Name /
Address
Ben
Report Empl Sec
CUST ID
CSAR Name
Cust Type / Terms
Status BU
Code
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000
xxx RIDGE ROAD
SOMEVILLE
000109
Fxxxx, Bruce
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000 N30
000-00-0000
Fxxxx
xxx LILLIAN LANE
SOMEVILLE
000110
Hxxxxxxxxx, Thomas
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000 N30
5-142
Hxxxxxxxxx
BRUCE
CE
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
40
41
CE
Y
Y
Y
CA
THOMAS
Y
CL
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
Taxable: N
40
41
Tax ID: NONE Rate:
CE
Y
Y
Y
CA
Y
Taxable: N
Tax ID: NONE Rate:
10/2010
Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100)
Window
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Benefits Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing (BMI100) can be used to report
either those benefits employees who have been linked to an Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) customer ID, those employees who should be linked but are not, or
both. This link is required to use the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010)
window to bill employees for benefit costs.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the Benefits
Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing (BMI100) from the Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100) window. For a description of the parts of the
window that are the same for all reports, see page 5-10.
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100) window
from the Job Menu window. For detailed instructions, see “Opening a Launch
Window from the Job Menu Window” on page 5-19.
10/2010
5-143
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing
(BMI100) window.
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260)
Report Title
5-144
10/2010
Figure 5-50: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Employees/CSAR Customer Listing (BMI100) window
Sort by
♦ Employee Name
♦ Bargaining Unity/Name
♦ List Type/Name
10/2010
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
5-145
Benefit Status
Plan Code/Level
codes.
Plan Range
Vendor Numbers
numbers.
Report Sample
This report sample shows those benefit employees who are linked to a customer ID in
IBM. Note that each employee listing includes the IBM Customer ID number, the
account to which the activity should be credited, and the Statement, Taxable, Tax ID,
and Terms flags.
NOTE: The report uses the terminology CSAR (Client-Server Accounts Receivable), which
is the former name for IBM.
5-146
10/2010
Benefits Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing
J557
BMI100
H.01.00 05/18/06 PAGE
1
Linked Employees
SSN
Employee Name /
Address
Ben
Report Empl Sec
CUST ID
CSAR Name
Cust Type / Terms
Status BU
Code
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000
BUNNY
BUGS
xxx MOLINO AVE
OAKVILLE
000108
Bunny, Bugs
RETIRED
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000 N30
000-00-0000
xxx CENTER RD
OAKVILLE
000107
Claus, Santa
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000 N30
000-00-0000
CLAUS
Y
40
41
CE
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
Taxable: N
CE
Y
Y
Y
40
41
Tax ID: NONERate:
CE
N
Y
N
CA
WYLIE
xxx LILLIAN LANE
OAKVILLE
000110
Mike Doonesbury
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000 N30
10/2010
DOONESBURY
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
SANTA
xxx RIDGE ROAD
OAKVILLE
000109
Coyote, Wylie
RETIREE
CR Account:
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000 N30
000-00-0000
COYOTE
CE
CA
Y
CE
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
Taxable: N
40
41
Tax ID: NONERate:
CE
Y
Y
Y
CA
MIKE
Y
CL
9xxxx
Statement:
Net 30 Days
Taxable: N
40
41
Tax ID: NONERate:
CE
Y
Y
Y
CA
Y
Taxable: N
Tax ID: NONERate:
5-147
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Purpose
Report Sample
Purpose
The Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window allows you to initiate
benefits invoicing on the Invoicing/Billing Management (IBM) window. IBM is an
optional module in QCC that allows you to create invoices, record receipts, age
invoices, and create a variety of reports.
REMINDER: Use this process only if your site is using the optional Invoicing/Billing
Management (IBM) window for invoicing and recording cash receipts. Some reports use the
terminology CSAR (Client-Server Accounts Receivable), which is the former name for IBM.
Selections are made on this screen of the groups of employees to be invoiced and the
time frame for the invoicing. It is highly recommended that the process be run in
Report Only mode first and the resulting reports reviewed for completeness and accuracy before running the job in Create/Report mode. Your user security may not allow
you to use Create/Report mode.
For an employee, only the individual plan lines that pass the search edits and are
properly set up for invoicing will be invoiced. Just because an employee qualifies
does not mean that all of their plans will be invoiced.
These instructions focus on the specific instructions for launching the following
reports from the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Benefits Pre-Invoice Duplicates (BMI011)
For a description of these reports, see page 5-155. For a description of the parts of the
window that are the same for all reports, see page 5-10.
5-148
10/2010
page 5-26.
2 Open a Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window from the Job
1 Fill in the tabs for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window.
10/2010
5-149
Table 5-14: Tabs for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window
TAB
PURPOSE
SEE PAGE
Report Selections
Select the billing date, Package Codes, and Plan Codes for
which to bill for health care.
5-150
Select Employees
Select up to 20 individual employees to include in for exclude
from the report.
5-154
Figure 5-48 illustrates the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window.
Report Title
Sort by
♦ Employee Name
♦ Bargaining Unit/Name
Mode
♦ Report Only to create a report to preview the billing
amounts in the reports.
♦ Create and Report to create invoices in Invoicing/Billing Management.
QSS recommends that you run this process in Report Only
mode first. Review the reports carefully to be sure that each
employee’s benefits are coded correctly and that the invoice
5-150
10/2010
Figure 5-51: Report Selections tab for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window
amounts are correct. Once you run the process in Create
and Report mode, you must use the Invoicing/Billing Management window to make corrections to billing amounts.
Invoice Cycle
Select a billing cycle for Invoicing/Billing Management from
the list:
♦ Annual
♦ Semi-Annual
♦ Quarterly
♦ Monthly
♦ Bi-Monthly
10/2010
5-151
Start Month/Year
The Start Month must coincide with the selected cycle(s) in
conjunction with the benefit year start. Use calendar year values, not fiscal year values for the Year field.
For example, if the benefit year starts in January, the acceptable Start Month values for quarterly invoicing would be
01, 04, 07, or 10. If, however, the benefit year starts in February, Start Month would be 02, 05, 08, or 11.
End Month
The End Month is valid only for the Monthly invoice cycle.
You may indicate multiple months. For example, the Start
Month for a monthly invoice cycle may be January and the
End Month may be March. The system will produce three
invoices - one each for January, February, and March.
Invoice Date
If you type or select a date, every invoice created in this run
will have this date.
If this field is left blank, the invoice date for each invoice
will be the first day of the first month of the invoice’s cycle.
If invoices for multiple months are produced in one run and
this field is left blank, the invoice date will be the first day
of each invoiced month.
Department
Select a department code from Invoicing/Billing Management.
Processing Option
♦ Standard to do all edits and create all three variants of
the BMI011 report - the Invoice Pre-List, the Errors
report, and the Duplicates report.
An invoice is classed as a ’duplicate’ when its date range
conflicts with a previously posted invoice created from
Benefits Management. Invoices created through the
CSAR Invoice screen are not considered in this edit
check.
Duplicated invoices will not be posted.
♦ Bypass Duplicates to do the same as for Standard,
except that duplicates are bypassed and not reported.
5-152
10/2010
♦ Override - Duplicates Posted to do the same as for
Standard, except that duplicate invoices are posted.
Bargaining Unit
Report Code
Benefit Status
Package/Level
Code
Level codes.
For each pair of codes, you can select just a Package Code to
report all Coverage Level codes associated with it. However, if
you specify a Coverage Level code, you must also specify a
Package Code.
Plan Code/Level
codes.
Plan Range
10/2010
5-153
Vendor Numbers
numbers.
Section 125
Primary
Cobra
Figure 5-52 illustrates the Select Employees tab for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice
Selection (BMI010) window. This entire tab is optional.
Selection Rule
♦ Include Selected Employees to make the report include
only those that you select on this tab.
5-154
10/2010
Figure 5-52: Select Employees tab for the Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010) window
♦ Exclude Selected Employees to have the report encompass all employees except those that you specify.
[SSN]
Report Sample
A series of reports are produced during each invoicing run. The Pre-List, Error, and
Duplicate reports are generated when Report Only mode has been requested. The
Invoice Post and Post Error reports are generated when Create/Report mode has
been requested.
Security settings may limit the reporting options to which you have access. See your
System Administrator for more information.
10/2010
5-155
♦ The Pre-List and Error reports are always produced if any invoices are to be created or any errors encountered.
♦ The Duplicates report is produced if the Processing Option is S (Standard) or O
(Override).
♦ The CSAR Invoice Post report is produced if Create/Report mode is selected and
any invoices are posted to the Client-Server Accounts Receivable (CSAR)
database.
♦ If there is not a one-to-one correspondence between the Pre-List Report and the
CSAR Invoice Post Report, then the CSAR Invoice Post Error report will be
produced.
Pre-List Report
The Pre-List Report is generated in Report Only mode. This sample report reflects
Monthly invoicing only. When multiple invoice cycles are requested on the same
report, each cycle is reported separately within the report.
Benefits Pre-Invoice Pre-List
Cycle: Monthly
J569
BMI011
Mode: Report Only
H.01.04 05/18/06 PAGE
1
Processing Option: Standard
Ben
Report Sec
SSN
Customer Name / Address
Status BU
Code
125 Primary Cobra FTE
Dept User Cycle Month
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000
Line
1
000108
Item
KSRTE
Axxxxx, Janice
xxx Molino Ave
Someville
Description
KAISER - RETIREE
CR Acct: 01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000
000-00-0000
Line
1
2
000107
Item
KSRTE
LIFEE
Bxxxxx, Pamela
xxx Center Rd
Someville
Description
KAISER - RETIREE
GENERAL LIFE INSURANCE
CR Acct: 01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000
000-00-0000
Line
1
000109
Item
KSRTE1
Fxxxx, Bruce
xxx Ridge Road
Someville
Description
KAISER - RETIREE
CR Acct: 01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000
000-00-0000
Line
1
000110
Item
KSRTE1
Hxxxxxxxxx, Thomas
xxx Lillian Lane
Someville
Description
KAISER - RETIREE
CR Acct: 01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000
5-156
CE
40
41
Y
Y
Y
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
CA 9xxxx Terms: N30
Qty
Price
1.0
200.00
Net 30 Days
Ref:
Inv Date: 06/01/06
Total
BB Calc.Amt Overide Employee Employer
Total
200.00
12
200.00
200.00
275.00
475.00
--------Invoice Amount:
200.00
CE
40
41
N
Y
N
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
CA 9xxxx Terms: N30
Qty
Price
1.0
200.00
1.0
15.00
Net 30 Days
Ref:
Inv Date: 06/01/06
Total
Total
200.00
12
200.00
200.00
275.00
475.00
15.00
12
15.00
15.00
.25
15.25
215.00
CE
40
41
Y
Y
Y
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
CA 9xxxx Terms: N30
Qty
Price
1.0
347.58
Net 30 Days
Ref:
Inv Date: 06/01/06
Total
Total
347.58
12
347.58
347.58
200.00
547.58
347.58
CL
40
41
Y
Y
Y
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
CA 9xxxx Terms: N30
Qty
Price
1.0
347.58
Net 30 Days
Ref:
Inv Date: 06/01/06
Total
Total
347.58
12
347.58
347.58
200.00
547.58
347.58
10/2010
Error Report
The Error Report is generated in Report Only mode when errors are present.
Benefits Pre-Invoice Errors
Cycle: Monthly
J569
BMI011
Mode: Report Only
H.01.04 05/18/06 PAGE
1
Ben
Report Sec
SSN
Status BU
Code
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000 ******
Cxxxxxx
WILLIAM
Errors: Employee not linked to CSAR Customer
000-00-0000 ******
Hxxxxxxx
MARGARET
Errors: Employee not linked to CSAR Customer
I
CL
40
00
Y
Y
N
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
CL
40
00
Y
Y
N
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
Duplicates Report
The Duplicates Report is generated in Report Only mode when the Processing
Option has been set to S (Standard) or O (Override) and duplicate invoices are
present.
Benefits Pre-Invoice Duplicates
Cycle: Monthly
J677
BMI011
Mode: Report Only
H.01.04 05/26/06 PAGE
1
Ben
Report Sec
SSN
Status BU
Code
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000
000110
Hxxxxxxxxx, Thomas
Duplicate Invoice Number: 040006
CL
40
41
Y
Y
Y
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
Date: 06/01/06
CSAR Invoice Post Report
The CSAR Invoice Post Report is generated in Create/Report mode when invoices
are posted to the Client-Server Accounts Receivable (CSAR) database. Note the
Invoice Date and Number listed for each invoice.
10/2010
5-157
Benefits Pre-Invoice CSAR Post
Cycle: Monthly
J678
BMI012
H.01.06 05/26/06 PAGE
1
Sort By
Ben
Report Sec
SSN
Status BU
Code
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------000-00-0000
Line
3
000108
Item
Axxxxx, Janice
xxx Molino Ave
Someville
Description
KSRTE
KAISER - RETIREE
CR Acct: 01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000
000-00-0000
Line
3
4
000107
Item
Bxxxxx, Pamela
xxx Center Rd
Someville
Description
KSRTE
LIFEE
KAISER - RETIREE
CR Acct: 01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000
000-00-0000
Line
3
CR Acct:
000109
Item
Fxxxxx, Bruce
xxx Ridge Road
Someville
Description
KSRTE1
KAISER - RETIREE
CE
40
CA 9xxxx Terms: N30
Qty
Price
1.0
41
Y
Y
Net 30 Days
Total
Y
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
MO
JUN
Reference:
Invoice Date: 06/01/06
Number: 040010
200.00
200.00
200.00
CE
40
CA 9xxxx Terms: N30
Qty
Price
1.0
1.0
41
N
Y
Net 30 Days
Total
N
1.0000
0014 MGR
Reference:
Number: 040011
200.00
15.00
200.00
15.00
215.00
CE
40
CA 9xxxx Terms: N30
Qty
Price
1.0
347.58
Invoice Amount:
41
Y
Net 30 Days
Total
Y
Y
1.0000
0014 MGR
MO
JUN
Reference:
Number: 040012
347.58
--------347.58
A CSAR Invoice Post Error Report is generated in Create/Report mode when there
is not a one-to-one correspondence between the Pre-List Report and the CSAR
Invoice Post Report.
Invoice Prelist Produced in IBM
The following is an invoice prelist created in IBM for the invoices posted by CSAR
Invoice Post Report. The actual invoices would be printed and maintained in the
CSAR program.
5-158
10/2010
JUNE INVOICES
Customer Invoice PreList
ACTRCV H.604.00 05/26/2006
For Invoices To Print On: 05/26/2006
Page 1
Department: 0014 BEN MGMT - RETIREES
Inv No Inv Date
Reference Number
Customer
Terms
------- ----------- ------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------040006 06/01/2006
000110 Hxxxxxxxxx, Thomas
Net 30 Days
Line
1
2
3
Item No.
KSRTE1
Item Description
CLASS Insurance: JUN, 2006
.
KAISER - RETIREE
Qty
Unit Cost
1.00
347.58
Tax:
Type
Tax
Line Total
0.0000%
$347.58
$347.58
$0.00
$347.58
Fd Resc Y Objt Gr Goal Fnct Sch Rsp Lcl
% Split
$ Split
01-0000-0-3701-00-1110-1000-000-000-000
100.000%
$347.58
............................................................................................................................
040010 06/01/2006
000108 Axxxxx, Janice
Net 30 Days
Line
1
2
3
Item No.
KSRTE
Item Description
CERTTCHR Insurance: JUN, 2006
.
KAISER - RETIREE
Qty
Unit Cost
1.00
200.00
Tax:
Type
Tax
0.0000%
Line Total
$200.00
$200.00
$0.00
$200.00
% Split
$ Split
01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000
100.000%
$200.00
............................................................................................................................
040011 06/01/2006
000107 Bxxxxx, Pamela
Net 30 Days
Line
1
2
3
4
Item No.
KSRTE
LIFEE
Item Description
.
KAISER - RETIREE
Qty
Unit Cost
1.00
1.00
200.00
15.00
Tax:
Type
Tax
0.0000%
Line Total
$200.00
$15.00
$215.00
$0.00
$215.00
% Split
$ Split
01-0000-0-3701-00-5001-1110-000-000-000
100.000%
$215.00
............................................................................................................................
040012 06/01/2006
000109 Fxxxx, Bruce
Net 30 Days
Line
1
2
3
Item No.
KSRTE1
Item Description
.
KAISER - RETIREE
Qty
Unit Cost
1.00
347.58
Tax:
Type
Tax
0.0000%
Line Total
$347.58
$347.58
$0.00
$347.58
% Split
$ Split
100.000%
$347.58
............................................................................................................................
Department Totals: $1,110.16
Tax:
$0.00
$1,110.16
10/2010
5-159
The description of this dialog box focuses on the following areas:
♦ Purpose
♦ Description of Dialog Box
♦ Selecting Codes
Purpose
The code selection dialog box opens after you click the
button in a report launch
window. This dialog box allows you to select the codes to use for selecting records for
a report or a batch update process.
Description of Dialog Box
Title bar
Toolbar
Menu bar
List of codes that
you can select
Code selection area
List of selected
codes
Buttons for adding
and removing
codes from the
selected list
Status bar
Figure 5-53: Code selection dialog box
Title Bar
The title bar lists the name of the selection from the report launch window. For example, the sample reads, "Plan Range Selection" because the
ple is next to the Plan Range box.
5-160
button for this exam-
10/2010
Selecting Codes
Toolbar and Menu Bar Commands
The toolbar and menu bar contain the commands for adding and removing codes from
the list of selected codes. Table 5-15 summarizes those commands.
Table 5-15: Summary of commands for the code selection dialog box
COMMAND
MENU
Cancel/Close
ICON
KEYBOARD
PURPOSE
File
F12
Close the dialog box without pasting the selected codes
into the launch window.
Return
Options
Ctrl+R
Close the dialog box and paste the selected codes into the
launch window.
Clear
Options
Shift+F1
Remove all of the selected codes from the list on the right
side of the dialog box.
Sort By Alpha
Options
Ctrl+B
Sort the list of available codes by their description, rather
than their code value.
Print Screen
Options
F11
Print a copy of the dialog box on the default Windows
Code Selection Area
The code selection area includes the following:
♦ On the left, a list of codes from which you can select. The list is sorted by the code
value.
♦ In the middle, the [Add] and [Remove] buttons for selecting and removing selected
codes.
♦ On the right, the list of selected codes. The number of boxes varies from code to
code. In this example, there are 5 boxes because the launch window has room for 5
selected codes. The number of boxes may be larger or smaller, depending on the
launch window.
Status Bar
The status bar displays the district, year, site, current date, and current time.
Selecting Codes
These instructions tell how to select codes, remove codes, and close the dialog box.
To select codes, do either of the following:
♦ Double-click a code in the list on the left side of the dialog box.
♦ Click a code, then click the [Add] button.
10/2010
5-161
To remove codes. do either of the following:
♦ Remove all codes by clicking the
(Clear Screen [Shift+F1]) icon.
♦ Remove selected codes.
 In the list of selected codes, highlight the codes that you want to delete.
You can highlight multiple codes to remove.
Click a code with a white background to highlight it. Click a highlighted code
to change it back to unselected.
 Click the [Remove] button to remove the highlighted codes from the selected
list.
To close the dialog box, do either of the following:
1 Click the
[Return (Ctrl+R) icon to close the dialog box and paste the selected
codes into the report launch window.
2 Click the
(Cancel [F12]) icon to close the dialog box without pasting the
selected codes.
5-162
10/2010
Appendix A:
Common Elements in
QCC Windows
Appendix Contents
Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Resizing Windows or Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Resizing Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Resizing Buttons in Upper Right Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
The Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating through the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resizing Column Widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-6
A-6
A-8
A-8
Filling In Boxes in Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Moving from Tab to Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Moving from One Box to Another. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Selecting Options from Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Typing in a Text Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Checking Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Selecting Option Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Typing or Selecting Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
About Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
User Security Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
10/2010
A-1
Using the Mouse
Use the mouse to control the movement of the pointer on the screen. The pointer usually takes the shape of an arrow, unless you are working with a program, where it may
take the shape of a cursor or other symbol.
Table A-1: Mouse pointer shapes
Appearance
Function
Pointer
Used to select icons or click buttons
Cursor
Used to place insertion point in text
Double-headed Arrow
Used to resize windows or column widths
Hourglass1
Displayed while a program is executing a command
Crosshair
Used in working with graphics
Manipulate the software by pointing the mouse cursor at the desired screen location
and clicking the left or right button on your mouse. This documentation uses several
different terms for the kinds of mouse clicks you can make: click, single-click double-click, right click, drag, and rotate.
♦ Click or single-click means to click once on the left
mouse button (the primary mouse button).
♦ Double-click means to click twice on the left mouse
button.
♦ Drag means to hold down the left mouse button while
moving the mouse.
♦ Right-click means to click once on the right mouse button
(or secondary mouse button).
♦ Rotate means to rotate the wheel button between the primary and secondary mouse buttons.
You can click in any dialog box to move the cursor to that
field.
Alternatively, you can press the TAB key to move the cursor
forward from one input field to the next; and press
SHIFT+TAB simultaneously to move the cursor backwards.
A-2
10/2010
Using the Mouse
NOTE: In most cases, the left mouse button is the primary one. However, you can configure
Windows so that the right mouse button is the primary one. In such cases, use the right
mouse button to click, single-click, double-click, and drag. Use the left mouse button to
right-click.
10/2010
A-3
Resizing Windows or Dialog Boxes
You can resize most windows in dialog boxes in either one or both of the following
ways:
♦ Resizing Borders
♦ Resizing Buttons in Upper Right Corner
In a few cases, windows or dialog boxes are set at a fixed size that you cannot change.
Resizing Borders
In some cases, a window or dialog box that can be made smaller or larger may have a
resizing corner with several diagonal lines across it. But whether it looks resizable or
not, if your mouse pointer becomes a double-headed arrow when you move it over the
edge, then the border can be resized.
Figure A-1: Resizing corners or borders with pointer ready to resize
To resize a corner or other border:
1. Position the mouse pointer where it becomes a double-headed arrow.
2 Press and hold the left mouse button, then drag it inward or outward to resize the
border.
3 Release the mouse button when the window or dialog box is the desired size.
Resizing Buttons in Upper Right Corner
Some windows or dialog boxes may have a set of buttons in their upper right corner.
Figure A-2: Minimize, Restore, and Exit buttons
♦ Clicking the left button ( _ ) in the corner will minimize the window or dialog box.
When it is minimized, it does not take up any space on screen, but it is still open
and can be accessed by clicking its button in the taskbar at the bottom of the
screen.
♦ Clicking the middle button in the corner will do either of two things:
 It will restore a maximized window to its previous medium size (anything
smaller than maximum), as the middle button is shown in Figure A-2, or
A-4
10/2010
Resizing Windows or Dialog Boxes
Resizing Buttons in Upper Right Corner
 It will maximize a medium-sized window, as the middle button is shown in
Figure A-3.
Figure A-3: Minimize, Maximize, and Exit buttons
♦ Clicking the right button (X) in the corner will close the window or dialog box.
Figure A-4: Taskbar showing all open windows
Whether a window or dialog box is minimized, restored, or maximized, it can be
accessed by clicking its button in the taskbar at the bottom of your screen.
10/2010
A-5
The Grid
The instructions for the grid focus on the following areas:
♦ Navigating through the Grid
♦ Sorting the Grid
Navigating through the Grid
Many tabs and subtabs include a grid for displaying data. The grid is arranged like a
spreadsheet. The column headings are on the top of the grid. Each row on the grid is
divided into cells. When a grid is too large to display in the window, it displays vertical and horizontal scroll bars.
Column headings
The vertical
scroll bar
displays when
there are too
many rows to fit
in the window.
Current record
pointer
The horizontal scroll bar displays when the grid is to wide to fit in the windows.
Figure A-5: Grid for QCC applications
A grid includes the following parts:
♦ The column headings display along the top of the grid. They identify the information in each column.
♦ The rows display the data in the grid, much like the rows in a spreadsheet. The columns break up each row into a series of cells. Most grids have row numbers to the
left of the first column, but some do not.
♦ The current record pointer indicates the row that is selected. You can move this
pointer in either of the following ways:
 Clicking in a row.
 Pressing any of the following keys: UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, PAGE UP,
PAGE DOWN, CTRL+HOME, and CTRL+END.
♦ The scroll bars display when the grid is too large to fit in the window.
 On horizontal scroll bars, you can do the following:
> Click a scroll arrow to move the grid one column to the left or the right.
A-6
10/2010
The Grid
Navigating through the Grid
> Click between the scroll box and a scroll arrow to move the grid one visible
window width to the left or the right.
> Drag the scroll box to move the columns to the left or
right.
Scroll arrow
Scroll box
 On vertical scroll bars, you can do the following:
Scroll arrow
Scroll arrow
> Click a scroll arrow to move the grid up or down one
row.
Scroll box
> Click between the scroll box and a scroll arrow to display the previous or next page of rows that fit in the
window.
Scroll arrow
> Drag the scroll box to move the rows up and down.
Table A-1 on page A-8 lists the keyboard shortcuts for navigating through the
grid.
 You can resize and move QCC windows to make more of the grid visible and
possible.
> Click the maximize
button on the upper right corner of the window to
make it fill the entire Windows desktop.
> Resize the window to a custom size. Hover the mouse pointer over the sizing
corner on the lower left corner of the window until it becomes a doubleheaded arrow like this:
Then press and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse to change the
height and width of the window. When the window is the size that you want,
release the left mouse button.
> To move a window, move the mouse pointer over the title bar, press and hold
the mouse button, and drag the window around the desktop.
10/2010
A-7
Table A-1: Keyboard shortcuts for moving through the grid
TO MOVE THE CURSOR
PRESS THESE KEYS
Down one page
PAGE DOWN
Down one row
DOWN ARROW
First column in a row
HOME
First row
CTRL+HOME
Last column in a row
END
Last row
CTRL+END
Left one column
LEFT ARROW
Right one column
RIGHT ARROW
Up one page
PAGE UP
Up one row
UP ARROW
Sorting the Grid
You can sort the grid on any column.
♦ To sort a column in ascending order, double-click a column heading.
♦ To sort a column in descending order, double-click the same column heading a second time.
Resizing Column Widths
When you first open a window in QCC, the column widths are the default for the window. You can make the columns wider or narrower.
To make any column wider or narrower:
1. Move your mouse pointer to the point between two column headings. The column
on the left is the one whose width you are changing. The pointer becomes a double-headed horizontal arrow.
2 Press and hold the mouse button
3 Drag the arrow to the right to make the column wider, or drag the arrow to the left
to make the column narrower.
4 Release the mouse button when the column is the width you want.
A-8
10/2010
Filling In Boxes in Tabs
Moving from Tab to Tab
This heading provides general instructions for filling in the tabs on the report
window:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Moving from One Box to Another
Selecting Options from Lists
Typing in a Text Box
Checking Boxes
Selecting Option Buttons
Typing or Selecting Dates
Many of these topics are basic techniques for using the Windows desktop that are
familiar to experienced Windows users. However, even experienced Windows users
should review the instructions for typing dates.
The active tab has a green dot to the left of its label. The window displays the active
tab.
To make a tab active, do either of the following:
♦ Click the tab label.
♦ Press ALT and the underlined letter in the tab label, such as ALT+R for the Reference Types tab.
Moving from One Box to Another
Each tab contains one or more boxes, lists, check boxes, or option buttons. The active
box is the one that you are currently filling in. Its label changes color and is surrounded by a dotted box.
The background color for a box indicates whether it is available or unavailable:
♦ Boxes with white backgrounds are available, which means that you can type text,
select an option from a list, or check the box.
♦ Boxes with any other color background are unavailable. A common color is yellow, but your site can select gray, blue, orange, or any other color for unavailable
boxes.
10/2010
A-9
Boxes are unavailable because your GUI logon ID does not allow access or because
they are not relevant to the options you have chosen elsewhere in a window. For
example, the District box has a colored background if your QCC logon ID does not
allow selecting the district for which to create a report.
Unavailable box with
colored background (yellow
in this example).
Available boxes with white
backgrounds
Active box with colored
label surrounded by a
dotted box
Figure A-6: Unavailable, available, and active boxes
To activate another box and highlight its contents, do any of the following:
♦ Press TAB to move to the next available box (one with a white background).
♦ Press ALT+TAB to move to the previous available box.
♦ Click the label for an available box.
NOTE: The TAB and SHIFT+TAB keys skip over unavailable boxes, and you cannot select
an unavailable box with the mouse.
Selecting Options from Lists
Drop-down list boxes force you to select from a list of options, such as reporting
approved transactions only, unapproved only, or both. After you click the drop-down
arrow, a list displays the options from which you can choose. The box displays the
option that you have chosen. In most lists, you cannot type text to define your own
options.
Drop-down arrow
Figure A-7: Drop-down list box
To make a selection from a drop-down list box:
1 Click the drop-down arrow or anywhere in the box. The list drops down to display
the options from which you can choose.
Figure A-8: Drop-down list box with options expanded after clicking the drop-down arrow
A-10
10/2010
2 Select an item from the list in any of the following ways:
 Clicking the item.
 Typing the first letter of an item, then moving to another box by clicking
another box or pressing the TAB key.
 Pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to highlight an option, then
clicking another box or pressing any of the following keys: ENTER, TAB, or
SHIFT+TAB.
 Clicking the label for a box, then pressing the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW key to highlight another option. When the option you want is highlighted, click another box or press the TAB key.
Text boxes allow you to type information, such as the description for a report or
range of values to search for.
To edit the contents of a text box, do any of the following:
♦ Position the cursor by clicking in a text box or by pressing the LEFT ARROW or
RIGHT ARROW keys. You can:
 Insert new text to the right of the cursor by typing.
 Press the DELETE key to delete text to the right of the cursor.
 Press the BACKSPACE key to delete text to the left of the cursor.
♦ Delete and add text in a single operation.
 Select text to delete by holding down the SHIFT key, then pressing the LEFT
ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to select text.
 Begin typing. The highlighted text is deleted and replaced with the new text that
you type.
♦ Replace the text with one mouse click.
 Click the label for a box. All of the text is highlighted.
 Type new text. The old text is deleted and replaced with what you type.
10/2010
A-11
♦ Replace everything to the left of the cursor.
 Click and hold the left mouse button anywhere in a text box. The text to the left
of the cursor is highlighted.
 Release the mouse button.
 Delete the text by pressing the DELETE key, or replace the text by typing new
text.
Checking Boxes
Check boxes are square boxes that alternate between the following: selected (checked
for yes) or cleared (not checked for no). If there are multiple group boxes, you can
select or clear each one individually.
Figure A-9: Check boxes with the first one selected and the second one cleared
To select or clear a check box, do either of the following:
♦ Click inside the box. It changes from selected to cleared or from cleared to
selected.
♦ Click the label for the check box, then press the SPACEBAR to alternate between
selected and cleared.
Selecting Option Buttons
Option buttons (also called radio buttons) are for situations where there are several
options, but you can select only one. Option buttons are groups of rounded buttons.
You can select only one button in each group, just as you can select only one preset
radio station at a time on a car radio. For example, the Request Report of Interim Values (J251S1) window has option buttons for selecting whether to create a report for
interim period 1, 2, or 3. Because 3 is the selected option, options 1 and 2 are cleared.
Figure A-10: Option buttons for selecting Interim Period 1, 2, or 3
To select an option, do either of the following:
♦ Click the option button that you want to select. All other options in the group are
cleared.
♦ When an option button is the active field, press the arrow keys to move to the previous or next option button and select it.
A-12
10/2010
Date boxes allow you to type a date or select a date from a calendar. Many transaction
windows allow you to select transactions by date ranges, and many report windows
allow you to select a date range for reports.
Figure A-11: Date box
These instructions tell how to type a date, change a date, select a date from the calendar, and select today from the calendar.
To type a date:
1 Make the date box the active box and highlight the date in either of the following
ways:
 Press the TAB or ALT+TAB key.
 Click the label for the date field.
2 Type the date as an 8-digit number.
Make sure that the entire date field is highlighted. If it is not, use the mouse to
highlight all 8 digits of the date.
The month and day are always 2 digits, and the year is 4 digits. For example, type
February 4, 2008 like this: 02042008.
As you type the date, the box automatically inserts the / characters that separate the
month, day, and year. You cannot type the / (or any other separator between parts
of the date).
To change part of a date:
1 Select the part of the date that you want to change, such as the day or the month,
with the mouse pointer.
2 Type the changes you want to make.
To select a date from the calendar:
1 To display the calendar, click the drop-down arrow for a date box.
2 On the top of the calendar, click the left arrow to display the previous month or the
right arrow to display the next month.
10/2010
A-13
3 To select a date, double-click the date. The calendar closes, and the date field contains the selected date.
4 To close the calendar without selecting a date, press the ESC key.
To select the current date from the calendar:
1 Click the drop-down arrow for a date box.
2 Click Today: dd/mm/yy on the bottom of the calendar.
The calendar displays the current month with today’s date circled in red.
3 Double-click the circled date on the calendar.
The calendar closes, and today’s date displays in the date box.
A-14
10/2010
Help Menu
About Command
Help Menu
These instructions describe the following commands from the Help menu:
♦ About Command
♦ User Security Command
About Command
The tabs display
information about the
QCC module that you
are using and about
your QCC session.
Click a label on the
tab bar to select the
kind of information to
display.
Figure A-12: : About dialog box for the About command on the Help menu
The About command opens an About dialog box that displays information about the
QCC module that you are using and the current QCC session. The instructions for the
About dialog box focus on the following areas:
♦ Commands for the About Dialog Box
♦ Tabs on the About Dialog Box
10/2010
A-15
Commands for the About Dialog Box
Open the System Information dialog box for Windows.
This dialog box is a Windows utility that allows you to display
information about your PC. For more information, see
Microsoft’s on-line help file that is available from the Help
menu.
Close the About dialog box and resume using the window in QCC.
You must close this dialog box before you can resume using the
window.
Click this button twice to rebuild the user security for the current
QCC session.
This button is active only when you select the USERSEC tab.
Click this button only when instructed to do so.
Print a graphic image of the window on the default Windows
Save a graphic image of the dialog box to a .jpg file.
The Save screen as picture dialog box identifies the name of the
file.
Copy the following version information to the Windows clipboard
as plain text:
♦ The Program Info tab
♦ The information on the Package Info tab that displays when
you check the Package Description button
♦ The USERSEC tab
You can paste this information into the body of an email message, a Word document, Notepad, or any other text editor.
HINT: To make it easier to identify the parameters in each
column of the USERSEC tab, use a monospaced font to
display the user security.
A-16
10/2010
Help Menu
About Command
Copy user security or file versions to the Grid Output window.
♦ To copy a list of programs in the current package, click the
Package Info tab, then click this button.
♦ To copy the user security for the current QCC session, click
any other tab, then click this button.
Tabs on the About Dialog Box
Figure A-13 illustrates the tab bar for the About dialog box. Click a tab label to display information about the current QCC module and your QCC session.
Figure A-13: Tab bar for the About dialog box
Program Info Tab
The Program Info tab displays the name of QCC module for the current window,
information about your QCC session, and information about the server session. This
topic gives a brief description of the information displayed. Some of it is technical
information of interest only to the support staff at your IT department.
Figure A-14: Program Info tab for the About dialog box
[module name] The name of the QCC module that corresponds to the current window, version number, compile date, and compile time.
In most cases, a module corresponds to a QCC window. For
example, the QSSGLApplication1 module is the GL Application
window.
10/2010
A-17
Server
The server program, version, compile date, and compile time.
The server program runs on the host HP e3000 computer. The
server program facilitates the exchange of data between the General Ledger database on the HP e3000 and the QCC program on
the PC.
Connection ID The connection ID assigned to your QCC session.
Client User
The GUI user name that you used for logging on to QCC.
District
Site
Year
The district, site, and year number associated with the Server User
listed below.
Server
The DNS name or IP address that QCC uses for connecting to the
HP e3000 server at your site.
Port
The port number for the current module for connecting with the HP
e3000.
Server User
The MPE logon ID linked to the Client User.
In this example, MARC is the user name, and QSSUSER is the
account. This user would type the following command to log on
to the traditional software: HELLO MARC.QSSUSER.
The Client User in QCC inherits all of the user security that is
set up for the Server User with Maintain User Data (MEN020).
Date
The date and time when you opened the dialog box.
Package Info Tab
The Package Info tab displays a variety of information about the package (or version)
of QCC that is installed on your PC. The support staff at your site may ask you for
this information.
♦ Click Package Description to display the QSS-defined description of the
package. The most important information is on the top of the tab.
 The Install Type is either Development (for the production version) or Beta
(for a test version that is deployed to a small group of testers)
A-18
10/2010
Help Menu
About Command
Figure A-15: Package information for QCC on the Package Info tab
 The Build Date/Time tells when the package was created.
 The top of the Version Date box displays the version number for the package.
You may be asked to look up other information from this tab.
♦ Click Site Description to display the custom description that your site has defined.
Sites that are using Package Manager can create their own descriptions.
♦ Click Users to see a list of GUI user names who can run this package. For a production release, it is "#ALL USERS#".
♦ Click Patch History to display a list of any patches that were applied to a package
after it was first released.
♦ Click File Versions to display a grid that lists all of the individual files in the package. You can sort the grid on any column. Double-click a column heading to sort in
ascending order. Double-click it again to sort in descending order. You can select
the [Grid Output] button to open a Grid Output window that allows you to export
the list of programs to Excel, Word, a PDF file, or a text file. For instructions, see
Appendix D.
USERSEC Tab
The USERSEC tab displays the USERSEC (user security) for the Server User listed
on the Program Info tab. The Client User on the Program Info tab (GUI user name)
inherits the user security for the Server User that is linked to the GUI user name.
Maintain User Data (MEN020) allows you to maintain the user security for each
Server User.
10/2010
A-19
Figure A-16 illustrates the USERSEC tab that displays the user security that your system administrator has set up for your GUI logon ID. You can sort the grid on any column. Double-click a column heading to sort in ascending order. Double-click it again
to sort in descending order.
Figure A-16: USERSEC tab for the About dialog box
Program
The program name for the user security.
The Program name identifies the tab or subtab to which the user
security applies. For example, JOURNL is the Program name
for the Journal Entry (FI02JE) subtab. Many other tabs and subtabs have one or more Program names that your system administrator can set up.
[parameters]
A series of letters and numbers up to 60 characters long.
The parameters for each user security record allow your system
administrator to customize how the program works. For example, the parameters for JOURNL allow your system administrator to give you either single- or multi-district access, specify
whether journal entries are approved when you enter them, and
grant or deny access to the commands for adding, changing,
inspecting, and deleting journal entries.
The parameters are different for each Program name. Your system administrator uses the set-up instructions in Module, Task,
and User Security for QCC to identify the Program names for
each tab or subtab and to interpret the meaning of each column
of the parameters.
A-20
10/2010
Help Menu
User Security Command
Logging Tab
The Logging tab is primarily for testing during software development. Use this tab
only if you are explictly instructed to do so.
Diagnostics Tab
The Diagnostics tab is primarily for testing during software development. Use this tab
only if you are explicitly instructed to do so.
User Security Command
Figure A-17: User Security window for the Security command on the Help menu
♦ Overview
♦ Commands
♦ Columns in the Grid
Overview
The User Security command allows you to open a User Security window that displays the user security (USERSEC) for the window. User security allows your system
administrator to maintain set-up options, such as whether you can use the commands
for adding, changing, or deleting transactions.
Commands
There are only three commands for the User Security window:
♦ Click the
(Cancel [F12]) icon to close the window.
♦ Click the
(Print Screen [F11]) icon print a copy of the window on the default
Windows printer for your PC.
10/2010
A-21
♦ Click the
(Grid Output [F8]) icon to open a Grid Output window that allows
you to save the contents of the grid as a Word, Excel, PDF, or plain text file. For
instructions, see Appendix E.
Columns in the Grid
Figure A-18 illustrates the grid that displays the user security records for a window.
You can sort the grid on any column. Double-click a column heading to sort in
ascending order. Double-click it again to sort in descending order.
Figure A-18: Columns in the grid for the User Security window
User Sec
The program name for the user security.
The User Sec name identifies the tab or subtab to which the user
security applies. For example, JOURNL is the User Sec name
for the Journal Entry (FI02JE) subtab. Many other tabs and subtabs have one or more User Sec names that your system administrator can set up.
Data
A series of letters and numbers up to 60 characters long.
The parameters for each user security record allow your system
administrator to customize how the program works. For example, the parameters for JOURNL allow your system administrator to give you either single- or multi-district access, specify
whether journal entries are approved when you enter them, and
grant or deny access to the commands for adding, changing,
inspecting, and deleting journal entries.
The parameters are different for each User Sec name. Your system administrator uses the set-up instructions in Module, Task,
and User Security for QCC to identify the User Sec names for
each tab or subtab and what parameters to fill in for the Data.
A-22
10/2010
Appendix B:
Presets
Appendix Contents
Overview of Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Presets Do. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presets for QCC and Traditional Financial Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Categories and Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
B-1
B-2
B-2
Saving Report Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving and Replacing Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boxes for Saving Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3
B-3
B-4
B-5
Retrieving or Deleting Report Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting, Retrieving, and Deleting Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information About Saved Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7
B-7
B-7
B-8
Overview of Presets
This appendix looks at the following aspects of report presets:
♦ What Presets Do
♦ Presets for QCC and Traditional Financial Reports
♦ Categories and Levels
What Presets Do
Presets allow you to save and recall snapshots of searches that you define on the GL
Account Lookup window and report parameters for launching financial reports. Thus,
for example, once you have figured out the right combination of parameters for the
General Ledger Report Writer (GLDSUB) window, such as account masks, field
ranges, and reference types, you can save a snapshot of the report window as a preset.
The next time you want to run that report with the same parameters, you can retrieve
the preset. The report window pre-fills with the saved parameters, and you can make
any needed changes to date range or other parameters before launching the report.
Your site can create a library of presets that you can use over and over again.
10/2010
B-1
Appendix B: Presets
Presets for QCC and Traditional Financial Reports
There are two separate sets of report presets for each financial report:
♦ QCC report presets. After you log on to QCC, the QCC software runs. The report
window allows you to save and retrieve presets for the QCC software.
♦ Traditional report presets. After you start Reflection or Minisoft and type the
:HELLO command to log on, the traditional software runs. The report launch
screens allow you to save and retrieve report presets for the traditional software.
The two sets of presets are completely separate. The QCC software displays only the
QCC presets, and the traditional software displays only the traditional presets.
Even though the QCC and traditional presets are different, the reports created through
both sources are identical. For example, both the QCC or traditional version of the
General Ledger Report Writer create exactly the same general ledger reports.
Categories and Levels
Categories and levels are optional ways to classify presets. Categories are groupings
for presets, and levels define who has access to a preset. The user security for your
user name determines the categories and levels to which you have access.
Categories
You can define categories as a way to classify presets. Each category has a name up to
4 characters long and a description up to 30 characters long. Maintain Categories
(PREMNT) allows you to define the categories. When you are saving or retrieving
categories, the list of categories displays the categories that your set-up options allow
access to.
As of August 2007, there is no QCC version of Maintain Categories (PREMNT). For
instructions on using the traditional version of PREMNT, see Appendix I in the
QSS/OASIS Payroll Manual and Appendix 1D in the QSS/OASIS Enhanced Payroll
Manual.
Levels
When you are saving or retrieving presets, the system allows you to select presets for
your user name only, all users with access to a category, anyone in the district, or all
QCC users at your site.
For more information about user security for PRESET, see the "Chapter 2:
QFINANCE Application" chapter in Modules, Tasks, and User Security for QCC.
B-2
10/2010
Saving Report Presets
Purpose
♦ Purpose
♦ Saving and Replacing Presets
♦ Boxes for Saving Presets
Purpose
After you select the Save Preset or Save Report Preset command, the Preset Maintenance - Save dialog box allows you to save the preset. The top of the dialog box
allows you to give a name to the preset you are saving, and the grid in the bottom of
the dialog box lists the presets that are already defined for the report or GL Account
Lookup window. See page B-7 for an explanation of this grid.
Commands for
saving presets
Boxes for naming
and categorizing
the preset
Grid of presets that
have already been
saved. Double-click
any column heading
to sort in ascending
order. Double-click
again to sort in
descending order.
Figure B-1: Preset Maintenance - Save dialog box
10/2010
B-3
Appendix B: Presets
Saving and Replacing Presets
These instructions tell how to exit without saving, save a new preset, and replace an
existing preset.
To exit without saving, do any of the following:
♦ From the menus, click File and Exit.
♦ Press F12.
To save a new preset:
 In the report window, define report settings that you want to save. Then select
Options and Save Report Preset from the menus or click the
[Save Report
Preset] icon.
 In the GL Account Lookup window, define a search that you want to save. Then
select Options and Save Preset from the menus or click the
[Save Preset]
icon.
2 In the Preset Maintenance - Save dialog box, type a Name up to 16 characters
long. Every preset must have a name.
3 If desired, type a Description up to 30 characters long and select the Category and
Allow Access options.
4 Save the preset by clicking Options and Save from the menus or by clicking the
[Save] icon.
WARNING: If the preset you are saving the same Name as an existing preset, the Save
command replaces the existing preset without any warning.
To replace a preset:
[Save Report
Preset] icon.
[Save Preset]
icon.
2 Locate the preset that you want to replace on the grid.
B-4
10/2010
Boxes for Saving Presets
3 Double-click the preset. Its Name, Description, Category, and Allow Access
option display on the top of the dialog box.
4 Leave the Name unchanged. You can change the Description, Category, and
Allow Access options. Replace the existing preset with the revised preset by
selecting Options and Save from the menus or by clicking the
[Save] icon.
To create a new preset from an existing one:
[Save Report
Preset] icon.
[Save Preset]
icon.
2 On the grid, locate the preset that is the basis for creating a new one. If needed, use
the scroll bar to scroll through the list.
3 Double-click a preset in the grid. Its Name, Description, Category, and Allow
Access option display on the top of the dialog box.
4 On the top of the screen, type a new Name. You can also change the Description,
Category, and Allow Access options.
5 Create the new preset by selecting Options and Save from the menus or by clicking the
[Save] icon.
Boxes for Saving Presets
This heading provides a detailed description of the boxes for saving report presets.
Figure B-2: Fields for saving report presets
Name
Type a name up to 16 characters long.
Names are case sensitive. All of the following are different presets: JuneRep, junerep, JUNEREP, and Junerep.
Description
10/2010
Type a description up to 30 characters long.
B-5
Category
Appendix B: Presets
The Category box displays the default category for your logon ID.
♦ The default choice of the Global Category(blank) means
that the preset is not assigned to a category.
♦ The Category list displays the categories that are defined for
your site and to which you have access.
To assign the report preset to a category, click the drop-down
arrow and select a category from the list.
Allow Access
The box displays the default access for your QCC user name.
To select another access level, click the drop-down arrow and
select it from the list.
♦ Select Only your ’U’ser ID to create a preset for your use
only.
♦ Select Users with access to this ’C’ategory to save a preset
that anyone with access to the category that you specify can
use.
♦ Select Any user in the ’D’istrict to save a preset that is
available to any user who logs on to the district in the title bar
for the report window.
♦ Select Any user on the ’S’ystem to save a preset that is
available to anyone who can log on to QCC.
[list of presets] The dialog box lists the saved presets for the report.
You can sort this list on any column. Double-click a column
label to sort it in ascending order (A to Z). Double-click a column label a second time to sort in descending order (Z to A).
For more information about this list, see the description under
Figure B-3 on page B-7.
B-6
10/2010
Retrieving or Deleting Report Presets
Purpose
♦ Purpose
♦ Selecting, Retrieving, and Deleting Presets
♦ Information About Saved Presets
Purpose
After you select the Retrieve Report Preset command, a Preset Maintenance Retrieve dialog box displays. It lists all of the presets that have been saved for the current report. You can do either of the following:
♦ Delete a preset.
♦ Retrieve a preset. The GL Account Lookup window or report window pre-fills with
the saved search or report parameters. You can edit the window before searching or
launching a report.
Selecting, Retrieving, and Deleting Presets
These instructions tell how to select, retrieve, and delete presets.
Commands for
retrieving presets
List for selecting a
category of report
presets
Grid of the report
presets that you can
retrieve or delete
Figure B-3: Preset Maintenance - Retrieve dialog box
10/2010
B-7
Appendix B: Presets
To select a report preset for retrieving or deleting:
1 By default, the dialog box displays presets for all categories. You can select an
individual category from the Only list this Category box.
2 You can sort the list by any column. Double-click to sort in ascending order (A to
Z). Double-click a second time to sort in descending order (Z to A).
3 Click a preset or press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to move the
indicator that points to the selected preset.
To retrieve the selected preset, do any of the following:
♦ From the menus, click File and Exit.
♦ From the toolbar, click the
[Retrieve] icon.
♦ Press F2.
HINT: You can retrieve a preset by double-clicking it.
To delete the selected preset, do any of the following:
♦ From the menus, click Options and Delete.
♦ From the toolbar, click the
[Delete] icon.
♦ Press CTRL+F8.
Information About Saved Presets
The grid lists information about the saved presets.
Figure B-4: Information about saved presets in the grid
Ln
A line number assigned for the list.
Name
A name up to 16 characters long.
Names are case sensitive. All of the following are different presets: JuneRep, JUNEREP, junerep, and Junerep.
DI
B-8
The district number for the preset.
10/2010
Cat
Information About Saved Presets
The category for a preset.
The cell is blank for presets that are assigned to the global
(default) category.
Description
A description up to 30 characters long.
User ID
The 4-character audit ID of the user who saved the preset.
Every QCC user name is assigned to a server user on the HP
e3000. The server user has a 4-character audit id that the system
uses for keeping track of who added or changed records in the
database.
Date
The date that the preset was created.
Level
The access level for the preset.
The code in this column corresponds to the Allow Access option
selected when the preset was saved on the Preset Maintenance Save dialog box.
CODE
10/2010
ALLOW ACCESS OPTION
U
Only your ’U’ser ID
C
Users with access to this ’C’ategory
D
Any user in the ’D’istrict
S
Any user on the ’S’ystem
B-9
B-10
Appendix B: Presets
10/2010
Appendix C:
Vendor Lookup Window
and Reports
Appendix Contents
Vendor Lookup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for Vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tabs on the Vendor Lookup Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-2
C-2
C-5
C-6
Vendor Information Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Menu Bar and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Vendor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Link to Vendor Activity Report
Vendor Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Transaction Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Vendor Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
Report Viewing Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
10/2010
C-1
The instructions for using the Vendor Lookup window focus on the following areas:
♦ Overview of Window
♦ Searching for Vendors
♦ Tabs on the Vendor Lookup Window
Overview of Window
Title bar
Menu bar and toolbar
Message bar
Tab bar
Status bar
Figure C-1: Parts of the Vendor Lookup window
♦ The title bar displays the name of the window and the current district number and
name for your QCC session.
♦ The menu bar and toolbar contain the commands for searching for the vendors and
displaying them. For a list, see Table C-1 on page C-4.
♦ The message bar displays a variety of messages, such as the number of vendors
found in a search. The color code on the right side indicates the fiscal year. The
default codes are green for the current year, blue for a future year, and red for a
previous year. (Your site can choose different colors.)
♦ The tab bar contains a series of tabs for looking up and displaying a vendor. To
select a tab, click its label or press ALT plus the underlined letter in the label. A
green dot indicates the active tab.
 The following tabs are for searching for vendors: Vendor Lookup tab, Tin
Lookup tab, Commodity Lookup tab, and Employee Lookup tab.
C-2
10/2010
Overview of Window
 The Results tab displays a list of vendors that match the search criteria in the
other 4 tabs
♦ The status bar displays the current date and time. If you hover the mouse pointer
over the date, a tooltip displays the date and time that you opened the Vendor
Lookup window.
10/2010
C-3
Table C-1: Commands for the Vendor Lookup window
COMMAND
MENU
Clear Screen
Options
Clear Settings on
Exit
File
Display Vendor
Activity
KEYBOARD
DESCRIPTION
Shift+F1
Clear the search criteria on the Vendor Lookup tab, Tin Lookup
tab, Commodity Lookup tab, or Employee Lookup tab. This
command clears only the contents of the current tab with the
green dot in its label.
none
Select this command to clear your custom settings when you
close the window. By default, the system remembers the size
Options
Ctrl+H
Create a Vendor Activity report that displays transactions
against the vendor for the date range that you specify. The
reports opens as a Web page in the QCC help viewer. For
details, see page C-20.
Display Vendor Info
Options
Ctrl+I
Create a Vendor Information report for the vendor selected in
the Results tab. The report opens as a Web page in the QCC
help viewer. For details, see page C-17.
Exit
File
F12
Close the Vendor Lookup window.
First Page
Options
Shift+F5
Display the first page of vendors that match the current search
criteria in the Results tab.
Get Preset
Options
F4
Retrieve a preset that fills in the search criteria for vendors from
a preset previously created with the Save Preset command. For
instructions, see page B-7
Last Page
Options
Shift+F6
Display the last page of vendors in the Results tab.
Next Page
Options
F6
Display the next page of vendors in the Results tab.
Output Grid
Options
Shift+F11
Display the contents of the Results tab in a Grid Output window
that allows you to print the grid or save it to a text, Word, Excel,
or PDF file. For instructions, see Appendix D.
Previous Page
Options
F5
Display the previous page of vendors in the Results tab.
Print Screen
Options
F11
Print a graphic image of the window on the default Windows
Return Vendor
Options
F2
Paste the vendor you have selected in the Results tab into the
window or dialog box your were using when you began the vendor look-up.
Save Preset
Options
F9
Save the search criteria in the window as a preset that you can
reuse for another search. For instructions, see page B-3.
Search for Vendors
Options
F3
After you have filled in the search criteria on the Vendor Lookup
tab, Tin Lookup tab, Commodity Lookup tab, and Employee
Lookup tab, select this command to search for matching vendors and display the results in the Results tab.
Settings
File
none
Ctrl+S
Open a Settings dialog box that allows you to define the number
of vendor records per page for the Results tab and the Vendor
Activity report.
Show Status
File
none
Ctrl+F12
Open a dialog box that displays the commands executed during
your QCC session. This information is typically of interest only to
software developers.
Vendor Maintenance
Options
F7
Display the vendor selected on the Results tab in the Vendor
Maintenance window. The system opens a Vendor Maintenance
window if one is not open already.
C-4
ICON
none
none
10/2010
Searching for Vendors
Searching for Vendors
These instructions tell how to search for vendors. You can search by almost every
piece of vendor information on the Vendor Maintenance window.
To search for vendors:
1 Fill in the search criteria for vendors.
To type search criteria, click a tab label and fill in the search criteria. The active tab
has a green dot in its label.
 The Vendor Lookup tab allows you to search contact information and optional
information from the Contact Information and Optional Information tabs of the
Vendor Information window. For details, see page C-7.
 The Tin Lookup tab allows you look up vendor that are active or inactive as of a
certain date. For details, see page C-11.
 The Commodity Lookup tab allows you to look vendors by a range of commodity codes or specific commodity codes. For details, see page C-12.
 The Employee Lookup tab allows you to look up vendors by employee number
or tax ID number. For details, see page C-12.
If you fill in multiple search criteria, a vendor must match all of them to be
selected.
To clear the search criteria in a tab, click the
2 Click the
(Clear Screen [Ctrl+F1]) icon.
(Search for Vendors [F3]) icon.
The Result tab displays a grid of vendors that match the search criteria that you
supplied.
3 On the Result tab, select the vendor that you want to look up. For details, see page
C-13.
4 Do any of the following:
 Click the
(Vendor Maintenance [F7]) icon to paste the vendor number into
the window or dialog box from which you opened the Vendor Lookup dialog
box.
10/2010
C-5
 Click the
(Display Vendor Info [Ctrl+I]) icon to create a Vendor Information report that includes all vendor information from the Vendor Maintenance
window.
This report displays in the Help Viewer window for QCC. For instructions, see
page C-17.
 Click the
(Display Vendor Activity [Ctrl+H]) icon to create a Vendor Activity report of transactions for the vendor.
This report displays in the Help Viewer window for QCC. You can also explore
the list of transaction to a Grid Output window. For instructions, see page C-20.
HINT: To see what you can do for a vendor, right-click the row in the Results tab that displays information about a vendor. The tasks that you can do are in dark text, and the tasks
that you cannot do appear dimmed.
Tabs on the Vendor Lookup Window
This topic focuses on the following areas:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Criteria for all Search Tabs
Vendor Lookup Tab
TIN Lookup Tab
Commodity Lookup Tab
Employee Lookup Tab
Results Tab
Criteria for all Search Tabs
The top row is the same for the Vendor Lookup tab, Tin Lookup tab, Commodity
Lookup tab, and Employee Lookup tab. This row defines basic selection criteria for
all searches.
Figure C-2: Search criteria for all vendor search tabs
District
If the box has a white background, select a district.
If the background is shaded, you can select vendors only for
your own district.
Date
C-6
Type a date to search for vendors edited on or after this date.
10/2010
Status
Select the status of vendors to search for.
♦ Active vendors are those for whom you can set up payments.
♦ Inactive vendors are those that have been deleted, or flagged
as inactive. They are still in the vendor master file, but you
cannot make any payments to them.
♦ Both active and inactive vendors.
Include
additional
addresses
Select this check box to add an Add’l Address Count column to
the Results tab that displays the number of additional addresses on
file for each vendor.
Include
commodity
codes
Select this check box to add a Commodity Codes column to the
Results tab that displays the number of commodity codes on file for
each vendor.
Vendor Lookup Tab
The Vendor Lookup tab allows you to look up vendors by the information on the Contact Information tab and Optional Information tab on the Vendor Maintenance window.
♦ Click the Contact Information subtab to search for information on the Contact
Information tab of the Vendor Maintenance window.
♦ Click the Additional Information subtab to search for information on the Optional
Information tab of the Vendor Maintenance window.
Contact Information Subtab
The Contact Information subtab allows you to select a vendor by almost any piece of
information on the Contact Information tab of the Vendor Maintenance window.
Figure C-3:: Contact Information subtab for searching vendor records
10/2010
C-7
Default Vendor Search for information by the default vendor name on the left side
of the Contact Information tab.
Name
Name
The default vendor name. You can use partial words and wildcards
for searching.
♦ Type text to match any name that starts with the specified letters. For example, a search for home matches any of the following: Home Savings, Homer’s Office
Supplies, and Homeworks and Hardware
Center.
♦ Type an * to match anywhere in a name. For example, a
search for *off matches any of the following: Hoffman’s
Supplies, Office Depot, and Half Off
Warehouse.
Search
Remit?
Select this check box to include the remit name in the search for the
vendor name.
Address
The vendor address. You can use the same partial words and wildcards as those for the vendor Name.
City
The vendor’s city. You can use the same partial words and wildcards as those for the Name.
State
A 2-character state code.
Zip
A 5-digit ZIP code.
Remit Name
Remit
Name
Search for vendors by the remit address on the right side of the
Contact Information tab.
The remit name from the right side of the
You can use the same partial words and wildcards as those for
the Name.
C-8
Remit
address
You can use the same partial words and wildcards as those for the
Name.
City
You can use the same partial words and wildcards as those for the
Name.
State
A 2-character state code.
Zip
A 5-digit ZIP code.
10/2010
Vendor
Number
A 6-digit vendor number.
Contact
A contact person. You can use the same partial words and wildcards
as those for the Name.
Phone
A 3-digit area code followed by a 7-digit phone number.
Type only the digits. You cannot type the hyphen between the
prefix and the number.
Fax
A 3-digit area code followed by a 7-digit phone number (digits
only, with no hyphen).
1099
Select one of the option buttons to select vendors to search.
♦ Yes for vendors flagged to receive 1099s by default in the
vendor master file.
♦ No for vendors not flagged for 1099s.
♦ All for all vendors regardless of 1099 status.
10/2010
Name
Name of person designated to receive the 1099 for the vendor.
Preset
The default flag for 1099 reporting when you make payments to a
vendor.
Tax ID
The tax ID number for 1099 reporting.
SSN
The SSN for vendors whose personal SSN is the same as their TIN
for 1099 reporting.
Use Tax
The use tax preset for a vendor.
Use tax 1
Use tax 2
The use tax rates for a vendor, which are a number from 0.000 to
9.999 percent.
Terms
The number of days allowed for taking a discount for early
payment.
Account
Number
A free-form account number up to 20 characters long. You can use
the same partial words and wildcards as those for the vendor Name.
Rating
A free-form rating code up to 8 characters long.
C-9
Msg Flag
A code for withhold orders.
The system-defined code Y means "Withhold order on file."
Each site can define additional codes 0 through 9.
Comment
A free-form comment up to 80 characters long. You can use the
same partial words and wildcards as those for the vendor Name.
Type
A 2-character vendor type code.
♦ If your site validates these codes, the two choices are blank
for standard accounts payable vendors and RC for revolving
cash vendors.
♦ If you site does not validate this code, it can be any 2-character code.
Category
A 4-character vendor category.
Your site can assign each vendor to up to 10 categories in the
vendor master file.
Additional Information Subtab
The Additional Information Subtab allows you to select vendors based on information
in the Optional Information tab of the Vendor Maintenance window.
Figure C-4: Additional Information subtab for looking up vendors
C-10
Direct Deposit
Information
The Direct Deposit Information area allows you to look up vendors who are set up for direct deposit.
Transaction
Type
Select a type from the list.
Transit/ABA
number
The bank and branch number.
10/2010
Account
number
The bank account number.
Contact
The Contact area allows you to look up contact information from
the Vendor Maintenance window.
Name
The contact name.
Phone
A 10-digit phone number with 3-digit area code, 3-digit prefix, and
4-digit number.
Type only the digits 0 through 9. The box does not allow spaces,
hyphens, or any other such characters.
Title
A job title.
Fax
4-digit number.
Department
The department for the contact.
Mobile
4-digit number.
E-mail
The e-mail address for the contact.
Pager
4-digit number.
Web Page
The URL for the contact’s Web page.
TIN Lookup Tab
The Tin Lookup tab allows you to look up vendors by the Tax ID number on the Contact Information tab of the Vendor Maintenance window.
Tax ID
Number
10/2010
Type a 9-digit tax ID number for a vendor, which can be either a tax
ID for a business or the SSN for an individual.
C-11
Commodity Lookup Tab
The Commodity Lookup tab allows you to search for vendors based on the Commodies tab on the Vendor Maintenance window.
Figure C-5: Commodity Lookup tab for looking up vendors by commodity code
Commodity
Code Range
A range of codes.
You can make the range of codes as specific or general as you
like. Here are a couple of examples:
♦ To select all codes that start with the capital letters I through
ssR, make the From code I and the to code R.
♦ To select all codes that start with the letter D, make the From
code D and the to code DZ.
This search is case sensitive. For example a search for codes I
through R locates only the codes that begin with upper-case letter I through R. It does not locate codes that begin with the
lower-case letters i through r.
Commodity
Codes
Up to 5 commodity codes.
This list is case sensitive and requires and exact match. For
example, a site uses the commodity code OFFICE. None of the
following codes are a match: Office, office, or OFFICe.
Employee Lookup Tab
The Employee Lookup tab allows you to look up employees who are also set up as
vendors.
Figure C-6: Employee Lookup tab for looking up SSNs and ExtRef numbers
C-12
10/2010
To look up employees who are also vendors:
1 Select the Employee # check box to search by the 6-digit ExtRef number, or select
the SSN box to select by SSN.
 The Employee # is a 6-digit ExtRef number.
 The SSN must be the full 9 digits. There are no wildcard matches.
2 In the box, type a 6-digit ExtRef or a 9-digit SSN.
Results Tab
The instructions for the Reference Types tab focus on the following areas:
♦ Selecting a Vendor
♦ Columns in the Vendor List
♦ Adjusting the Number of Vendors per Page
Selecting a Vendor
After you click the
(Search for Vendors [F3]) icon, the Results tab displays vendors that match the selection criteria on the Vendor Lookup tab, Tin Lookup tab,
Commodity Lookup tab, and Employee Lookup tab.
To select a vendor from the list:
1 If desired, sort the list.
By default, the Results tab lists vendors alphabetically by the Vendor Name column. You can sort the list on any other column.
 To sort in ascending order (A - Z), double-click a column heading.
 To sort in descending order (Z - A), double-click a column heading a second
time.
2 Locate the vendor that you want to select.
 If the list is too long to fit in the window, you can scroll through the list by dragging vertical scroll bar or pressing the following keys: PAGE UP, PAGE
DOWN, UP ARROW, and DOWN ARROW.
 If the page counter in the status bar indicates there are multiple pages, use the
VCR buttons to move through the pages.
10/2010
C-13
Display the first page in the list..
Display the last page in the list..
Display the previous page in the list.
Display the next page in the list.
Figure C-7: VCR buttons for vendor lists
3 To see what actions you can take for a vendor, right-click anywhere in its row.
The actions that you can take are in dark type, and the actions that you cannot take
appear dimmed.
Figure C-8: Right-click menu for a vendor
 Line: 5 identifies the current line number in the list of vendors.
 Show Additional Addresses opens a dialog box that displays additional
addresses. For details, see page C-16.
 Show Commodities opens a dialog box that displays the commodity codes for
the vendor. For details, see page C-16.
 Display Vendor Info creates a detailed report of vendor information that displays in the QCC Help Viewer window. For instructions, see page C-17.
 Display Vendor Activity creates a Vendor Activity report that displays financial
activity for the vendor in the QCC Help Viewer window. For instructions, see
page C-20.
 Maintain Vendor opens a Vendor Maintenance window that allows you to maintain information about the vendor.
 Return Vendor pastes the vendor number into the dialog box or window from
which you invoked the search.
Columns in the Vendor List
Figure C-9: Results tab listing of vendors that match search criteria
[line number]
C-14
The line number in the current page of the grid.
10/2010
Vendor Name
A name up to 30 character long.
Vendor
Number
A 2-digit district number followed by a 6-digit vendor number.
Each district has its own set of vendors.
Status
A for active or I for inactive (deleted).
Contact
The name in the Contact box on the Contact Information tab of the
Vendor Maintenance window.
Phone Number The phone number from the Contact Information tab of the Vendor
Maintenance window.
Commodity
Codes
The number of commodity codes on the Commodities tab of the
Vendor Maintenance window.
This column displays only when you select the Include commodity codes check box when searching.
Add’l Address
Counts
The number of additional addresses on the Add’l Addresses tab of
the Vendor Maintenance window.
This column displays only when you select the Include additional addresses check box when searching.
Adjusting the Number of Vendors per Page
You can adjust the number of vendor records that display in each page on the Results
tab. The default is 100 vendors on each page. You can make the page size larger or
smaller.
To adjust the number of vendors per page:
1 Click the File menu, then click Settings.
2 In the Settings dialog box, type the number of vendor per page in the Number of
Recs Per Grid Page box.
3 Close the dialog box.
10/2010
 Click the
(Return [F2]) icon to save your changes.
 Click the
changes.
(Cancel [F12]) icon to close the dialog box without saving your
C-15
Show Additional Addresses Dialog Box
Figure C-10: Show additional addresses dialog box
The dialog box displays the additional addresses for a vendor from the Add’l
Addresses tab of the Vendor Maintenance window. You can do the following:
♦ Click the
(Grid Output [F11]) icon to display the address list in a Grid Output
window. From there, you can print the list or save it to a file. For instructions, see
Appendix D.
♦ Click the
(Close) icon to close the dialog box.
Show Commodities Dialog Box
Figure C-11: Show commodities dialog box
The dialog box displays the commodities from the Commodities tab of the Vendor
Maintenance window. You can do the following:
♦ Click the
(Grid Output [F11]) icon to display the list in a Grid Output window.
From there, you can print the list or save it to a file. For instructions, see Appendix
D.
♦ Click the
C-16
(Close) icon to close the dialog box.
10/2010
Vendor Information Report
Menu bar, toolbar, and
status bar for viewing
reports (page C-26)
Vendor Information
report for the vendor
[Report content truncated for this sample]
Link to click for
creating a Vendor
Activity report (page
C-20)
Figure C-12: Parts of the Vendor Information report
The Vendor Information report displays the information about the selected vendor on
the Results tab. The instructions focus on the following areas:
♦ Menu Bar and Toolbar
♦ Account Summary
♦ Link to Vendor Activity Report
During a QCC session, you can create many different reports in the report window,
and each report can have multiple pages. The menu bar and toolbar contain the commands that you can use for selecting which report to view and to go from page to page
within each report. For instructions, see page C-26.
10/2010
C-17
Vendor Information
This heading focuses in on each section of the Vendor Information report. Each section displays information from one of the tabs on the Vendor Maintenance window.
Figure C-13: Vendor information from the Contact Information tab
Figure C-14: Vendor information from the Optional Information tab
C-18
10/2010
Figure C-15: Vendor information from the Addt’l Addresses tab
Figure C-16: Vendor information from the Comments tab
Click View Vendor Activity to create a Vendor Activity report that lists transactions
for a vendor. You can select the types of transaction to report and the date range. For
details, see page C-20.
10/2010
C-19
Vendor Activity Report
The instructions for the Vendor Activity report focus on the following areas:
♦ Transaction Selection
♦ Vendor Activity Report
Transaction Selection
Figure C-17 illustrates the Vendor Activity dialog box for selecting the vendor and
transactions for the Vendor Activity report.
♦ The box displays the selections from the last time you used it during the session.
♦ You can press the [Clear] button to reset the box to its default settings of the
Beginning Date for the start of the fiscal year, the Ending Date for the end of the
fiscal year, and Ascending checked.
After you are finished filling in the dialog box, click the [OK] button to create the
Vendor Activity report or the [Cancel] button to return to window on which you
clicked the
(Display Vendor Activity [Ctrl+H]) icon.
Figure C-17: Transaction selections for the Vendor Activity report
Vendor
Number
The box displays the selected vendor.
You can type another vendor number.
C-20
10/2010
Transaction Selection
Beginning Date Type or select a range of dates.
Ending Date
The date range can span multiple fiscal years.
Ascending
Select the check box to sort the transactions with the oldest first and
newest last.
Clear the check box to list the most recent transactions first.
Transaction
Types
Leave blank, or select transaction types.
♦ Leave blank to include all transaction types in the Vendor
Activity report.
♦ To limit the report, select one or more transaction types.
 To select one type, click it.
 To select multiple types, hold down the CTRL key and
click the types to report.
 To select a range, click the start of the range, hold down
the SHIFT key, and then click the end of the range.
Reference
Number
To search for a specific reference number, type it.
The search applies to all Transaction Types that you have
selected. For example, you select type 8039, but do not specify
any Transaction Types. The search locates activity for PO008039, PV-008039, and any other transaction type that has that
number.
PO Acct Line # FOR A SINGLE PO TRANSACTION ONLY
By default, the Reference Number box has a shaded background, which means you cannot type a number in it. This box
becomes available only when you are creating a report for a specific PO.
To make the PO Acct Line # available:
1 In the Transaction Types list, select PO - Purchase
orders/payments. Do not select any other transaction types.
2 Type the PO number in the Reference Number box.
3 Type the PO Acct Line # for which to look up vendor
activity.
10/2010
C-21
Invoice
Number
To search for a specific invoice number, type it.
♦ For PO payments, this search matches against the Invoice
Description for each PO payment.
♦ For all other payments transactions, the search matches
against the Description for the entire transaction.
The search is an exact match that is case sensitive. For example,
a transaction has an invoice number of INCREASE BALANCE.
To match this invoice number, you must type it *exactly* as it
appears in the transaction record. For example, all of the following do not match this example: increase balance (wrong
case) and INCREASE BAL (incomplete text).
Menu bar, toolbar, and
status bar for viewing
reports (page C-26)
Summary of vendor
information
Summary of financial
activity by transaction type
List of transactions for the
vendor
Figure C-18: Parts of the Vendor Activity Report
The Vendor Information report displays the information about the selected vendor on
the Results tab. The instructions focus on the following areas:
C-22
10/2010
♦
♦
♦
♦
Summary of Vendor Information
Summary of Financial Information
List of Transactions
During a QCC session, you can create many different reports in the report window,
and each report can have multiple pages. The menu bar and toolbar contain the commands that you can use for selecting which report to view and to go from page to page
within each report. For instructions, see page C-26.
Summary of Vendor Information
This area displays
the selections you
made for limiting the
report to transaction
types, a reference
number, or invoice
number.
Figure C-19: Summary of vendor information
Click the vendor number to create a Vendor Information report. For details, see page
C-17.
Summary of Financial Information
Figure C-20: Summary of financial information
The summary includes the following information for each transaction type:
♦ The encumbered balance for POs.
♦ The pending payment for POs and for non-encumbered transactions, such as pay
vouchers, travel claims, and revolving cash.
♦ The actual payments disburse to the vendor on warrants.
10/2010
C-23
List of Transactions
Figure C-21: List of transactions
Entered
The date on which the transaction was created in QCC.
Reference
A reference type and reference number, such as PV-004329 for pay
voucher 4329 or TC-000432 for travel claim 432.
You can click the Reference number to create a report showing
the details of the transaction.
♦ For POs created from a requisition, this action creates a Purchase Order report that displays the header information for
the requisition. At the bottom of the report, you can click the
View Payment Details link to create a P.O. Payment Details
report and the View Receipts Details links to create a Purchase Order Receipts report.
♦ For all other accounts payable transactions, this action opens
a report viewing window that displays the header information
for the transaction and its accounts.
Requisition
The requisition number (transaction type PX) for a purchase order
created from a requisition.
You can click the Reference number to create a Purchase Order
report that displays the header information for the requisition. At
the bottom of the report, you can click the View Payment Details
link to create a P.O. Payment Details report and the View
Receipts Details links to create a Purchase Order Receipts
report.
This column is blank for a PO that was not created from a requisition and for all other transaction types, such as pay vouchers or
travel claims.
Paid
C-24
For a paid transaction, the date paid.
10/2010
Warrant
Number
For a paid transaction, the warrant number.
You can click the Warrant Number to create a report showing
the full details for the warrant.
Enc
For purchase orders:
♦ A positive number represents encumbrances against appropriations when a PO is created or extended.
♦ A negative number represents a liquidation of the encumbrance for payments made against a PO.
This column is blank for all other transaction types.
Amount
The dollar amount paid to the vendor.
[accoount]
The account for posting encumbrances or expenses.
You can click an account to get an Account Summary report/
Invoice No
One of the following from the transaction information in the
Accounts Payable window:
♦ For PO payments, the Invoice Description for each payment
made against a PO.
♦ For all other transactions, the Description assigned to the
entire transaction.
10/2010
C-25
Report Viewing Window
Figure C-22 illustrates the commands for the report window for the Account Activity
and Account Summary reports. Table C-2 on page C-27 explains the commands on
the menu bar and toolbar.
Menu bar and toolbar
for viewing and
managing reports
Counter for views
(reports) and pages
within each report
Figure C-22: Commands for viewing and managing report windows
The counter keeps track of views and pages.
♦ Each view corresponds to a report. Whenever you create an Account Summary or
Account Activity report, the view counter increases by 1. The VCR buttons for
views allow you to view the previous or next report view or jump directly to the
first or last report view.
♦ If a report view contains more than one page, the VCR buttons for paging through
the report become active.
VCR buttons for
switching among views
VCR buttons for
paging through a view
Figure C-23: VCR buttons for selecting view and pages within each view
C-26
10/2010
Report Viewing Window
Table C-2: Menu bar and toolbar commands for viewing reports
MENU COMMAND
KEYBOARD
DESCRIPTION
File | Print
F11
Open a Print dialog box for printing the report on a Windows printer.
File | Font Smaller
F2
Make the displayed font size smaller.
File | Font Larger
F3
Make the displayed font size larger.
F12
Close the report viewer window. This action does not
delete the report views that you have created. For example, you execute this command while displaying View 4
of 4. The next time you create a report view, the counter
is View 5 of 5, and all of the reports created during the
QCC session are available.
Views | First
Shift+F5
Go to the first report view created during the current
QCC session.
Views | Previous
F5
Go to the previous report view created during the current
QCC session.
Views | Next
F6
Go to the next report view created during the current
QCC session.
Views | Last
Shift+F6
Go to the most recent report view created during the
QCC session.
Views | Close Current
F9
Close the current report view. The view counter is
decreased by one report. If the report counter is at View
1 of 1, the report window closes.
Views | Close All
Shift+F9
Close all report views that you have created during the
current QCC session, then close the report window. For
the next report that you create during the current QCC
session, the view counter is reset to View 1 of 1.
Page | First
Shift+F7
Go to the first page in the current report view.
Page | Previous
F7
Go to the previous page in the current report view.
Page | Next
F8
Go to the next page in the current report view.
Page | Last
Shift+F8
Go to the last page in the current report view.
Page | Grid Output
Shift+F11
Display the transactions or accounts for the current
report in Grid Output window from which you can export
the contents to a Word, Excel, a PDF file, or a text file.
For instructions, see Appendix D.
none
none
Cancel the report. This button turns red while the system
is creating a report. Click the button to cancel the report.
An Account Activity report can take several minutes to
create if you select many accounts with a lot of activity
or if there is a heavy load on the server at your site.
File | Exit
10/2010
ICON
none
C-27
C-28
10/2010
Appendix D:
Grid Output Window
Appendix Contents
In This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Menu Bar and Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Options Menu and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Data Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Saving, Printing, and Opening Data from a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Printing to the Default Windows Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
Creating a Delimited Text File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
Creating a PDF File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
Opening in Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Opening in Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
Opening in Excel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
In This Appendix
Figure D-1 illustrates the Grid Output window. Table D-1 summarizes the tasks that
you can do from this window.
This window opens after you do any of the following:
♦ On the menu bar, select Options and Grid Output.
♦ Click the
(Grid Output [F11]) icon.
♦ Press SHIFT+F11.
The Grid Output window displays the contents of the grid that was active when you
opened the window. It allows you to save the contents of the grid as a text file, print
the grid, or save it as a PDF, Word, or Excel file.
NOTE: In the following illustrations, the column headings come from the Print Files tab on
the Print Manager window. When you open a Grid Output window, the actual column headings come from the tab or subtab that was active when you opened the Grid Output window.
10/2010
D-1
Figure D-1: Grid Output window
Table D-1: Parts of the Grid Output window
D-2
REGION
PURPOSE
PAGE
Menu bar
Toolbar
The menus and command icons allow you to do the following:
♦ Close the window.
♦ Print the contents of the grid.
♦ Create a PDF file.
♦ Save the grid in a Word or Excel document.
♦ Import the grid into Excel with the import wizard.
D-3
Data grid
The data grid displays the grid that was active when you opened the
Grid Output window.
D-5
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Menu Bar and Toolbar Commands
File Menu
Menu Bar and Toolbar Commands
♦ File Menu
♦ Options Menu and Toolbar
File Menu
The File menu has but one command. It allows you to exit the window when you are
through using it.
To exit the window, do any of the following:
♦ On the menu bar, click File and Exit.
♦ Press F12.
Options Menu and Toolbar
The Options menu and toolbar contain the commands for printing or saving the contents of the data grid to a text file, PDF, Word, or Excel.
The toolbar and Options menu
contain the same commands.
Figure D-2: Options menu and toolbar for the Grid Output window
10/2010
D-3
Table D-2: Menu and toolbar commands for the Grid Output window
OPTION MENU
COMMAND
D-4
COMMAND ICON
AND SHORTCUT
PURPOSE
PAGE
Count Pages
Ctrl+F2
Count the number of pages required to print
the contents of the data grid with the Print...
command.
n/a
Print...
Ctrl+F11
Print the columns selected in the Settings
dialog box on the default Windows printer for
your PC.
D-7
Create File...
Ctrl+F4
Create a text file that contains the columns
selected in the Settings dialog box. You can
choose the delimiter that separates the data
in each column.
D-8
Create PDF...
Ctrl+F
Create a PDF file that contains the columns
that you have selected in the Settings dialog
box.
D-10
Open in Word...
Ctrl+W
Open a Microsoft Word document that contains the columns that you have selected in
the Settings dialog box.
D-15
Open in Excel...
Ctrl+X
Open a spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel that
contains the columns that you have selected
in the Settings dialog box.
D-18
Open with Excel
Wizard...
Ctrl+Z
Import the columns selected in the Settings
dialog box into Excel using the Text Import
Wizard. The wizard allows you to specify the
data format for each column in the spreadsheet and select which columns to import.
D-20
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Data Grid
Options Menu and Toolbar
Data Grid
The data grid displays a copy of the grid that you were viewing when you opened the
Grid Output window. Figure D-3 on page D-6 illustrates an example of using the data
in the Local Print Files tab in the Print Manager window as the basis for the contents
of a Grid Output window.
You can navigate through the data grid in the following ways:
♦ Drag the scroll arrow or scroll box in the vertical or horizontal scroll bars.
♦ After you click any cell in the data grid, you can navigate through the tab with the
keys described in Table 3-16.
Table D-3: Keys for moving through the data grid after clicking a cell
TO MOVE THE CURSOR
PRESS THESE KEYS
Down one page
PAGE DOWN
Down one row
DOWN ARROW
First column in a row
HOME
First row
CTRL+HOME
Last column in a row
END
Last row
CTRL+END
Left one column
LEFT ARROW
Right one column
RIGHT ARROW
Up one page
PAGE UP
Up one row
UP ARROW
HINT: You can resize the Grid Output window with all of the standard techniques for resizing a window on the Windows desktop.
10/2010
D-5
The Print Files tab is the
source for the Grid Output
window in this example.
This sample screen shows
the first 13 lines of the tab.
After you open a Grid
Output window, the data
grid shows the contents of
the Print Files tab that you
were viewing. This
example shows the first 13
lines for the data grid.
Figure D-3: Example of using a module in QCC as the source for the Grid Output window
D-6
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Saving, Printing, and Opening Data from a Grid
Printing to the Default Windows Printer
Saving, Printing, and Opening Data from a
Grid
These instructions tell how to use the Grid Output window to do the following tasks:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Creating a Delimited Text File
Creating a PDF File
Opening in Excel or Word
Opening in Excel Wizard
NOTE: These instructions name the command icons to use. You can also use the equivalent menu command or keyboard shortcut from Table D-2 on page D-4.
1 If desired, click the
(Count Pages [Ctrl+F12]) icon to display the number of
pages that will be printed in the QSSGrid dialog box. Close the dialog box to continue to the next step.
2 Click the
(Print [Ctrl+F11]) icon..
3 Make your selections in the Settings dialog box.
Figure D-4: Settings for printing to the default Windows printer
10/2010
Print Grid
Lines
Not applicable for this task.
Delimiter
Orientation
Click Portrait or Landscape to select the page orientation
when printing the grid.
D-7
Columns to
remove
Highlight the columns that you want to remove when printing,
the grid.
Click a column name to change it from normal text to highlighted, or vice-versa.
4 After you are finished making selections, do one of the following to close the Settings dialog box:
 Select [Cancel] to abandon the print job.
 Select [Continue] to print the grid on the default Windows printer for your PC.
1 Click the
(Create File [Ctrl+F4]) icon.
Figure D-5: Settings for creating a text file
Print Grid
Lines
Not applicable to this task.
Delimiter
Select the delimiter between columns in the output file.
♦ Select None to print each row exactly as it displays on
the screen. There are no spaces between the columns.
Each row on the screen is one long string of text without
any separation between the columns.
♦ Select Comma to insert a comma between each column
so that each column is a separate field in a table row.
Many spreadsheet and database programs allow importing comma-delimited files.
D-8
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
♦ Select Space to insert a space between each column. The
length of each line can vary because the length of the
data in each column can vary from row to row.
♦ Select Tab to insert a tab between each column so that
each column is a field in a table row. Many spreadsheet
and database programs can import tab-delimited files.
Orientation
Columns to
remove
Highlight the columns that you want to remove when creating
the file.
Click a column name to change it from normal text to highlighted or from highlighted to normal text.
3 After you are finished making selections, do one of the following to close the Settings dialog box.
 Select [Cancel] to exit and abandon creating the file.
 Select [Continue] to continue to the next step and create the file.
4 A Save As dialog box displays.
Figure D-6: Save As dialog box for making a text file
 In the Save in drop-down list, select the drive and folder where you want to
save the file.
10/2010
D-9
> For most QCC modules, the default folder is the temporary folder that QCC
creates for your QCC user name.
> If you open the Grid Output window from the Print Manager window, the
default folder is the PrintFiles folder for Print Manager.
QSS recommends that you select a different folder for saving your files so that
they are easier to find and manage. Getting to the folders for QCC requires
remembering a long and complex path to files.
 For the File name, type a file name with a .txt extension, such as
fileList17.txt.
The resulting file is a plain ASCII text file. Each row of the grid is a record that
ends with a hard return. The columns are separated by the delimiter that you
chose when creating the file.
 Leave Save as type blank.
 To close the dialog box, do one of the following.
> Select [Save] to create the file.
> Select [Cancel] to exit without creating the file.
Creating a PDF File
1 Click the
(Create PDF [Ctrl+F]) icon.
Figure D-7: Settings for creating a PDF file
D-10
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Creating a PDF File
Print Grid
Lines
Not applicable to PDF files.
Delimiter
Orientation
Columns to
remove
Click the columns that you want to remove from the PDF file.
The highlighted columns are removed from the PDF file.
 Select [Cancel] to exit and abandon creating the file.
 Select [Continue] to continue to the next step and create the file.
4 A Create PDF dialog box displays.
Figure D-8: Create PDF dialog box for making a PDF file
5 Leave the Input file as is.
The box displays the full path to the Temp or PrintFiles folder for your QCC user
name. The system assigns the name of the input file based on the time you created
it, such as out20060914164358.txt for a file created on year 2006, month 09, day
14, time 16:43:58.
10/2010
D-11
Table D-4: Commands for the Create PDF dialog box
MENU COMMAND
KEYBOARD
ICON
PURPOSE
File | Exit
F12
none
Close the dialog box.
Options | Create
PDF
Ctrl+F1
Create a PDF file from the data grid.
Options | Open
PDF
Ctrl+F2
Open the PDF file after you have created it with the Create PDF
command.
Options | Reset to
Defaults
Ctrl+D
Restore all of the boxes on the dialog
box to their default settings.
Options | Print
Screen
F11
Print a graphic image of the dialog
box on the default Windows printer
for your PC.
6 For the Output file, select the path and the name for the PDF file that you are
creating.
QSS suggests that you choose a path other than the cryptic one assigned by QCC.
You can select the file path and name in one of the following ways:
 Type the full path of the name for the PDF file, such as:
f:\archives\printfilelist.pdf
Be sure that .pdf is at the end of the file name. That extension signals Windows to open the file with Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader.
 Click the box to the right of the Output file to bring up a Save PDF As dialog
box.
> From the Save in drop-down list, select the drive and folder in which you
want to create the PDF file.
> Type File name for the PDF file.
> Leave the Save as type as is.
> Select [Save] to select the file name and close the dialog box, or select
[Cancel] to close the dialog box without changing the default file name and
continue.
D-12
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Creating a PDF File
7 If desired, fill in the optional Author Name, Creator, Keywords, Subject, and
Title.
All of these fields are optional. They are primarily for making the file more visible
to Web search engines that use the Title to display the name of the document and
the Keywords to search for documents.
8 Select a Font from the drop-down list.
The only choices are Courier and Courier New, which are monospaced fonts.
Thus, the columns will line up properly in the PDF file.
9 Select a Font Size from the drop-down list.
Make the font size small enough so that the entire grid can fit on a print line. For
example, you are printing portrait pages with a print line that is 7-1/2 inches wide.
If the grid is 9 inches wide, the last 1-1/2 inches will be truncated. The solution to
this problem is using a smaller font or to choosing a landscape page from the
Paper Size list.
10 Select a Paper Size from the drop-down list.
11 Select the Vertical Spacing from the drop-down list, or select the number of Lines
per Page.
 The Vertical Spacing can be anything from 0.2 to 4.999 in increments of .001
lines.
> A setting of 1.000 means that there is no extra white space between the lines.
For example, the current font is 10-point Courier New. The distance between
the baseline of one line and the next is 10 points. (A point is 1/72 of an inch.)
> A setting of more than 1.000 means there is white space between the lines.
For example, a line spacing of 1.200 means that distance between the baseline of one line and the next is 1.200 times the font size. In the case of 10
point Courier New, this setting inserts 2 points of extra space between print
lines.
> A setting of less than 1.000 creates negative white space. For example, a line
spacing of 0.800 means that the distance between the baseline of one line
and the next is 0.800 times the point size for the font.
First line of 10 point Courier New with line spacing of 0.800.
Second line of 10 point Courier New with line spacing of 0.800.
10/2010
D-13
 The Lines per Page can be anywhere from 1 through 200.
This number is the total lines per page from the top edge of the page to the bottom edge. Many laser printers have an unprintable area around the outside edge
of the page, so the number of printable lines may be less than the Lines per
Page.
The two drop-down lists are linked.
 If you select the Vertical Spacing, the Lines per Page list displays how many
lines fit on each page.
 If you select the Lines per Page, the Vertical Spacing list displays the amount
of space between lines to make the number of lines fit on a page.
12 For Rotate, select the number of degrees to rotate the print.
In most cases, you can leave the rotation at zero degrees and use the Page Size
selection to determine whether the PDF file has a portrait or landscape orientation.
13 For Left Margin, select how far in from the left side of the page you want each
print line to be.
14 For Top Margin, select how far down from the top of the page you want the first
line to print.
15 Create the PDF file in any of the following ways.
 Click the
(Create PDF [Ctrl+F1]) icon.
 From the menu bar, click Options and Create PDF.
After the file is created, the title bar displays the message “*** File created ***.”
16 If Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader is installed on your PC, you can view the PDF
file that you have just created in any of the following ways:
 Click the
(Open PDF[Ctrl+F2]) icon.
 From the menu bar, select Options and Open PDF.
D-14
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Opening in Word
17 Close the Create PDF dialog box in any of the following ways.
 Click the
(Exit [F12]) icon.
 From the menu bar, click File and Exit.
Opening in Word
1 Click the
(Open in Word [Ctrl+W]) icon.
Figure D-9: Settings for opening a list in Word
Print Grid
Lines
Delimiter
Select the delimiter between columns in the Word file.
♦ Select None to export each row exactly as it displays on
the screen. Each row on the grid becomes a paragraph
with all of the data in run together as a continuous string.
There is no space separating the contents of each
column.
♦ Select Comma to insert a comma between each column
so that each column is a separate field in a table row.
Word allows you to transform a comma-delimited file
into a table for easier viewing.
♦ Select Space to insert a space between each column.
Each row of the grid becomes a paragraph with a space
separating the data in the columns. Each empty column
becomes a space. The length of each line depends on
how much data is each column.
10/2010
D-15
♦ Select Tab to insert a tab between each column. Each
row of the grid becomes a paragraph with a tab separating each column. Word allows you to transform a tabdelimited file into a table for easier viewing.
Orientation
Click Portrait or Landscape to select the page orientation.
Columns to
remove
Highlight the columns that you want to remove when exporting
the grid.
 Select [Cancel] to exit and abandon opening a Word file.
 Select [Continue] to continue to the next step and open a Word file.
4 If a Convert File dialog box displays, select Plain Text, then click [OK] to
continue.
5 A new Microsoft Word window opens and displays the data from the grid.
The format of the Word file depends on your choice of delimiter.
 If you chose a tab-delimited file, there is a TAB character separating the cells in
each row.
 If you chose a comma-delimited file, each cell in a row is separated by a
comma.
 If you chose a space-delimited file, there is a space between each cell in the
row.
 If you chose no delimiter, the entire row is one long string with no space
between the cells.
6 Save the file with a path and name of your choice.
The dialog box illustrated in Figure D-10 displays in Word 2003 after you select
File and Save As from Word’s pull-down menus. This dialog box allows you to
select the path, name, and type of the file.
 From the Save in drop-down list, select the drive and folder for saving the file.
If you leave this selection as is, the file is saved in the Temp folder for your
QCC user name. QSS suggests that you select a different folder for files that
you want to keep.
D-16
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Opening in Word
Figure D-10: Save As dialog box dialog box for Word
 In the File name, type the name that you want to give the file. If you leave this
selection as is, the file has the system-assigned name that displays in the title
bar for the Microsoft Word window. You can give the file a shorter and more
meaningful name.
 From the Save as type drop-down list, select the file format.
> Select Plain Text (*.txt) to save the file as a plain text file. You cannot
change the font, make text bold, or do any other such enhancements to the
file.
> Select Word Document (*.doc) to save the file as a Word document. With
this format, you can use Word to change the font, make text bold or italic,
and do other such formatting enhancements.
7 If you have saved the text file as a Word document, you can convert a tab- or
comma-delimited file into a table to make the data easier to read.
 Press CTRL+A to select the entire document.
 From the Table menu, select Convert and Text to Table.
 In the Convert Text to Table dialog box, make sure the Separate text at Tabs or
Separate text at Commas option is selected.
 After you select [OK], the Word document turns into a table.
 Save the Word document to preserve the table formatting.
10/2010
D-17
These instructions are for Word 2003. The commands may be different for other
versions of Word.
HINT: For a comma-delimited file, a row will not be interpreted correctly if a column contains
a comma. For example, a job description column includes the following: Teacher, Third
Grade. This column will be split into two columns because of the comma after "Teacher".
However, the same job title would be kept in the same column for a tab-delimited file, as the
TAB character defines the boundaries between columns.
Opening in Excel
1 Click the
(Open in Excel [Ctrl+W]) icon.
Figure D-11: Settings for opening a list in Excel or Word
Print Grid
Lines
Delimiter
When exporting to Excel, the Grid Output window always
creates a tab-delimited file.
Orientation
Click Portrait or Landscape to select the page orientation.
Columns to
remove
Highlight the columns that you want to remove when exporting
the list.
D-18
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Opening in Excel
 Select [Cancel] to exit and abandon opening an Excel file.
 Select [Continue] to continue to the next step and open an Excel file.
4 A new Microsoft Excel window opens and displays the data that you have exported
from the grid.
Excel opens a tab-delimited file created by the Grid Output window. Each row of
the grid becomes a row on the spreadsheet, and each selected column from the grid
becomes a column of the spreadsheet. The columns are automatically sized to fit
the width of the data.
5 If you want to create an Excel spreadsheet, save the file in Excel format.
After you select File and Save from the pull-down menus in Excel, a Save As dialog box opens.
Figure D-12: Save As dialog box dialog box for Excel
This dialog box allows you to define the path, name, and type for the file.
If you leave this selection as is, the file is saved in the Temp folder for your GUI
user name.
selection as is, the file has the system-assigned name that displays in the title
10/2010
D-19
bar for the Microsoft Excel window. You can give the file a shorter and more
meaningful name.
 From the Save as type drop-down list, select one of the following:
> Leave Text (Tab Delimited) (*.txt) as is to save the file as a plain text file.
> Select Microsoft Excel Workbook (*.xls) to save the file as an Excel file.
 Select [Save] to save the file, or select [Cancel] to close the Save As dialog box
without saving the file.
1 Click the
(Open in Excel Wizard [Ctrl+Z]) icon.
Figure D-13: Settings for opening a list in Excel Wizard
Print Grid
Lines
Delimiter
When opening in Excel Wizard, the Grid Output window
always creates a tab-delimited file.
Orientation
D-20
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Columns to
remove
Highlight the columns that you want to remove when saving,
printing, or exporting the list.
 Select [Cancel] to exit and abandon opening an Excel file.
 Select [Continue] to continue to the next step and open an Excel file.
4 An Open dialog box displays.
 Select [Cancel] to abandon sending the file.
 Press [Open] to continue to the next step.
5 Define the type of text to import in the Text Import Wizard.
Figure D-14: Text Import Wizard step for choosing original data type
Excel opens the first of three screens for the Text Import Wizard. This step allows
you to define the type of file being imported to Excel.
 For the Original data type, the Text Import Wizard automatically checks
Delimited. Leave this check box as is.
 Select [Next >] to continue to the next step.
10/2010
D-21
6 Define the data that goes in each column of the spreadsheet in the Text Import
Wizard.
Figure D-15: Wizard for dividing up the report line into spreadsheet columns
Under Delimiters, the Tab box is checked. Leave this check box and the rest of the
window as is.
Select [Next >] to continue with importing data.
D-22
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
7 Define the data format for each column of the spreadsheet in the Text Import
Wizard.
Figure D-16: Wizard for defining the data format for each column of the spreadsheet
In most cases, the default choice of General format will work for a column. But
you can customize each column.
HINT: The General format removes all leading zeroes. For example, 0018 becomes
18. If you want to maintain leading zeroes on accounts, site numbers, district numbers, and the like, select the Text format.
Do the following to change the format of a column:
 Click a column to highlight it in black.
 Under Column data format, click the radio button for a data format or the button for skipping a column.
After you have completed defining the column formats, select [Finish] to import
the file into a spreadsheet.
10/2010
D-23
8 A Microsoft Excel window opens and displays the data you have just imported.
Figure D-17: Microsoft Excel window with data imported into columns
If the spreadsheet did not import as expected, close the Microsoft Word window
without saving the spreadsheet.
After the import, you can resize columns to fit the data by doing the following:
 Click the empty gray box above row 1 and to the left of column A.
 Place the mouse pointer between any two columns headings. When you do, the
cursor becomes a double-headed arrow .
 Double-click the left mouse button to reformat all columns to the width of the
data that they contain.
D-24
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
9 If you want to keep the Excel spreadsheet, save the file in Excel format.
Figure D-18: Save As dialog box dialog box for Excel
After you select File and Save As from the pull-down menus in Excel, a Save As
dialog box opens. It displays the system-assigned path and name. Use this dialog
box to define the drive, folder, and name under which you want to save the file.
If you leave this selection as is, the file is saved in the Temp folder for your
QCC user. QSS suggests that you select a different folder for files that you
want to keep.
selection as is, the file retains the system-assigned name that displays in the title
bar for the Microsoft Excel window. You can give the file a shorter and more
meaningful name.
 From the Save as type drop-down list, select Microsoft Excel Workbook
(*.xls).
 Select [Save] to save the file, or select [Cancel] to close the Save As dialog box
without saving the file.
10/2010
D-25
D-26
, 2007
Copyright © QSS
10/2010
Revision History
This revision history uses the following terms to describe the history of this
publication:
♦ The Published date is the initial release of the document.
♦ A Revised edition is an update to make the document reflect changes to the
software.
October 2010 Publication
October 2010 is the initial publication of the QCC Benefits Management Manual.
This manual is based on the August 2008 revision to the QSS/OASIS Benefits Management Manual, which documents the traditional version of Benefits Management.
The October 2010 publication tells how to use the QCC version of Benefits Management and includes the changes made to Benefits Management since 2008.
10/2010
Rev-1
Rev-2
Revision History
10/2010
Index
A
About command, 5-25
activating tabs, A-9
Active command, 4-19
Add Plan command, 4-18
ALT+TAB (previous available box), A-10
Assignments/ENH form and Benefits Management
form, 4-8
Assignments/STD form and Benefits Management
form, 4-8
audience, 1-2
B
instructions for launching, 5-28 to 5-29
purpose, 5-28
report sample, 5-35
Report Selections tab, 5-30 to 5-33
Select Employees tab, 5-33
purpose, 5-50
report sample, 5-54 to 5-55
Benefit Information area. See under Benefits
Management form
purpose, 5-36
report sample
all categories, 5-42 to 5-43
one package only, 5-43
Select Employees tab, 5-37 to 5-41
Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file, 3-22
purpose, 5-44
purpose, 5-84
report sample
error report, 5-92
mass FTE change, 5-94 to 5-96
run-only, 5-90
sequence for using, 5-84
10/2010
benefit packages
assgning to employees on Benefits Management
form, 4-35 to 4-37
assigning based on Salary Schedule, 4-37
defining. See Package Codes (BMPK) master file
mass add of packages. See Mass Benefit Plan Add
Report (BM0835)
mass change of benefit plans. See Mass Benefit
Plan Change Report (BM0815)
mass delete of plans. See Mass Benefit Plan Delete
Report (BM0825)
Quick Change tab, 4-49 to 4-50
rolling ot next year. See Benefits Management
Roll-Over Report (BM0805)
purpose, 5-56
report sample, 5-59
Benefit Status (BMBS) master file
boxes in form, 3-9 to 3-10
instructions for defining, 3-9
purpose, 3-9
(BMI020)
purpose, 5-136
report sample, 5-142
(BMI100)
purpose, 5-143
Benefits Management form
assigning Benefit Packages to employees, 4-35 to
4-37
Assignments/ENH form and, 4-8
Benefit Information area
Benefit Status code, 4-10
Cobra, 4-12
D box, 4-14
default Coverage Level for employee, 4-9
election date, 4-10
employee percentage, 4-13
employer percentage, 4-14
end date for coverage, 4-10
-- continued on next column --
Index-1
Benefits Management form - continued
Benefit Information area - continued
FTE calculation, 4-13
FTE rule, 4-12
M box, 4-14
Package Code assignment, 4-9
salary calculation rule, 4-15
Section 125, 4-11
working spouse, 4-16
changing benefit information
causes for change, 4-38 to 4-39
changed FTE in Position Control, 4-53
correcting erroneous Benefit Package, 4-45 to
4-46
coverage level or premium without audit trail,
4-52 to 4-53
creating an audit trail
lock rules, 4-41 to 4-42
roll-over process, 4-42
exit date
changing Benefit Package or Coverage
Level, 4-43
example, 4-43
terminated employees, 4-48
when to use, 4-42
inactive records, 4-53
summary of methods, 4-40
Comments tab
adding, 4-26
changing, 4-27
deleting, 4-27
dialog box for, 4-27 to 4-28
Customer Information tab, 4-25 to 4-26
Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file and,
3-110 to 3-111
Demographic form and, 4-8
Dependents tab
adding, 4-23
deleting, 4-23
information on, 4-24 to 4-25
totals for, 4-25
Employee Information area, 4-8
menu bar, 4-5
name bar, 4-7
overview, 4-3 to 4-4
Payroll Information tab
4-29
Deduction Schedules, 4-29
filling in, 4-28 to 4-29
Vol-Ded Frequency codes, 4-29
Index-2
Benefits Management form - continued
Plan Information tab
Benefit Plans, 4-19
commands, 4-18 to 4-19
employee amount, 4-20
employer amount, 4-21
life insurance increment and rate, 4-21
Plan Level, 4-20
posted (reconciled) date, 4-22
totals for Benefit Plans, 4-22
Quick Change tab, 4-26, 4-49 to 4-50
status bar, 4-7, 4-29 to 4-30
tab bar overview, 4-17
title bar, 4-4
toolbar, 4-5
Benefits Management Roll Over Report (BM0805)
purpose, 5-114
Benefits Pre-Invoice Duplicates (BMI011), 5-157
benefits pre-invoice reports
purpose, 5-148
report sample
Benefits Pre-Invoice CSAR Post (BMI012),
5-157
Benefits Pre-Invoice Duplicates (BMI011),
5-157
Benefits Pre-Invoice Errors (BMI011), 5-157
Benefits Pre-Invoice Pre-List (BMI011), 5-156
resulting invoices in IBM, 5-158 to 5-159
billing basis
Plan Codes (BMPC) master file, 3-13, 3-17 to 3-18
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file, 3-97,
3-103
purpose, 5-60
report sample
by plan, 5-66
one insurer, 5-67
with dependents, 5-66
BM form. See Benefits Management form
BM0200. See Benefit Information Listing (BM0200)
BM0210. See Billing Report (BM0210)
BM0220. See Dependents Report (BM0220)
10/2010
Index
BM0230. See Benefit Management Cash Out Report
(BM0230)
BM0250. See Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report
(BM0250)
BM0260. See Benefit Employee Comment Listing
(BM0260)
BM0270. See Life Insurance Benefit Listing
(BM0270)
BM0800, BM0805. See Benefits Management Roll
Over Report (BM0805)
BM0810, BM0815. See Mass Benefit Plan Change
Report (BM0815)
BM0820, BM0825. See Mass Benefit Plan Delete
Report (BM0825)
BM0830, BM0835. See Mass Benefit Plan Add Report
(BM0835)
BM0850, BM0855. See Benefit Management
Recalculation Report (BM0855)
BM0900, BM0905. See Update Pay Deductions from
Benefits Management (BM0905)
BMBS master file. See Benefit Status (BMBS) master
file
BMCA master file. See Cap Amounts (BMCA) master
file
BMCL master file. See Deduction Class List (BMCL)
master file
BMDC master file. See Dependent Code (BMDC)
master file
BMFLDD user security, 3-34, 4-14
BMFLDM user security, 3-34, 4-14
BMI010, BMI011, BMI012. See benefits pre-invoice
reports
BMI011, 5-157
BMI020. See Benefits Employee/AR Customer Mass
Create/Link (BMI020)
BMI100. See Benefits Employee/CSAR Customer ID
Listing (BMI100), 5-143
BMLC master file. See Coverage Level (BMLC)
master file
BMPA master file. See Package Assignment (BMPA)
master file
BMPC master file. See Plan Codes (BMPC) master
file
BMPK master file. See Package Codes (BMPK)
master file
10/2010
C
Cancel/Close command
code selection dialog box, 5-161
launch window, 5-12, 5-14
Cap Amounts (BMCA) master file
and, 3-22
purpose, 3-20
types of caps, 3-20
changing benefit information. See under Benefits
Management form
check boxes, A-12
Clear command, 5-161
Clear Screen command, 5-14
click, A-2
Close command
Benefits Management form, 4-6
BM comment dialog box, 4-28
COBRA
Benefit Employee Comment Listing (BM0260),
5-32
Benefit Management Cash Out Report (BM0230),
5-48
(BM0855), 5-90
Benefits Management Roll-Over Report
(BM0805), 5-120
Billing Report (BM0210), 5-64
Customer Information tab, 4-25
Dependents Report (BM0220), 5-74
Package Codes (BMPK) master file, 3-33
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPK) master file, COBRA
fee for life insurance, 3-53
subjectivity for dependent coverage, 4-24
subjectivity for employee, 4-12
code selection dialog box
menu bar commands, 5-161
overview, 5-160
purpose, 5-160
selecting codes, 5-161 to 5-162
title bar, 5-160
toolbar commands, 5-161
columns, resizing, A-8
command reference
Job Menu window, 5-25
Plan Information tab, 4-18
report viewing window, C-27
Vendor Lookup window, C-4
Index-3
commands
About, 5-25
Active, 4-19
Add Plan, 4-18
Cancel/Close
launch window, 5-12, 5-14
Clear, 5-161
Clear Screen, 5-14
Close
BM Comment dialaog box, 4-28
Delete
BM Comment dialog box, 4-28
Exit, 5-25
Expand All Branches, 5-25
First Employee, 4-6
Grid Output, 5-25
Hot Tracking, 5-25
Inactive, 4-19
Last Employee, 4-6
Launch Minimized, 5-25
Lines, 5-25
Load ’Job Screen’ in a Single Click, 5-25
Load Job Screen, 5-25
Maintain, 4-54
Minimize, 4-6
Next Employee, 4-6
Plus and Minus, 5-25
Preserve Expanded Branches, 5-25
Previous Employee, 4-6
Print
Print Screen
launch winow, 5-14
Reactivate, 4-54
Rearrange all empoyee screens, 4-6
Recalculate, 4-18
Remove Plan, 4-18
Reset Search, 5-25
Retrieve Preset, 5-14
Return, 5-161
Roots, 5-25
Save
Save and Close, 4-6
Save Preset, 5-14
Index-4
commands - continued
Search, 5-25
Show, 4-6
Show Status, 5-25
Sort By Alpha, 5-161
Submit, 5-14
Switch to, 4-6
View job script, 5-12
Coverage Level (BMLC) master file
purpose, 3-11
Create Benefits Employee Customers (BMI010)
window. See Benefits Employee/AR Customer Mass
Create/Link (BMI020)
CTRL+A (Save Preset), 5-14
CTRL+B (Sort By Alpha), 5-161
CTRL+E (Expand All Branches), 5-25
CTRL+F8 (Delete), 4-28
CTRL+F9 (Save and Close), 4-6
CTRL+F12 (Show Status), 5-25
CTRL+H (Hot Tracking), 5-25
CTRL+I (Lines), 5-25
CTRL+M (Launch Minimized), 5-25
CTRL+P (Preserve Expanded Branches), 5-25
CTRL+R (Return), 5-161
CTRL+R (Roots), 5-25
CTRL+S (Submit), 5-14
CTRL+T (Retrieve Preset), 5-14
CTRL+U (Plus and Minus), 5-25
D
date boxes
changing dates, A-13
selecting current date, A-14
selecting dates from calendar, A-13
typing dates, A-13
Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file
Benefits Management form and, 3-110 to 3-111
multiple Plan Codes in, 3-111
Payroll Information tab and, 4-29
purpose, 3-110
unusual frequencies for deduction, 3-110
Update Pay Deductions from Benefits
Management (BM0905) and, 3-110
10/2010
Index
Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file - continued
using with
Deduction (PD) form, 3-114 to 3-115
Payroll Information tab, 3-113
Vol-Ded Frequency Codes, 3-112
Voluntary Deduction codes, 3-113
Deduction Schedules, 4-29
Deductions (PD) form, Deduction Class List (BMCL)
master file and, 3-114 to 3-115
default Windows printer, printing to from Grid Output
window, D-7 to D-8
Delete command
delimited text file, printing to from Grid Output
window, D-8 to D-10
Demographic form and Benefits Management form,
4-8
Dependent Code (BMDC) master file
boxes on form, 3-7 to 3-8
purpose, 3-7
purpose, 5-70
Dependents tab. See under Benefits Information form
double-click, A-2
drag, A-2
drop-down arrow, A-10
drop-down lists, A-10 to A-11
E
EE frequencies, 3-110
Employee Information area, 4-8
Employee Maintenance window
opening from QCC, 4-32
searching for employees, 4-32 to 4-34
ER frequencies, 3-110
Excel file, creating from Grid Output window, D-18 to
D-20
Excel Wizard, importing from Grid Output window,
D-20 to D-25
[Exit] button, A-5
Exit command, 5-25
Expand All Branches command, 5-25
10/2010
F
F2 (Load Job Screen), 5-25
F3 (Search), 5-25
F5 (Previous Employee), 4-6
F6 (Next Employee), 4-6
F9 (Save)
F11 (Print Screen)
launch dialog box, 5-14
F11 (Print)
F12 (Cancel/Close), 5-161
F12 (Close)
F12 (Exit), 5-25
First Employee command, 4-6
FTE Allocation Table (BMFT) master file
defining FTE allocation tables, 3-46 to 3-48
employee-type table
allocation of premium percentages, 3-38
applying on Benefits Management (BM) form,
3-40 to 3-41
instructions for defining, 3-39 to 3-40
limitations, 3-39
when to use, 3-39
integration with Coverage Level (BMLC) master
file, 3-38
plan/level type table and Plan/Level Amounts
(BMPL) master file, 3-44
QCC vs traditional software, 3-38
types of tables, 3-38
G
general cap on benefits, 3-20
grid
keyboard shortcuts, A-8
navigating, A-6 to A-7
resizing, A-7
scroll bars, A-7
sorting, A-8
Grid Output command, 5-25
Index-5
Grid Output window
File menu, D-3
keyboard shortcuts, D-4
Options Menu, D-3 to D-4
sending output to
default Windows printer, D-7 to D-8
delimited text file, D-8 to D-10
Excel, D-18 to D-20
Excel Wizard, D-20 to D-25
PDF file, D-10 to D-15
Word, D-15 to D-17
summary of, D-1 to D-2
toolbar, D-3 to D-4
H
Hot Tracking command, 5-25
I
Inactive command, 4-19
Invoicing/Billing Management
creating customer IDs. See Benefits Employee/AR
Customer Mass Create/Link (BMI020)
customer ID, 4-8
initiating invoicing. See benefits pre-invoice
reports
listing benefits customers. See Benefits
Employee/CSAR Customer ID Listing
(BMI100)
mass update processes, 5-9
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file, 3-106 to
3-107
J
Job Menu window
opening from QCC, 5-18 to 5-19
restoring, 5-26 to 5-27
selecting a report from the grid view, 5-23 to 5-24
selecting a report from tree view, 5-20 to 5-22
K
knowledge assumed, 1-3
L
largest cap on benefits, 3-20
Last Employee command, 4-6
Launch Minimized command, 5-25
Index-6
launch window
File menu, 5-12 to 5-13
message bar, 5-15
opening from QCC, 5-17 to 5-27
Options menu, 5-13 to 5-14
overview, 5-10 to 5-11
title bar, 5-11
toolbar, 5-13 to 5-14
life insurance
(BM0805), 5-118
calculating salary for, 4-15
changing packages and exit dates, 4-42
coverage amounts, 3-18
Coverage Level (BMLC) master file, 3-12
increment, 4-21
Plan Codes (BMPL) master file, 3-14, 3-18
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file
age range and converage amounts, 3-104
basic life insurance, 3-70 to 3-72
premium based on FTE, 3-64 to 3-66
premium based on income, 3-67 to 3-69
term life insurance, 3-72 to 3-77
premiums based on face value of policy. See Life
Insurance Benefit Listing (BM0270)
rate, 4-21
restrictions on using Quick Change tab with, 4-49
units purchased, 4-21
purpose, 5-79
report sample, 5-83
Lines command, 5-25
list boxes, A-10
Load ’Job Screen’ in a Single Click command, 5-25
Load Job Screen command, 5-25
logging on to QCC, 4-31, 5-17
M
Maintain command, 4-54
Maintain User Data (MEN020) and user security for
QCC, 1-6
manual overview, 1-1 to 1-2
purpose, 5-97
report sample, 5-101
10/2010
Index
purpose, 5-103
purpose, 5-109
[Maximize] button, A-5
Microsoft Windows
mouse, A-2
resizing
columns, A-8
windows, A-4 to A-5
SHIFT+TAB key, A-2
TAB key, A-2
taskbar, A-5
[Minimize] button, A-4
Minimize command, 4-6
Module, Task, and User Security for QCC guide, 1-6
mouse, A-2
MPE logon ID, 1-6
N
Next Employee command, 4-6
O
option buttons, A-12
P
Package Assignment (BMPA) master file
automatic assignment, 3-36
boxes in form, 3-37
Package Codes (BMPK) master file and, 3-37
purpose, 3-36
Salary Schedules and, 3-36
Package Codes (BMPK) master file
adding and removing Plan Codes, 3-34
assigning to employees, 4-35 to 4-37
Benefits Management (BM) form and, 3-23
COBRA, 3-33
D box, 3-34
10/2010
Package Codes (BMPK) master file - continued
default coverage level, 3-30
default FTE rules, 3-30
lock rules for amounts, 3-31 to 3-32
lock rules for salary, 3-32
M box, 3-34
packages
combining pre- and user-defined, 3-27
pre-defined, 3-23 to 3-24
user-defined, 3-25 to 3-27
primary coverage, 3-33
purpose, 3-23
Section 125, 3-33
PDF file, creating from Grid Output window, D-10 to
D-15
Plan Codes (BMPC) master file
billing basis, 3-13, 3-17
life insurance amounts, 3-18
purpose, 3-13
Section 125, 3-17
types of life insurance, 3-14
Voluntary Deduction number, 3-16
Plan Information tab. See under Benefits Information
form
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file
billing basis, 3-97, 3-103
boxes in form
all Plan Codes, 3-100 to 3-104
FTE allocation tables, 3-107 to 3-109
Invoicing/Billing Management, 3-106 to 3-107
life insurance, 3-104
overview, 3-99
Voluntary Deductions for payroll, 3-104 to
3-106
Coverage Level (BMLC) master file, 3-101
Plan Code (BMPC) master file, 3-101
ways to set up
aggragated employee/employer amount prorated by FTE, 3-92 to 3-95
cap applied to largest employer benefit cost,
3-82 to 3-84
employee amount pro-rated by FTE, 3-88 to
3-91
employee-paid premium with employer
surcharge, 3-53
general cap for total benefit cost, 3-78 to 3-81
life insurance calculation, 3-70 to 3-77
list of, 3-49
Index-7
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file - continued
ways to set up - continued
premium amount summary, 3-96
premium amounts not connected to FTE, 3-50
to 3-51
premium as percentage of income, 3-64 to 3-66
premium as percentage of income (no FTE),
3-67 to 3-69
premium using employee type FTE table, 3-60
to 3-63
pro-rated employer amount but not employee
amount, 3-85 to 3-87
sliding-scale correlation (dollars by FTE), 3-54
to 3-56
stepped correlation between premium
percentage and FTE, 3-57 to 3-59
Plus and Minus command, 5-25
posted (reconciled) date, 4-22
PP02BM user security, 3-36
pre-defined packages, 3-23 to 3-24
Preserve Expanded Branches command, 5-25
Preset Maintenance - Retrieve dialog box
deleting a preset, B-8
description, B-7
list of changed presets, B-8 to B-9
list of saved presets, B-8 to B-9
retrieving a preset, B-8
selecting a preset, B-8
Preset Maintenance - Save dialog box
access levels, B-6
category, B-6
creating new presets from existing ones, B-5
description, B-3
exiting without saving, B-4
list of existing presets, B-6
name and description, B-5
replacing presets, B-4
saving new presets, B-4
Previous Employee command, 4-6
primary coverage
5-32
Benefit Information Listing (BM0200), 5-40
5-47
(BM0855), 5-90
Benefits Employee/AR Customer Mass
Create/Link (BMI020) report, 5-139
(BM0805), 5-119
Index-8
primary coverage - continued
benefits pre-invoice reorts, 5-154
Billing Report (BM0210), 5-63
designating on Benefits Management form, 4-11
working spouse and, 4-16
Print command
Print Screen command
launch window, 5-14
Printing Reports with Print Manager, 1-5
Q
QCC
help files, 1-4
logging on, 4-31, 5-17
opening Employee Maintenance window, 4-32
QSSControlCenter Guide, 1-4
Quick Change tab, 4-26, 4-49 to 4-50
R
radio buttons, A-12
Reactivate command, 4-54
Recalculate command, 4-18
reconciled (posted) date, 4-22
Remove Plan command, 4-18
report presets
categories, B-2
deleting, B-7 to B-9
distinct sets for GUI and traditional software, B-2
levels, B-2
purpose, B-1
retrieving, B-7 to B-9
Save Report Preset command, B-3
saving, B-3 to B-6
report samples
5-35
Benefit Employee Plan Assignment Listing
(BM0240), 5-54 to 5-55
5-48 to 5-49
(BM0855)
error report, 5-92
mass FTE change, 5-94 to 5-96
run-only, 5-90
10/2010
Index
report samples - continued
Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report (BM0250),
5-59
Create/Link (BMI020), 5-142
(BMI100), 5-146 to 5-147
Benefits Management Roll Over Report
(BM0805), 5-121 to 5-122
Benefits Pre-Invoice CSAR Post (BMI012), 5-157
Benefits Pre-Invoice Duplicates (BMI011), 5-157
Benefits Pre-Invoice Errors (BMI011), 5-157
Benefits Pre-Invoice Pre-List (BMI011), 5-156
Billing Report (BM0210), 5-66 to 5-69
Dependents Report (BM0220), 5-77 to 5-78
Life Insurance Benefit Listing (BM0270), 5-83
Mass Benefit Plan Add Report (BM0835), 5-101
Mass Benefit Plan Change Report (BM0815),
5-107 to 5-108
Mass Benefit Plan Delete Report (BM0825), 5-112
to 5-113
Update Pay Deductions from Benefits
Management (BM0905), 5-132 to 5-135
reports and processes
categories, 5-6
invoicing, 5-9
launching. See launch window
listed by launch window, 5-4
listed by report name, 5-5
processes, 5-8 to 5-9
reports, 5-6 to 5-8
Request Benefit Employee Comment Listing
(BM0260) window. See Benefit Employee
Comment Listing (BM0260)
Request Benefit Recalculation (BM0850) window.
See Benefit Management Recalculation Report
(BM0855)
(BMI100) window. See Benefits Employee/CSAR
Customer ID Listing (BMI100)
Request Benefits Information Listing (BM0200)
window. See Benefit Information Listing (BM0200)
Request Benefits Management Cash Out Report
(BM023). See Benefit Management Cash Out Report
(BM0230)
Request Benefits Management Mass Plan Add
(BM0830) window. See Mass Benefit Plan Add
Report (BM0835)
(BM0810) window. See Mass Benefit Plan Change
Report (BM0815)
10/2010
(BM0820) window. See Mass Benefit Plan delete
Report (BM0825)
window. See Benefits Management Roll Over
Report (BM0805)
Request Benefits Pre-Invoice Selection (BMI010)
window. See benefits pre-invoice reports
window. See Benefit Plan Reconciliation Report
(BM0250)
Request Billing Report (BM0210) window. See
Request Dependents Report (BM0220) window. See
Request Life Benefit Plan Listing (BM0270) window.
See Life Insurance Benefit Listing (BM0270) report
Request Update Deductions from Benefits
Management (BM0900) window. See Update Pay
Deductions from Benefits Management (BM0905)
Rerrange all employee screens command, 4-6
Reset Search command, 5-25
resizing
borders, A-4
buttons, A-4
columns, A-8
windows, A-4
[Restore] button, A-5
restoring Job Menu window from Windows taskbar,
5-26 to 5-27
Retrieve Preset command, 5-14
Return command, 5-161
right-click, A-2
Roots command, 5-25
S
Salary Schedules, Package Assignment (BMPA)
master file, 3-36
Save and Close command, 4-6
Save command
Save Preset command, 5-14
Save Report Preset command, B-3
Search command, 5-25
searching for employees, 4-32 to 4-34
Index-9
Section 125
5-32
Benefit Employee Plan Assignment Listing
(BM0240), 5-63
Benefit Information Listing (BM0200), 5-40
5-47
(BM0855), 5-89
Create/Link (BMI020) report, 5-139
(BM0805), 5-119
benefits pre-invoice reports, 5-154
Dependents Report (BM0220), 5-74
Plan Codes (BMPC) master file, 3-17
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file, 3-105 to
3-106
selecting a report from the grid view, Job Menu
window, 5-23 to 5-24
selecting a report from the tree view, Job Menu
window, 5-20 to 5-22
Session Administration window, 1-6
SHIFT+F1 (Clear Screen), 5-14
SHIFT+F1 (Clear), 5-161
SHIFT+F3 (Reset Search), 5-25
SHIFT+F5 (Close), 4-6
SHIFT+F6 (Last Employee), 4-6
SHIFT+F11 (Grid Output), 5-25
SHIFT+F12 (About), 5-25
SHIFT+TAB key, A-2
Show command, 4-6
Show Status command, 5-25
Sort By Alpha command, 5-161
$STDLIST, 5-13
STTEMP file, 5-13
Submit command, 5-14
Switch to command, 4-6
system overview
annual updates, 2-3
assigning benefit packages to employees, 2-6 to
2-7
depenents, 2-2
information tracked, 2-3
invoicing for benefits, 2-11
processes, 2-9 to 2-10
reports, 2-8 to 2-9
setting up master files, 2-4 to 2-5
tracking plans and costs, 2-2
Index-10
System Security and Session Administration guide,
1-5
System Security window, 1-6
T
TAB (next availble box), A-10
TAB key, A-2
tabs
navigating, A-9
selecting boxes, A-9 to A-10
taskbar, A-5
text boxes
adding text, A-11
available, A-9
deleting text, A-11
editing content, A-11
replacing text, A-11 to A-12
title bar, launch window, 5-11
U
(BM0905)
3-110
Deduction Selection tab, 5-130 to 5-131
Employee Selection tab, 5-128 to 5-130
full load vs. partial load, 5-124
prerequisites for using, 5-123
purpose, 5-123
user security
BMFLDD, 3-34, 4-14
BMFLDM, 3-34, 4-14
PP02BM, 3-36
user security and Maintain User Data (MEN020), 1-6
V
Vendor Activity report
instructions for viewing, C-26
launching from Vendor Lookup window, C-14
sample
financial information, C-23
itemized transactions, C-24 to C-25
menu bar, C-23
overview, C-22
toolbar, C-23
vendor information, C-23
selecting transactions, C-20 to C-22
10/2010
Index
Vendor Information report
instructions for viewing, C-26
launching from Vendor Activity report, C-14
menu bar, C-17
sample, C-18
toolbar, C-17
Vendor Activity Report and, C-19
Vendor Lookup window
command summary, C-4
Commodity Lookup tab, C-12
Employee Lookup tab, C-12 to C-13
general search criteria, C-6 to C-7
instructions for searching, C-5 to C-6
overview, C-2 to C-3
Results tab
additional addresses, C-16
adjusting vendors per page, C-15
columns in the grid, C-14 to C-15
commodities, C-16
selecting a vendor, C-13 to C-14
TIN Lookup tab, C-11
Vendor Lookup tab
Additional Information subtab, C-10 to C-11
Contact Information subtab, C-7 to C-10
vertical spacing for PDF files, D-13 to D-14
View job script command, 5-12
Vol-Ded Frequency Codes, 4-29
Voluntary Deductions
Deduction Class List (BMCL) master file, 3-113
general cap, 3-20
Plan Codes (BMPC) master file, 3-16
Plan Codes and, 3-13
Plan/Level Amounts (BMPL) master file, 3-104
unusual frequencies for, 3-110
W
Windows taskbar, restoring Job Menu window, 5-26
to 5-27
Word file, creating from Grid Output window, D-15 to
D-17
10/2010
Index-11
Index-12
10/2010

QCC Benefits Management Manual

Transcription

Similar documents

July, 1993 - Stumpf Welding Supplies

Monster Jobs - by Carpe Data

Computer Settings For NAUTIKOS

Afni Background Check Process Guide

PS Classroom Reports for Teachers_20061026.fm

Dues Card Instructions - Grand Chapter of Texas

NTREIS Internet Explorer Settings

Internet Explorer 7 and Internet Explorer 8 Browser Security Settings

1. Go to ezlm.adp.com and click the